8C108 Scheme Document

Transcription

1 8C108 Scheme Document 2013/14 Associate Degree Scheme in Business 工 商 業 副 學 士 組 合 課 程

2 Associate Degree Scheme in Business (Scheme Code 8C108) comprising Associate in Business 工 商 業 副 學 士 Associate in Business (Accounting) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 會 計 ) Associate in Business (Business Management) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 商 業 管 理 ) Associate in Business (China Business) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 中 國 商 業 ) Associate in Business (Finance) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 金 融 ) Associate in Business (Hospitality Management) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 酒 店 管 理 ) Associate in Business (Human Resources Management) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 人 力 資 源 管 理 ) Associate in Business (International Business) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 國 際 商 業 ) Associate in Business (Logistics and Supply Chain Management) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 物 流 及 供 應 鏈 管 理 ) Associate in Business (Marketing) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 市 場 學 ) Associate in Business (Tourism Management) 工 商 業 副 學 士 ( 旅 遊 管 理 ) Definitive Scheme Document September 2013

3 This Definitive Scheme Document applies to the cohort of students admitted in the 2013/14 academic year. Students should abide by all the rules and regulations stated herein, as well as those stated in the Student Handbook. Both this Definitive Scheme Document and the Student Handbook are subject to review and HKCC may make appropriate changes at any time. Students will be informed of the changes as and when appropriate. Last updated in September 2014

4 Section One: General Information Table of Contents 1. Host Department 1 2. Scheme Operation and Management Programmes under the Scheme Scheme and Programme Leaders College Programme Committee Scheme Executive Group Student/Staff Consultative Group Programme Counselling Teams 2 3. Aims and Intended Learning Outcomes 2 4. Minimum Entry Requirements 3 5. Granting of Award 4 6. Mode and Duration of Study 4 7. Attendance 4 Page 8. Curriculum Structure Subject Level and Subject Code Credit and Level Requirements General Education Requirements Discipline-specific Requirements Award with No Specialism Awards with Specialism Summary Programme Curriculum Map Medium of Instruction Teaching and Learning Methods Assessment and Examinations Principles of Assessment Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel Role of Board of Examiners Assessment Methods Academic Probation Progression and De-registration Grading Grade Point Average Retaking Subjects Taking Additional Subjects Plagiarism and Dishonesty Guidelines for Award Classification Student Appeals Exceptional Circumstances Other Regulations 45

5 Section One: General Information Page Appendix I Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 46 (8C108-NS) Appendix II Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 47 (Accounting) (8C108-ACC) Appendix III Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 48 (Business Management) (8C108-BM) Appendix IV Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 49 (China Business) (8C108-CB) Appendix V Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 50 (Finance) (8C108-FIN) Appendix VI Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 51 (Hospitality Management) (8C108-HM) Appendix VII Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 52 (Human Resources Management) (8C108-HR) Appendix VIII Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 53 (International Business) (8C108-IB) Appendix IX Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 54 (Logistics and Supply Chain Management) (8C108-LM) Appendix X Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 55 (Marketing) (8C108-MK) Appendix XI Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business 56 (Tourism Management) (8C108-TM) Section Two: Syllabuses CCN1001 Elementary Chinese 57 CCN1002 Practical English for College Students 59 CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students 61 CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking 63 CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I 66 CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II 69 CCN1007 Information Technology for Business 72 CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 74 CCN1010 Cultural Study through Field Trip 76 CCN1011 Elementary French 79 CCN1012 Foundation of Traditional Chinese Medicine 81 CCN1013 Freshman Seminar 84 CCN1014 Fundamental Visualisation Skills 87 CCN1015 Healthy Living and Common Health Problems 89 CCN1016 Introduction to Internet Technology 91 CCN1017 Introduction to Psychology 93 CCN1018 Introduction to Sociology 96 CCN1019 Japanese I 98 CCN1020 Leadership and Intra-personal Development 100 CCN1021 Personal Financial Planning 103 CCN1022 Personal Growth and Development 105

6 Section Two: Syllabuses Page CCN1023 Principles of Programming 108 CCN1024 Putonghua for College Students 110 CCN1025 The History and Culture of Hong Kong 113 CCN1026 Themes of Art Appreciation 115 CCN1101 Fundamentals of Human Resources Management 117 CCN1102 Hotel Operations 120 CCN1103 Introduction to Tourism 122 CCN2001 Introduction to Chinese Political and Legal System 124 CCN2002 Introduction to Economics 127 CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 130 CCN2004 Managing Organisations 132 CCN2005 Organisational Behaviour 134 CCN2006 Understanding Globalisation 136 CCN2007 Business Putonghua 138 CCN2008 Chemistry and Modern Living 141 CCN2009 Chinese for Academic Purposes 144 CCN2010 English for Workplace Communication 146 CCN2011 Environmental Science 148 CCN2012 Experiencing Architecture 151 CCN2013 Exploring Human Nature 153 CCN2014 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health 155 CCN2015 Gender Issues 158 CCN2016 Grammar in Context 160 CCN2017 Introduction to Chinese Culture 162 CCN2018 Introduction to Chinese Literature 165 CCN2019 Introduction to Communication Studies 167 CCN2020 Introduction to Philosophy 170 CCN2021 Introduction to Political Science 172 CCN2022 Japanese II 174 CCN2023 Light, Man and Environment 176 CCN2024 Logic and Reasoning 178 CCN2025 Love, Intimacy and Identity 180 CCN2026 Mass Media and Culture 182 CCN2027 Oral Communication in English 184 CCN2028 Products and Materials in Modern Society 186 CCN2029 Professionals and the Society 188 CCN2030 Social Development in China 191 CCN2031 Statistics 193 CCN2032 The History and Culture of East Asia 195 CCN2033 The History of Modern China 199 CCN2034 The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures 202 CCN2035 Values and Ethics in Daily Life 205 CCN2043 Digital Storytelling 208

7 Section Two: Syllabuses Page CCN2044 Digital Visualisation in New Media 210 CCN2045 Healthy Ageing 212 CCN2046 Music, Mind and Human Behaviour 215 CCN2047 Understanding Society through Visual Arts 217 CCN2101 Financial Accounting 219 CCN2102 Accounting and Tax Practices in China 221 CCN2103 Advertising and Promotion 224 CCN2104 Attractions Management 226 CCN2105 Business Economics 228 CCN2106 Business Environment in China 231 CCN2107 Business Information Systems Fundamentals and Development 233 CCN2108 Business Law 235 CCN2109 Compensation and Performance 238 CCN2110 Consumer Behaviour 241 CCN2111 Cost Accounting 243 CCN2112 Customer Relationship Management 246 CCN2113 Financial Management 248 CCN2114 Financial Markets and Institutions 250 CCN2115 Food Service Operations 252 CCN2116 Front Office Operations 254 CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management 257 CCN2118 Global Transport and Trade Operations 260 CCN2119 Housekeeping Operations 263 CCN2120 Information Technology in Global Supply Chain Management 265 CCN2121 Intermediate Accounting 268 CCN2122 International Finance 270 CCN2123 Introduction to Auditing and Taxation 272 CCN2124 Introduction to Databases 275 CCN2125 Introduction to E-commerce 277 CCN2126 Introduction to International Business 279 CCN2127 Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management 282 CCN2128 Introduction to Knowledge Management and Organisational 285 Learning CCN2129 Introduction to Macroeconomics 287 CCN2130 Marketing in China 289 CCN2131 Marketing Research Fundamentals 291 CCN2132 Principles of Investments 293 CCN2133 Staffing and Selection 295 CCN2134 Tourism and Transport 297 CCN2135 Training and Development 299 CCN2136 Travel Agency Operations 301 CCN2137 Business Law and the Regulation of Financial Services 303 CCN2138 The Events Industry 305

8 Section Two: Syllabuses Page CCN2139 Convention Operations 307 CCN2140 Event Sales and Marketing 310 CCN2141 Exhibition Operations 312 CCN2142 Insurance Planning and Mandatory Provident Fund 314 CCN2143 Introduction to Service Management 316 CCN2144 Principles of Financial Planning 318 CCN2145 Principles of Insurance 320 CCN2146 Quality Management of Service Operations 322 CCN2147 Retail and Sales Management 324 CCN2148 Service Marketing 327 CCN2149 Special Events Planning 329 CCN2150 Venue Operations 331 CCN2151 Business Marketing 333 CCN2152 China s Economy 335 CCN2153 Commercial Banking in Hong Kong 338 CCN2154 Ecotourism and Heritage Tourism in Hong Kong 340 CCN2155 Workplace Practicum 343 CCN2156 Front Office and Housekeeping Management 345 CCN2157 Hospitality and Tourism Marketing 348 CCN2158 Introduction to Management Science 351 CCN2159 Introduction to Procurement Management 353 CCN2160 Negotiation Skills 356 CCN2161 Retirement and Estate Planning 358 CCN2162 Service Management in Hospitality and Tourism Industry 360 CCN2163 Tourist Behaviour 363 CCN2164 Extensive Workplace Practicum 365 CCN2283 Fundamentals of Operations Management 367 CCN3102 Introduction to Portfolio Management 370

9 Section One: General Information

10 1. Host Department The Associate Degree Scheme in Business ( The Scheme ) is hosted by Hong Kong Community College ( HKCC ) of The Hong Kong Polytechnic University. 2. Scheme Operation and Management 2.1 Programmes under the Scheme The Scheme comprises the 11 programmes below: Programme Title Programme Code Associate in Business 8C108-NS Associate in Business (Accounting) 8C108-ACC Associate in Business (Business Management) 8C108-BM Associate in Business (China Business) 8C108-CB Associate in Business (Finance) 8C108-FIN Associate in Business (Hospitality Management) 8C108-HM Associate in Business (Human Resources Management) 8C108-HR Associate in Business (International Business) 8C108-IB Associate in Business (Logistics and Supply Chain 8C108-LM Management) Associate in Business (Marketing) 8C108-MK Associate in Business (Tourism Management) 8C108-TM 2.2 Scheme and Programme Leaders A Scheme Leader is appointed to provide academic support in the realm of quality assurance in both teaching and learning. The Scheme Leader, with the assistance of an Assistant Scheme Leader, also provides input in staffing, student admission, assessment and feedback, and scheme/programme development. Programme Leaders and Assistant Programme Leaders (where appropriate) are appointed to manage the various programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Business. 2.3 College Programme Committee The College Programme Committee (CPC) exercises the overall academic and operational responsibility for all the programmes of HKCC and their development within defined policies, procedures and regulations. 2.4 Scheme Executive Group The Scheme Executive Group (SEG) manages the day-to-day operation of the programmes within this scheme. The Group which consists of Scheme Leader, Assistant Scheme Leader, Programme Leaders, Assistant Programme Leaders and staff with key programme responsibilities operates informally. 1

11 2.5 Student/Staff Consultative Group The Student/Staff Consultative Group (SSCG) provides a channel through which student views can be obtained. During the meetings of the Group, teaching staff and student representatives meet for constructive discussion on matters relating to student workload, teaching methods, the relevance of the course content and possible improvements. 2.6 Programme Counselling Teams (Academic Counselling) Programme Counselling Teams which include a number of academic staff teaching on the respective programmes are responsible for providing students with relevant and current information about curriculum and programme requirements, advising students of the suitable combination of subjects before subject registration in each semester, giving academic advice to students related to their studies, assisting students in solving problems encountered in their studies, and referring students to other resources for further assistance and/or information. 3. Aims and Intended Learning Outcomes All the programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Business aim to provide students with fundamental generic and discipline-specific knowledge primarily for future academic pursuit, and secondarily for entry into the job market as associate professionals. To develop students interest in business to achieve these broad objectives, the Associate Degree Scheme in Business aims to equip them with the generic skills applicable to daily life and general business settings as well as to broaden their horizons through acquisition of broad-based knowledge related to different aspects of life in a modern society. To facilitate students in their pursuit of further studies or entry into the workplace in their chosen area of specialism, students will further be provided with the opportunity to specialise in particular aspects of the broad discipline of business in terms of particular business functions, business sectors or locations for doing business. It is also intended that some flexibility for programme transfer and subject elective choices be provided to students so that they could be given the opportunity to explore different options and make better-informed decisions about their future during their studies. The intended learning outcomes of the Scheme centre around generic and professional competence which encompasses the attitude, knowledge, and skills expected of graduates of programmes of the Associate Degree Scheme in Business. These can be broken down into the following more specific outcomes: Upon successful completion of respective programmes of the Associate Degree Scheme in Business, graduates will be able to: 1. Effectively use information technology and quantitative methods to deal with issues commonly encountered in college level studies and general business contexts; 2. Effectively communicate in English and Chinese at a competent level required of a college student and an associate professional; 2

12 3. Demonstrate a professional attitude in terms of sense of responsibility, integrity, self-confidence, service attitude, and teamwork at a level expected of a promising associate professional; 4. Demonstrate interest in and appreciate, with an open and critical mind, the importance of some aspects of the body of generic human knowledge in the areas relating mostly to human nature and relationships, community and organisation, culture and world views, science and technology; 5. Examine critically well defined issues arising from largely, but not entirely, familiar business contexts and provide solutions that may require some level of creativity as well as application of concepts, analytical frameworks and theories drawn from fundamental knowledge of management, marketing, accounting, economics as well as more specialised business subjects of students choice; 6. Clarify career goals and plan ahead for their future on the basis of better selfunderstanding and better knowledge about the different sectors and functional areas of business; In addition to the learning outcomes for the Associate Degree Scheme in Business as a whole, graduates of individual programmes will be able to: 7. Continue their academic and professional development either through full-time study, part-time study or training by building on the foundation of professionally specific and generic skills and knowledge they acquired in Associate Degree programmes; 8. Enter the job market as associate professionals in the business sector or take up job functions related to their chosen areas of specialism. 4. Minimum Entry Requirements The minimum requirements for entry into the first year of the two-year full-time programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Business are as follows: (i) Satisfactory completion of Secondary 6; and Level 2 in five Hong Kong Diploma of Secondary Education (HKDSE) subjects, including English Language and Chinese Language. Each applicant is allowed to use not more than two Applied Learning subjects in the application; OR (ii) Satisfactory completion of Secondary 6; and Grade E in five Hong Kong Certificate of Education Examination (HKCEE) subjects including English Language and Chinese Language; or Grade E in three HKCEE subjects plus Level 2 in English and Chinese; and Grade E in one Hong Kong Advanced Level Examination (HKALE) subject; or Grade E in two HKALE (AS-level) subjects, which may include Use of English, and Chinese Language and Culture; OR (iii) Satisfactory completion of a one-year Pre-Associate Degree Programme offered by a local tertiary institution; OR (iv) The equivalents of the above requirements. 3

13 For those who do not possess the above-mentioned qualifications but have reached the age of 25 by 1 September in the admission year, they may apply as mature students. Mature candidates are expected to demonstrate proficiency in English as well as suitability to study for the programme to the satisfaction of the admission panel. 5. Granting of Award Students would be eligible for the respective Associate Degree award if they satisfy all the conditions listed below: (i) complete successfully a total of at least 60 1 credits of compulsory and elective subjects within the permissible maximum duration; (ii) satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements as stipulated in the curriculum structure; and (iii) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme. 6. Mode and Duration of Study The 11 Associate Degree programmes within the Scheme are offered in full-time mode of study. In each academic year, there are two semesters, each of which has 14 teaching weeks and a non-mandatory summer term with 7 teaching weeks duration. Students are normally required to complete credits per semester for two consecutive years and follow the progression study pattern specified in Section 8. Students who wish to study at their own pace instead of following the specified progression pattern will have to seek prior approval from the College. The normal duration of the programmes is two years, and the maximum duration allowed for completion is four years. Students are required to graduate as soon as they satisfy all the conditions for award (see Section 5 above). 7. Attendance Students are required to have attained at least 70% of attendance in each of the subjects they study; otherwise they may be disallowed to sit for the subject examination, downgraded or awarded failure grades for unsatisfactory attendance and/or punctuality. 1 The following students would be required to complete a total of 60 credits only: (i) Students admitted with HKALE qualification or equivalents (ii) Students admitted with HKDSE qualification with Level 3 or above in both HKDSE English and any other HKDSE subject(s) Students who just met the minimum entry requirements would be required to complete a total of 66 credits, of which 3 additional credits should be in an English language subject and 3 additional credits in a general education elective subject. Students with Level 2 in HKDSE English would be required to take an additional 3-credit English subject. Students attaining Level 2 only in all HKDSE non-english subjects would be required to take an additional 3-credit general education elective subject. 4

14 Regular and punctual attendance at lectures, seminars and tutorials is important. If students are late for more than 15 minutes for a tutorial or 30 minutes for a lecture, they will be regarded as absent for that particular tutorial or lecture. Students who are often absent or late for class will be given a written warning by their lecturers or tutors. In case of illness, the original doctor s certificate is required. Students must only attend the subject groups in which they are registered. They will have their names listed on the finalised class registers after the add/drop period only if they are officially registered in that particular subject group. Attending classes in which students have not been officially registered is not allowed. 8. Curriculum Structure The 11 Associate Degree programmes offered under the Scheme are in full-time mode based on a credit-based programme of study. To graduate, students are required to complete a total of 60* to 66 credits specified as follows: 36* to 42 credits of general education (GE) subjects 24 credits of discipline-specific (DS) subjects * Students admitted with HKDSE qualification and just met (but do not exceed) the minimum entry requirements will be required to complete a total of 66 credits, of which 9 credits (3 subjects) are on English Language and 15 credits (5 subjects) are elective subjects selected from GE Cluster Areas. For students admitted with Level 3 or above in HKDSE English, CCN1002 Practical English for College Students will be waived so they will be required to take only two English Language subjects. For students admitted with Level 3 or above in any HKDSE subject other than English, one of the elective subjects from GE Cluster Areas will be waived so they need to take only four GE electives. Students admitted with HKALE qualification or equivalents will be required to complete a total of 60 credits only. For these reasons, the number of credits required for graduation ranges from 60 to 66 depending on the entrance qualification and results of each admittee. 8.1 Subject Level and Subject Code All subjects offered under the Scheme are at Level 1, 2, or 3, and all subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. The first digit of the subject code denotes the level of the subject, for example, CCN1002 is a Level-1 subject. 8.2 Credit and Level Requirements Students are required to successfully complete a total of 60 to 66 credits, of which at least 30 credits are at Level 2 or above; PLUS at least 30 credits at Level 1 or above. 5

15 8.3 General Education Requirements Students pursuing an award under the Scheme are required to successfully complete eight or nine compulsory subjects plus four or five elective subjects in general education (GE) studies for a total of 36 to 42 credits. (I) GE Compulsory Subjects (8 to 9 subjects, 24 to 27 credits) Students are required to complete eight to nine of the following GE compulsory subjects: (1) CCN1002 Practical English for College Students [Note 1] (2) CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students [Note 2] (3) CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking (4) CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I (5) CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II (6) CCN1007 Information Technology for Business (7) CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students (8) CCN2002 Introduction to Economics (9) CCN2004 Managing Organisations Note 1: CCN1002 Practical English for College Students will be waived for students who enter the programme with either HKALE qualification or Level 3 or above in HKDSE English. Note 2: Students who are Non-Chinese Speakers (NCS), or whose Chinese standards are at junior secondary level or below, will be required to take an alternative Chinese subject, CCN1001 Elementary Chinese. (II) GE Elective Subjects # (4** to 5 subjects, 12** to 15 credits) Students are required to select four** to five GE elective subjects so that together with the compulsory subjects of CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations stated in part (I) above, the subjects should belong to at least four of the five Cluster Areas in Table 1. One of the elective subjects selected should be designated as China-related. For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. ** For students admitted with either HKALE qualification or Level 3 or above in any HKDSE subject other than English, one of the elective subjects from GE Cluster Areas will be waived so they need to take only four GE elective subjects. # The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 6 on pages

16 Table 1 General Education Subjects under Cluster Areas # Cluster Area Subject Code and Title Level Cluster A Human Nature, Relations and Development (HRD) Cluster B Community, Organisation and Globalisation (COG) CCN1013 Freshman Seminar 1 CCN1017 Introduction to Psychology 1 CCN1018 Introduction to Sociology 1 CCN1020 Leadership and Intra-personal Development 1 CCN1022 Personal Growth and Development 1 CCN2013 Exploring Human Nature 2 CCN2015 Gender Issues 2 CCN2025 Love, Intimacy and Identity 2 CCN2035 Values and Ethics in Daily Life 2 CCN2046 Music, Mind and Human Behaviour 2 CCN1021 Personal Financial Planning 1 CCN2002 Introduction to Economics (Compulsory for Associate Degree Scheme in Business Students) CCN2004 Managing Organisations (Compulsory for Associate Degree Scheme in Business Students) CCN2021 Introduction to Political Science Cluster C History, Cultures and World Views (HCW) CCN2029 Professionals and the Society 2 CCN2047 Understanding Society through Visual Arts 2 CCN1010 Cultural Study through Field Trip 1 CCN1025 The History and Culture of Hong Kong* 1 CCN1026 Themes of Art Appreciation 1 CCN2012 Experiencing Architecture 2 CCN2017 Introduction to Chinese Culture* 2 CCN2018 Introduction to Chinese Literature* 2 CCN2020 Introduction to Philosophy 2 CCN2024 Logic and Reasoning 2 CCN2026 Mass Media and Culture 2 CCN2030 Social Development in China* 2 CCN2032 The History and Culture of East Asia* 2 CCN2033 The History of Modern China* 2 CCN2034 The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures* 2 7

17 Table 1 General Education Subjects under Cluster Areas # (Continued) Cluster Area Subject Code and Title Level Cluster D Science, Technology and Environment (STE) Cluster E Language and Communication (LC) CCN1012 Foundation of Traditional Chinese Medicine* 1 CCN1015 Healthy Living and Common Health Problems 1 CCN1016 Introduction to Internet Technology 1 CCN1023 Principles of Programming 1 CCN2008 Chemistry and Modern Living 2 CCN2011 Environmental Science 2 CCN2014 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health 2 CCN2023 Light, Man and Environment 2 CCN2028 Products and Materials in Modern Society 2 CCN2031 Statistics 2 CCN2044 Digital Visualisation in New Media 2 CCN2045 Healthy Ageing 2 CCN1011 Elementary French 1 CCN1014 Fundamental Visualisation Skills 1 CCN1019 Japanese I 1 CCN1024 Putonghua for College Students 1 CCN2009 Chinese for Academic Purposes 2 CCN2010 English for Workplace Communication 2 CCN2016 Grammar in Context 2 CCN2019 Introduction to Communication Studies 2 CCN2022 Japanese II 2 CCN2027 Oral Communication in English 2 CCN2043 Digital Storytelling 2 # The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 6 on pages * Designated as China-related HKCC reserves the right to cancel and/or not to offer individual subjects. 8

18 8.4 Discipline-specific Requirements The discipline-specific subjects enable students to acquire knowledge and skills related to business in general and to specific business sectors or job functions. Such knowledge and skills will help students build up a foundation on which further qualifications may be obtained or a career may be developed Award with No Specialism (I) Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects (2 subjects, 6 credits) Students of Associate in Business are required to study the following two discipline-specific compulsory subjects: Associate in Business Stage One (1) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (2) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (II) Discipline-specific Elective Subjects # (6 subjects, 18 credits) Students of Associate in Business are also required to select six discipline-specific elective subjects from the following 14 subject domains (see Table 2 for the full list of discipline-specific elective subjects under each subject domain): Accounting Banking and Financial Services Business Information Systems China Business Event Management Finance and Economics International Business Hospitality Human Resources Logistics Management and Organisations Marketing Service Management Tourism Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee upon fulfillment of all the following conditions: (i) they have successfully completed the subject; (ii) they have attained at least 50% of the mark of the subject assessments; and (iii) they have attended at least 70% of the classes of the subject. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. # The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 6 on pages

19 8.4.2 Awards with Specialism (I) Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects (6 subjects, 18 credits) Students are required to study six discipline-specific compulsory subjects according to their registered programme. Associate in Business (Accounting) (1) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (2) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (3) CCN2108 Business Law (4) CCN2111 Cost Accounting (5) CCN2121 Intermediate Accounting (6) CCN2123 Introduction to Auditing and Taxation Associate in Business (Business Management) (1) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (2) CCN2005 Organisational Behaviour (3) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (4) CCN2105 Business Economics (5) CCN2113 Financial Management (6) CCN2126 Introduction to International Business Associate in Business (China Business) (1) CCN2001 Introduction to Chinese Political and Legal System* (2) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (3) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (4) CCN2102 Accounting and Tax Practices in China (5) CCN2106 Business Environment in China (6) CCN2130 Marketing in China * Designated as China-related Associate in Business (Finance) (1) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (2) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (3) CCN2113 Financial Management (4) CCN2114 Financial Markets and Institutions (5) CCN2129 Introduction to Macroeconomics (6) CCN2132 Principles of Investments Associate in Business (Hospitality Management) (1) CCN1102 Hotel Operations (2) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (3) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (4) CCN2115 Food Service Operations (5) CCN2116 Front Office Operations (6) CCN2119 Housekeeping Operations 10

20 Associate in Business (Human Resources Management) (1) CCN1101 Fundamentals of Human Resources Management (2) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (3) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (4) CCN2109 Compensation and Performance (5) CCN2133 Staffing and Selection (6) CCN2135 Training and Development Associate in Business (International Business) (1) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (2) CCN2006 Understanding Globalisation (3) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (4) CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management (5) CCN2122 International Finance (6) CCN2126 Introduction to International Business Associate in Business (Logistics and Supply Chain Management) (1) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (2) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (3) CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management (4) CCN2118 Global Transport and Trade Operations (5) CCN2120 Information Technology in Global Supply Chain Management (6) CCN2127 Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management Associate in Business (Marketing) (1) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (2) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (3) CCN2103 Advertising and Promotion (4) CCN2110 Consumer Behaviour (5) CCN2112 Customer Relationship Management (6) CCN2131 Marketing Research Fundamentals Associate in Business (Tourism Management) (1) CCN1103 Introduction to Tourism (2) CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing (3) CCN2101 Financial Accounting (4) CCN2104 Attractions Management (5) CCN2134 Tourism and Transport (6) CCN2136 Travel Agency Operations Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee upon fulfillment of all the following conditions: (i) they have successfully completed the subject; (ii) they have attained at least 50% of the mark of the subject assessments; and (iii) they have attended at least 70% of the classes of the subject. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. 11

21 (II) Discipline-specific Elective Subjects # (2 subjects, 6 credits) In addition to the six discipline-specific compulsory subjects, students are also required to select two discipline-specific elective subjects from the following 14 subject domains (see Table 2 for the full list of discipline-specific elective subjects under each subject domain): Accounting Banking and Financial Services Business Information Systems China Business Event Management Finance and Economics International Business Hospitality Human Resources Logistics Management and Organisations Marketing Service Management Tourism # The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 6 on pages Summary The following tables summarise the number of subjects, assuming three credits per subject, needed to satisfy the general education (GE) and discipline-specific (DS) requirements of the various programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Business: (a) For Award without Specialism Subject Nature Compulsory Elective General Education (GE) 8 to 9* 4 to 5** Discipline-specific (DS) 2 6 (b) For Awards with Specialism 10 programmes Subject Nature Compulsory Elective General Education (GE) 8 or 9* 4 to 5** Discipline-specific (DS) 6 2 * CCN1002 Practical English for College Students will be waived for students who enter the programme with either HKALE qualification or Level 3 or above in HKDSE English. ** For students admitted with either HKALE qualification or Level 3 or above in any HKDSE subject other than English, one of the elective subjects from GE Cluster Areas will be waived so they need to take only four GE elective subjects. 12

22 Table 2 Discipline-specific Elective Subjects # Subject Domain Level Subject Code and Title Accounting 2 CCN2102 Accounting and Tax Practices in China 2 CCN2108 Business Law 2 CCN2111 Cost Accounting 2 CCN2113 Financial Management 2 CCN2121 Intermediate Accounting 2 CCN2123 Introduction to Auditing and Taxation Banking and Financial Services Business Information Systems 2 CCN2114 Financial Markets and Institutions 2 CCN2137 Business Law and the Regulation of Financial Services 2 CCN2142 Insurance Planning and Mandatory Provident Fund 2 CCN2144 Principles of Financial Planning 2 CCN2145 Principles of Insurance 2 CCN2153 Commercial Banking in Hong Kong 2 CCN2161 Retirement and Estate Planning 2 CCN2107 Business Information Systems Fundamentals and Development 2 CCN2124 Introduction to Databases 2 CCN2125 Introduction to E-commerce 2 CCN2128 Introduction to Knowledge Management and Organisational Learning China Business 2 CCN2001 Introduction to Chinese Political and Legal System* 2 CCN2007 Business Putonghua 2 CCN2106 Business Environment in China 2 CCN2130 Marketing in China 2 CCN2152 China s Economy Event Management 2 CCN2138 The Events Industry 2 CCN2139 Convention Operations 2 CCN2140 Event Sales and Marketing 2 CCN2141 Exhibition Operations 2 CCN2149 Special Events Planning 2 CCN2150 Venue Operations Finance and Economics 2 CCN2105 Business Economics 2 CCN2129 Introduction to Macroeconomics 2 CCN2132 Principles of Investments 3 CCN3102 Introduction to Portfolio Management International Business 2 CCN2006 Understanding Globalisation 2 CCN2122 International Finance 2 CCN2126 Introduction to International Business Hospitality 1 CCN1102 Hotel Operations 2 CCN2115 Food Service Operations 2 CCN2116 Front Office Operations 2 CCN2119 Housekeeping Operations 2 CCN2156 Front Office and Housekeeping Management 2 CCN2157 Hospitality and Tourism Marketing 2 CCN2162 Service Management in Hospitality and Tourism Industry Human Resources 1 CCN1101 Fundamentals of Human Resources Management 2 CCN2109 Compensation and Performance 2 CCN2133 Staffing and Selection 2 CCN2135 Training and Development Logistics 2 CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2 CCN2118 Global Transport and Trade Operations 2 CCN2120 Information Technology in Global Supply Chain Management 2 CCN2127 Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management 2 CCN2159 Introduction to Procurement Management 2 CCN2283 Fundamentals of Operations Management 13

23 Table 2 Discipline-specific Elective Subjects # (Continued) Subject Domain Level Subject Code and Title Management and 2 CCN2005 Organisational Behaviour Organisations 2 CCN2155 Workplace Practicum 2 CCN2158 Introduction to Management Science 2 CCN2160 Negotiation Skills 2 CCN2164 Extensive Workplace Practicum^ Marketing 2 CCN2103 Advertising and Promotion 2 CCN2110 Consumer Behaviour 2 CCN2112 Customer Relationship Management 2 CCN2131 Marketing Research Fundamentals 2 CCN2148 Service Marketing 2 CCN2151 Business Marketing Service Management 2 CCN2143 Introduction to Service Management 2 CCN2146 Quality Management of Service Operations 2 CCN2147 Retail and Sales Management Tourism 1 CCN1103 Introduction to Tourism 2 CCN2104 Attractions Management 2 CCN2134 Tourism and Transport 2 CCN2136 Travel Agency Operations 2 CCN2154 Ecotourism and Heritage Tourism in Hong Kong 2 CCN2163 Tourist Behaviour # The offering of any of these subjects is conditional upon enrolment figures and the availability of resources. Some subjects may require completion of prerequisites before enrolment. For details on prerequisite requirements for individual subjects, please refer to Table 6 on pages * Designated as China-related ^ CCN2164 Extensive Workplace Practicum is a 6-credit subject and is mutually exclusive with CCN2155 Workplace Practicum. HKCC reserves the right to cancel and/or not to offer individual subjects. 14

24 Table 3 Indicative Study Pattern for Associate in Business^ (for award without specialism) Study Pattern I Stage 1 Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1005 English for Academic Studies 1 General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Education (Business) I Education CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 1 1 CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2002 Introduction to Economics Level CCN2004 Managing Organisations 2 Disciplinespecific Stage 2 CCN2101 Financial Accounting 2 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature Disciplinespecific CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 2 Elective Subjects Level Select ONE elective # 1-3 Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Elective Subjects Level General Education CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students 1 General Education Select THREE electives # 1-2 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Select ONE elective # 1-2 Select THREE electives # 1-3 Select TWO electives # 1-3 ^ HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 15

25 Stage 1 Study Pattern II For Students Taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students^ Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1002 Practical English for College 1 General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Education Students Education CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 1 1 CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics Level CCN2004 Managing Organisations 2 Disciplinespecific Stage 2 CCN2101 Financial Accounting 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 2 Elective Subjects Level Select ONE elective # 1-3 Semester 1* Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for 1 General CCN1006 English for Academic Studies Education College Students Education (Business) II Level 1 Subject Nature Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select TWO electives # 1-2 General Education Select THREE electives # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Select TWO electives # 1-2 Select TWO electives # 1-3 ^ HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 16

26 Study Pattern III For Students Taking One Additional GE Elective Subject^ Stage 1 Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1005 English for Academic Studies 1 General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Education (Business) I Education CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 1 1 CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2002 Introduction to Economics Level CCN2004 Managing Organisations 2 Disciplinespecific Stage 2 CCN2101 Financial Accounting 2 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature Disciplinespecific CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 2 Elective Subjects Level Select ONE elective # 1-3 Semester 1 Semester 2* Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Elective Subjects Level General Education CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students 1 General Education Select FOUR electives # 1-2 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Select ONE elective # 1-2 Select THREE electives # 1-3 Select TWO electives # 1-3 ^ HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 17

27 Stage 1 Study Pattern IV For Students Taking Both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students and One Additional GE Elective Subject^ Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1002 Practical English for College 1 General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Education Students Education CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 1 1 CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics Level CCN2004 Managing Organisations 2 Stage 2 CCN2101 Financial Accounting 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 2 Elective Subjects Level Select ONE elective # 1-3 Semester 1* Semester 2* Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for 1 General CCN1006 English for Academic Studies Education College Students Education (Business) II Level 1 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select TWO electives # 1-2 General Education Select THREE electives # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Select THREE electives # 1-2 Select TWO electives # 1-3 ^ HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 18

28 Stage 1 (i) Group A Table 4 Indicative Study Patterns for Associate in Business^ (for awards with specialism) Study Pattern I Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1005 English for Academic Studies 1 General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Education (Business) I Education CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students CCN2004 Managing Organisations CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Study ONE compulsory subject Level Disciplinespecific Disciplinespecific CCN2101 Financial Accounting 2 Stage 2 (i) Group A Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects Level General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for 1 Disciplinespecific Study ONE compulsory subject 1-2 Education College Students Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Study TWO compulsory subjects 1-2 Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select ONE elective # 1-2 General Education Select ONE elective # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Select THREE electives # 1-2 Select ONE elective # 1-3 ^ HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 19

29 Stage 1 (ii) Group B Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking 1 General Education Education CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 1 1 CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN2004 Managing Organisations Level CCN2002 Introduction to Economics 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2101 Financial Accounting Study ONE compulsory subject Stage 2 (ii) Group B Level 1 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select TWO electives # 1-2 General Education Select ONE elective # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects Disciplinespecific Study TWO compulsory subjects 1-2 General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for Education College Students Study ONE compulsory subject 1-2 Elective Subjects Level Select TWO electives # 1-2 Select ONE elective # 1-3 # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 20

30 Study Pattern II For Students Taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students^ Stage 1 (i) Group A Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1002 Practical English for College 1 General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Education Students Education CCN1007 CCN1008 CCN2004 Information Technology for Business Mathematics and Statistics for College Students Managing Organisations CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Study ONE compulsory subject Level Disciplinespecific CCN2101 Financial Accounting 2 Stage 2 (i) Group A Semester 1* Semester 2 Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for 1 General CCN1006 English for Academic Studies Education College Students Education (Business) II Level 1 Disciplinespecific Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Study TWO compulsory subjects 1-2 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select TWO electives # 1-2 General Education Select ONE elective # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Study ONE compulsory subject 1-2 Elective Subjects Level Select TWO electives # 1-2 Select ONE elective # 1-3 ^ HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 21

31 Stage 1 (ii) Group B Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1002 Practical English for College 1 General CCN1005 English for Academic Studies Education Students Education (Business) I Level 1 CCN1004 CCN1008 Creative and Critical Thinking Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 1 1 CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN2004 Managing Organisations 1 2 CCN2002 Introduction to Economics 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2101 Financial Accounting Study ONE compulsory subject Stage 2 (ii) Group B Semester 1 Semester 2* Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1006 English for Academic Studies 1 General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for Education (Business) II Education College Students Level 1 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Study TWO compulsory subjects 1-2 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select ONE elective # 1-2 General Education Select ONE elective # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Study ONE compulsory subject 1-2 Elective Subjects Level Select THREE electives # 1-2 Select ONE elective # 1-3 * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 22

32 Stage 1 (i) Group A Study Pattern III For Students Taking One Additional GE Elective Subject^ Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1005 English for Academic Studies 1 General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Education (Business) I Education CCN1007 CCN1008 CCN2004 Information Technology for Business Mathematics and Statistics for College Students Managing Organisations CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Study ONE compulsory subject Level Disciplinespecific Disciplinespecific CCN2101 Financial Accounting 2 Stage 2 (i) Group A Semester 1 Semester 2* Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects Level General Education CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students 1 Disciplinespecific Study ONE compulsory subject 1-2 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Study TWO compulsory subjects 1-2 Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select ONE elective # 1-2 General Education Select ONE elective # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Select FOUR electives # 1-2 Select ONE elective # 1-3 ^ HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 23

33 Stage 1 (ii) Group B Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking 1 General Education Education CCN1005 CCN1008 English for Academic Studies (Business) I Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 1 1 CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN2004 Managing Organisations Level CCN2002 Introduction to Economics 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2101 Financial Accounting Study ONE compulsory subject Stage 2 (ii) Group B Level 1 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select TWO electives # 1-2 General Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Semester 1 Semester 2* Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects Disciplinespecific Study TWO compulsory subjects 1-2 General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for Education College Students Education Select ONE elective # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Study ONE compulsory subject 1-2 Elective Subjects Level Select THREE electives # 1-2 Select ONE elective # 1-3 * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 24

34 Study Pattern IV For Students Taking Both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students and One Additional GE Elective Subject^ Stage 1 (i) Group A Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1002 Practical English for College 1 General CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Education Students Education CCN1007 CCN1008 CCN2004 Information Technology for Business Mathematics and Statistics for College Students Managing Organisations CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Study ONE compulsory subject Level CCN2101 Financial Accounting 2 Stage 2 (i) Group A Semester 1* Semester 2* Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for 1 General CCN1006 English for Academic Studies Education College Students Education (Business) II Level 1 Disciplinespecific Disciplinespecific Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Study TWO compulsory subjects 1-2 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select TWO electives # 1-2 General Education Select ONE elective # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Study ONE compulsory subject 1-2 Elective Subjects Level Select THREE electives # 1-2 Select ONE elective # 1-3 ^ HKCC reserves the right to change the study pattern. * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 25

35 Stage 1 (ii) Group B Semester 1 Semester 2 Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1002 Practical English for College 1 General CCN1005 English for Academic Studies Education Students Education (Business) I Level 1 CCN1004 CCN1008 Creative and Critical Thinking Mathematics and Statistics for College Students 1 1 CCN1007 Information Technology for Business CCN2004 Managing Organisations 1 2 CCN2002 Introduction to Economics 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 2 Disciplinespecific CCN2101 Financial Accounting Study ONE compulsory subject Stage 2 (ii) Group B Semester 1* Semester 2* Subject Compulsory Subjects Level Subject Nature Nature Compulsory Subjects General CCN1006 English for Academic Studies 1 General CCN1003 Chinese Communication for Education (Business) II Education College Students Level 1 Disciplinespecific Subject Nature General Education Disciplinespecific Study TWO compulsory subjects 1-2 Disciplinespecific Elective Subjects Level Subject Nature Select TWO electives # 1-2 General Education Select ONE elective # 1-3 Disciplinespecific Study ONE compulsory subject 1-2 Elective Subjects Level Select THREE electives # 1-2 Select ONE elective # 1-3 * Total study load for this semester is 6 subjects. # Students should ensure that the general education and/or discipline-specific elective subjects they have selected satisfy the level, general education and discipline-specific requirements. It is students sole responsibility to ensure that they have completed all the requirements for graduation. 26

36 8.5 Programme Curriculum Map Table 5 presents mappings of the subjects available to students of the programmes under the Associate Degree Scheme in Business in relation to the intended learning outcomes as presented in Section 3. Each programme curriculum map denotes how each of the scheme and programme-specific outcomes is introduced, reinforced and assessed. It is worth noting that the scheme and programme-specific outcomes are achieved not just through the content of the subjects, but also through the variety of learning and teaching activities through which the contents are delivered. Furthermore, co-curricular student development activities organised by the Student Development Committee, the Students Union and other organisations also contribute to the scheme and programme-specific outcomes. Key to Table 5 I R A The learning leading to the particular outcome is introduced in that subject The learning leading to the particular outcome is reinforced in that subject The learning leading to the particular outcome is assessed in that subject 27

37 Subject Code Subject Title General Education Compulsory Subjects Table 5 Programme Curriculum Map Scheme Outcome 1 Information Technology and Quantitative Methods* Scheme Outcome 2 Communication Skills (English & Chinese)* CCN1001 Elementary Chinese I, A Scheme Outcome 3 Professional Attitude* Scheme Outcome 4 Human Knowledge with Broad Applicability in Modern World* Scheme Outcome 5 Critical Thinking, Creativity, Problemsolving and Application of Concepts from Business Disciplines* Scheme Outcome 6 Clarifying Career Goals* Scheme Outcome 7 Programme Specific: Selfreflection and Further Studies* CCN1002 Practical English for College Students I R R CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students I, A R R CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking R I, A I, R R CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I I R R CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II I, A R R CCN1007 Information Technology for Business I, A R R R CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students I R R R CCN2002 Introduction to Economics R I I, R R CCN2004 Managing Organisations R I, A R I, R, A I I, R I General Education Elective Subjects Subjects under Cluster of Human Nature, Relations and Development Subjects under Cluster of Community, Organisation and Globalisation Scheme Outcome 8 Programme Specific: Entry into Job Market* R R I, A R R R R R I, A R R R Subjects under Cluster of History, Cultures and World Views R I, A R R Subjects under Cluster of Science, Technology and Environment R I, A R R Subjects under Cluster of Language and Communication R R R R Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for All Programmes CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing R R R I, A R I CCN2101 Financial Accounting R I I, R R R 28

38 Subject Code Subject Title Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Accounting Table 5 Programme Curriculum Map (Continued) Scheme Outcome 1 Information Technology and Quantitative Methods* Scheme Outcome 2 Communication Skills (English & Chinese)* Scheme Outcome 3 Professional Attitude* Scheme Outcome 4 Human Knowledge with Broad Applicability in Modern World* Scheme Outcome 5 Critical Thinking, Creativity, Problemsolving and Application of Concepts from Business Disciplines* Scheme Outcome 6 Clarifying Career Goals* Scheme Outcome 7 Programme Specific: Selfreflection and Further Studies* CCN2108 Business Law R, A R R, A R R CCN2111 Cost Accounting R R I I, R I CCN2121 Intermediate Accounting R R R R, A R, A R CCN2123 Introduction to Auditing and Taxation R R R, A R R, A R, A Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Business Management CCN2005 Organisational Behaviour R R R R I R R CCN2105 Business Economics R R R, A R, A R, A R CCN2113 Financial Management R R, A R R R, A R, A CCN2126 Introduction to International Business R R R I, R I Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for China Business CCN2001 Introduction to Chinese Political and Legal System Scheme Outcome 8 Programme Specific: Entry into Job Market* R R R R, A R R R CCN2102 Accounting and Tax Practices in China R R, A R R R R CCN2106 Business Environment in China R R R I I, R, A I CCN2130 Marketing in China R R R R R, A R, A R, A R, A Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Finance CCN2113 Financial Management R R R, A I R R CCN2114 Financial Markets and Institutions R R, A R R R R R, A CCN2129 Introduction to Macroeconomics R R R R I, R, A I CCN2132 Principles of Investments R R, A R, A R, A R 29

39 Subject Code Subject Title Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Hospitality Management Table 5 Programme Curriculum Map (Continued) Scheme Outcome 1 Information Technology and Quantitative Methods* Scheme Outcome 2 Communication Skills (English & Chinese)* 30 Scheme Outcome 3 Professional Attitude* Scheme Outcome 4 Human Knowledge with Broad Applicability in Modern World* Scheme Outcome 5 Critical Thinking, Creativity, Problemsolving and Application of Concepts from Business Disciplines* Scheme Outcome 6 Clarifying Career Goals* Scheme Outcome 7 Programme Specific: Selfreflection and Further Studies* CCN1102 Hotel Operations R I R I R, A I CCN2115 Food Service Operations R R R R, A R R CCN2116 Front Office Operations R R R, A R R, A R, A CCN2119 Housekeeping Operations R, A R R R R Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Human Resources Management CCN1101 Fundamentals of Human Resources Management R I R R I I, R I CCN2109 Compensation and Performance R R R R R, A R R CCN2133 Staffing and Selection R R, A R R, A R, A CCN2135 Training and Development R R, A R R, A R R, A R Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for International Business CCN2006 Understanding Globalisation R R R R, A R, A R, A R CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management Scheme Outcome 8 Programme Specific: Entry into Job Market* R R R R R R CCN2122 International Finance R R R, A R R, A R, A CCN2126 Introduction to International Business R I R R I I, R I Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Logistics and Supply Chain Management CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management R R I R R I I, R I CCN2118 Global Transport and Trade Operations R R, A R, A R R, A CCN2120 Information Technology in Global Supply Chain Management R, A R R R R, A R

40 Subject Code Subject Title Table 5 Programme Curriculum Map (Continued) Scheme Outcome 1 Information Technology and Quantitative Methods* Scheme Outcome 2 Communication Skills (English & Chinese)* Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Logistics and Supply Chain Management (Continued) CCN2127 Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Marketing 31 Scheme Outcome 3 Professional Attitude* Scheme Outcome 4 Human Knowledge with Broad Applicability in Modern World* Scheme Outcome 5 Critical Thinking, Creativity, Problemsolving and Application of Concepts from Business Disciplines* Scheme Outcome 6 Clarifying Career Goals* Scheme Outcome 7 Programme Specific: Selfreflection and Further Studies* Scheme Outcome 8 Programme Specific: Entry into Job Market* R R, A R R R R CCN2103 Advertising and Promotion R R R, A R R R, A CCN2110 Consumer Behaviour R I R R I I, R I CCN2112 Customer Relationship Management R R R, A R R R CCN2131 Marketing Research Fundamentals R, A R, A R R, A R, A R Discipline-specific Compulsory Subjects for Tourism Management CCN1103 Introduction to Tourism R I R I I, R I CCN2104 Attractions Management R R R, A R R, A R CCN2134 Tourism and Transport R R R R R, A R CCN2136 Travel Agency Operations R, A R R, A R R, A Discipline-specific Elective Subjects CCN2007 Business Putonghua R R CCN2107 Business Information Systems Fundamentals and Development R R R I I, R I CCN2124 Introduction to Databases R, A R R, A R, A R, A CCN2125 Introduction to E-commerce R, A R R R, A R R R CCN2128 CCN2137 Introduction to Knowledge Management and Organisational Learning Business Law and the Regulation of Financial Services R R, A R R, A R R, A R R R R R

41 Subject Code Subject Title Discipline-specific Elective Subjects (Continued) Table 5 Programme Curriculum Map (Continued) Scheme Outcome 1 Information Technology and Quantitative Methods* Scheme Outcome 2 Communication Skills (English & Chinese)* Scheme Outcome 3 Professional Attitude* Scheme Outcome 4 Human Knowledge with Broad Applicability in Modern World* Scheme Outcome 5 Critical Thinking, Creativity, Problemsolving and Application of Concepts from Business Disciplines* Scheme Outcome 6 Clarifying Career Goals* Scheme Outcome 7 Programme Specific: Selfreflection and Further Studies* CCN2138 The Events Industry R R R R R CCN2139 Convention Operations R R R R CCN2140 Event Sales and Marketing R R I R R R CCN2141 Exhibition Operations R R R R CCN2142 Insurance Planning and Mandatory Provident Fund R R R R R R CCN2143 Introduction to Service Management R R R R R R CCN2144 Principles of Financial Planning R R R R R R R CCN2145 Principles of Insurance R R R R R R CCN2146 Quality Management of Service Operations R R R R R CCN2147 Retail and Sales Management R R R R R R R CCN2148 Service Marketing R R R R R R R CCN2149 Special Events Planning R R R R CCN2150 Venue Operations R R R R CCN2151 Business Marketing R R R R R R R CCN2152 China s Economy R R R R CCN2153 Commercial Banking in Hong Kong R R R R R CCN2154 Ecotourism and Heritage Tourism in Hong Kong R R R R R R CCN2155 Workplace Practicum R R R R R, A R R, A CCN2156 Front Office and Housekeeping Management R R R R R R Scheme Outcome 8 Programme Specific: Entry into Job Market* 32

42 Subject Code Subject Title Discipline-specific Elective Subjects (Continued) Table 5 Programme Curriculum Map (Continued) Scheme Outcome 1 Information Technology and Quantitative Methods* Scheme Outcome 2 Communication Skills (English & Chinese)* Scheme Outcome 3 Professional Attitude* Scheme Outcome 4 Human Knowledge with Broad Applicability in Modern World* Scheme Outcome 5 Critical Thinking, Creativity, Problemsolving and Application of Concepts from Business Disciplines* Scheme Outcome 6 Clarifying Career Goals* Scheme Outcome 7 Programme Specific: Selfreflection and Further Studies* CCN2157 Hospitality and Tourism Marketing R R R R R R R CCN2158 Introduction to Management Science R R R CCN2159 Introduction to Procurement Management R R R R R R CCN2160 Negotiation Skills R R R R R R CCN2161 Retirement and Estate Planning R R R R CCN2162 Service Management in Hospitality and Tourism Industry Scheme Outcome 8 Programme Specific: Entry into Job Market* R R R R R R CCN2163 Tourist Behaviour R R R R CCN2164 Extensive Workplace Practicum R R R R R, A R R, A CCN2283 Fundamentals of Operations Management R, A R R, A R I CCN3102 Introduction to Portfolio Management R R R R R R * For the full outcome statements, please refer to Section 3 of this document. 33

43 9. Medium of Instruction English is the medium of instruction (the only exceptions are for a small number of subjects which have obtained special approval to be taught and examined in Chinese, due to the nature and objectives of the subjects concerned). Chinese could only be used in small group discussions/tutorials/practical sessions if and when necessary. In the presence of non-cantonese-speaking students, English should be used all the time. 10. Teaching and Learning Methods The teaching and learning philosophy underlying the Associate Degree Scheme in Business is based on a holistic, diversified, and flexible approach one which enables students to achieve the intended learning outcomes. Different teaching and learning methods are used. Some are more effective in building up students subject knowledge while others contribute more to developing students generic skills and professional competence. Teaching and learning methods may vary from subject to subject and may include interactive lectures, tutorials, case-based learning, problem-based learning, simulation, role plays, group work, practicum, experiential learning, fieldwork, guest talks, company visits, study tours, etc. The diversity of teaching and learning methods addresses the need to use the most appropriate ways to achieve the intended learning outcomes of each subject. Teaching is conducted through lectures as well as tutorials and/or seminars. To maximise students learning, subject lecturers not only play the role of introducing new concepts and imparting knowledge, but also act as facilitators to encourage students to share their ideas and experience through class discussions, case studies, oral presentations, and group activities. Laboratory sessions and/or practicum may be included for practical subjects to provide hands-on practice. For discipline-specific subjects, more emphasis will be given to the competence-based and practical orientation of the curriculum. 11. Assessment and Examinations 11.1 Principles of Assessment Assessment of learning and assessment for learning are both important for assuring the quality of student learning. Assessment of learning is to evaluate whether students have achieved the intended learning outcomes of the subjects that they have taken and have attained the overall learning outcomes of the academic programme at the end of their study at a standard appropriate to the award. Appropriate methods of assessment that align with the intended learning outcomes will be designed for this purpose. The assessment methods will also enable the teacher to differentiate students different levels of performance within the subject. Assessment for learning is to engage students in productive learning activities through purposefully designed assessment tasks. 34

44 Assessment will also serve as feedback to students. The assessment criteria and standards will be made explicit to students before the start of the assessment to facilitate student learning, and feedback provided will link to the criteria and standards. Timely feedback will be provided to students so that they are aware of their progress and attainment for the purpose of improvement Role of Subject Assessment Review Panel The Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) is responsible for monitoring the academic standard and quality of subjects and ratifying subject results. SARP reviews and finalises the subject grades at the end of each semester/term for submission to the Board of Examiners. SARP is also responsible for granting late assessments to students and deciding the form of late assessments. The SARP is chaired by the Director of HKCC or his delegate. Members of the SARP include the relevant subject examiners/lecturers, and where appropriate, the Scheme Leader, Assistant Scheme Leader, Programme Leaders and other co-opted members Role of Board of Examiners The Board of Examiners (BoE) meets at the end of each semester (except for Summer Term unless there are students who are eligible to graduate after completion of Summer Term subjects) to review students progress and is responsible to the College Board of the College of Professional and Continuing Education (CPCE) for making decisions on: 1. the classification of awards to be granted to each student on completion of the programme; 2. de-registration cases; and 3. cases with extenuating circumstances. The Board of Examiners is chaired by the Director of HKCC or his delegate. Members of the Board of Examiners include the Scheme Leader, Assistant Scheme Leader, Programme Leaders, and other co-opted members Assessment Methods Students performance in a subject shall be assessed by coursework and/or examinations, as deemed appropriate. Where both coursework and examinations are used, the weighting of each in the overall subject grade has been clearly stated in this definitive scheme document. To pass a subject, students must obtain a pass grade in both coursework AND examination, if any. Satisfying (or otherwise) the attendance requirement as stipulated in Section 7 will also affect the pass and failure of a student in a subject. All assessment methods will be designed on the basis that they can assess the extent to which students have attained the intended learning outcomes. The methods may include objective questions, open-ended essays, group projects, field study, laboratory work, presentations, reflective journals, learning portfolios, case study, and various forms of classroom participation. At the beginning of each semester, the subject lecturer will inform students of the details of the assessment methods to be used within the assessment framework as specified in the definitive scheme document. 35

45 + Subject Nature General Education Compulsory Subjects Cluster Area Cluster A Human Nature, Relations and Development (HRD) Subject Code Table 6 - Assessment Weighting Subject Title Coursework (%) Exam (%) Prerequisite Exclusion CCN1001 Elementary Chinese Nil CCN1003 CCN1002 CCN1003 Practical English for College Students Chinese Communication for College Students Nil Nil Nil CCN1001 CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Nil Nil CCN1005 CCN1006 CCN1007 CCN1008 English for Academic Studies (Business) I English for Academic Studies (Business) II Information Technology for Business Mathematics and Statistics for College Students CCN1002 Nil CCN1005 Nil Nil Nil Nil CCN1028 and CCN1039 CCN2002 Introduction to Economics Nil CCN1042 CCN2004 Managing Organisations Nil CCN3107 CCN1013 Freshman Seminar Nil Nil CCN1017 Introduction to Psychology Nil CCN2039 CCN1018 Introduction to Sociology Nil Nil CCN1020 CCN1022 Leadership and Intra-personal Development Personal Growth and Development Nil CCN Nil CCN1020 and CCN2037 CCN2013 Exploring Human Nature Nil Nil CCN2015 Gender Issues Nil Nil & General Education Elective Subjects Cluster B Community, Organisation and Globalisation (COG) Cluster C Designated as China-related History, Cultures and World Views (HCW) CCN2025 Love, Intimacy and Identity Nil Nil CCN2035 CCN2046 Values and Ethics in Daily Life Music, Mind and Human Behaviour Nil Nil Nil Nil CCN1021 Personal Financial Planning Nil Nil CCN2002 CCN2004 CCN2021 Introduction to Economics (Compulsory for Associate Degree Scheme in Business Students) Managing Organisations (Compulsory for Associate Degree Scheme in Business Students) Introduction to Political Science Nil CCN Nil CCN Nil Nil CCN2029 Professionals and the Society Nil Nil CCN2047 CCN1010 or Level 3 or above in HKDSE English Language; or its equivalents. Understanding Society through Visual Arts Cultural Study through Field Trip Nil Nil Nil Nil CCN1025 The History and Culture of Hong Kong & Nil CCN2036 CCN1026 Themes of Art Appreciation Nil Nil Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at

46 Table 6 - Assessment Weighting (Continued) Subject Nature Cluster Area Cluster C (Continued) Subject Code Subject Title Coursework (%) Exam (%) Prerequisite Exclusion General Education Elective Subjects History, Cultures and World Views (HCW) Cluster D Science, Technology and Environment (STE) Cluster E Language and Communication (LC) CCN2012 Experiencing Architecture Nil Nil CCN2017 Introduction to Chinese Culture & Nil Nil CCN2018 Introduction to Chinese Literature & Nil Nil CCN2020 Introduction to Philosophy Nil Nil CCN2024 Logic and Reasoning CCN1004 or CCN1035 or CCN1036 or Nil equivalent CCN2026 Mass Media and Culture Nil Nil CCN2030 Social Development in China & Nil Nil CCN2032 The History and Culture of East Asia & Nil Nil CCN2033 The History of Modern China & Nil Nil CCN2034 The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures & Nil Nil CCN1012 Foundation of Traditional Chinese Medicine & Nil CCN3132 CCN1015 Healthy Living and Common Health Problems Nil Nil CCN1016 Introduction to Internet Technology Nil Nil CCN1023 Principles of Programming Nil Nil CCN2008 Chemistry and Modern Living Nil Nil CCN2011 Environmental Science Nil Nil CCN2014 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health Nil Nil CCN2023 Light, Man and Environment Nil Nil CCN2028 Products and Materials in Modern Society Nil Nil CCN2031 Statistics Nil Nil CCN2044 Digital Visualisation in New Media Nil Nil CCN2045 Healthy Ageing Nil CCN2259 CCN1011 Elementary French Nil Nil CCN1014 Fundamental Visualisation Skills Nil Nil CCN1019 Japanese I Nil CCN1024 Putonghua for College Students Nil Nil CCN2009 Chinese for Academic Purposes Nil Nil CCN2010 English for Workplace Communication Nil CCN2182 CCN2016 Grammar in Context Nil Nil CCN2019 Introduction to Communication Studies Nil Nil CCN2022 Japanese II CCN1019 # Nil CCN2027 Oral Communication in English Nil Nil CCN2043 Digital Storytelling Nil Nil & Designated as China-related Ability to understand, read and write Chinese characters ( 漢 字 ). # or a minimum of 42 hours training on Japanese and/or equivalent proficiency of Japanese, which must be supported by an official document. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 37

47 Table 6 - Assessment Weighting (Continued) Subject Nature Subject Code Subject Title Coursework (%) Exam (%) Prerequisite Exclusion CCN1101 Fundamentals of Human Resources Management Nil Nil CCN1102 Hotel Operations Nil Nil CCN1103 Introduction to Tourism Nil Nil CCN2001 Introduction to Chinese Political and Legal System & Nil Nil CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Nil Nil CCN2005 Organisational Behaviour Nil Nil CCN2006 Understanding Globalisation Nil CCN3118 CCN2007 Business Putonghua CCN1024* Nil CCN2101 Financial Accounting Nil CCN1041 CCN2102 Accounting and Tax Practices in China CCN2101 Nil CCN2103 Advertising and Promotion CCN2003 Nil CCN2104 Attractions Management Nil Nil CCN2105 Business Economics CCN2002 Nil CCN2106 Business Environment in China Nil Nil CCN2107 Business Information Systems Fundamentals and Development Nil Nil CCN2108 Business Law Nil CCN2137 CCN2109 Compensation and Performance Nil Nil CCN2110 Consumer Behaviour Nil Nil Disciplinespecific Subjects CCN2111 Cost Accounting Nil Nil CCN2112 Customer Relationship Management Nil Nil CCN2113 Financial Management Nil Nil & CCN2114 Financial Markets and Institutions Nil Nil CCN2115 Food Service Operations CCN2003 or CCN2004 CCN2116 Front Office Operations Nil Nil CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management Nil Nil Nil CCN2118 Global Transport and Trade Operations Nil Nil CCN2119 Housekeeping Operations Nil Nil CCN2120 Information Technology in Global Supply Chain Management Nil Nil CCN2121 Intermediate Accounting CCN2101 Nil CCN2122 International Finance Nil Nil CCN2123 Introduction to Auditing and Taxation CCN2101 CCN3101 CCN2124 Introduction to Databases Nil Nil CCN2125 Introduction to E-commerce Nil Nil CCN2126 Introduction to International Business Nil Nil CCN2127 Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management Nil Nil CCN2128 Introduction to Knowledge Management and Organisational Learning Nil Nil CCN2129 Introduction to Macroeconomics Nil Nil Continuing Education Fund approved subject. Students enrolled in this subject may apply for reimbursement of subject fee upon fulfillment of all the following conditions: (i) they have successfully completed the subject; (ii) they have attained at least 50% of the mark of the subject assessments; and (iii) they have attended at least 70% of the classes of the subject. Students are required to open a CEF account before commencement of the subject. Designated as China-related * or equivalent proficiency of Putonghua, which must be supported by an official document. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 38

48 Table 6 - Assessment Weighting (Continued) Subject Nature Subject Code Subject Title Coursework (%) Exam (%) Prerequisite Exclusion CCN2130 Marketing in China Nil Nil CCN2131 Marketing Research Fundamentals CCN2003 Nil CCN2132 Principles of Investments CCN2113 Nil CCN2133 Staffing and Selection Nil Nil CCN2134 Tourism and Transport Nil Nil CCN2135 Training and Development Nil Nil CCN2136 Travel Agency Operations Nil Nil CCN2137 Business Law and the Regulation of Financial Services Nil CCN2108 CCN2138 The Events Industry Nil Nil CCN2139 Convention Operations CCN2138 Nil CCN2140 Event Sales and Marketing CCN2003 Nil CCN2141 Exhibition Operations CCN2138 Nil CCN2142 Insurance Planning and Mandatory Provident Fund Nil Nil CCN2143 Introduction to Service Management Nil Nil CCN2144 Principles of Financial Planning Nil Nil CCN2145 Principles of Insurance Nil Nil CCN2146 Quality Management of Service Operations Nil Nil CCN2147 Retail and Sales Management Nil Nil Disciplinespecific Subjects CCN2148 Service Marketing CCN2003 Nil CCN2149 Special Events Planning CCN2138 Nil CCN2150 Venue Operations Nil Nil CCN2151 Business Marketing CCN2003 Nil CCN2152 China s Economy Nil Nil CCN2153 Commercial Banking in Hong Kong Nil Nil CCN2154 Ecotourism and Heritage Tourism in Hong Kong Nil Nil CCN2155 Workplace Practicum Nil CCN2164 CCN2156 Front Office and Housekeeping Management CCN2116 and CCN2119 Nil CCN2157 Hospitality and Tourism Marketing CCN2003 Nil CCN2158 Introduction to Management Science Nil Nil CCN2159 Introduction to Procurement Management Nil Nil CCN2160 Negotiation Skills Nil Nil CCN2161 Retirement and Estate Planning Nil Nil CCN2162 Service Management in Hospitality and Tourism Industry Nil Nil CCN2163 Tourist Behaviour CCN1103 Nil CCN2164 Extensive Workplace Nil CCN2283 Fundamentals of Operations Management Nil Nil CCN3102 Introduction to Portfolio Management CCN2113 Nil CCN2164 is a 6-credit subject and is mutually exclusive with CCN2155. Subject syllabuses can be obtained via MY HKCC accessible through HKCC website at 39

49 11.5 Academic Probation If a student s overall Grade Point Average (GPA) is below 2.0, he/she will be put on academic probation in the following semester. Once the student is able to pull his/her overall GPA up to 2.0 or above at the end of the semester, the status of academic probation will be lifted. The status of academic probation will be reflected in the assessment result notification but not in the transcript of studies Progression and De-registration Students will normally have progressing status unless they fall within the following categories, any one of which may be regarded as grounds for de-registration from the programme: (1) they have exceeded the maximum period of registration for that programme as specified in this document; or (2) their overall GPA is lower than 2.0 for two consecutive semesters and their Semester GPA in the second semester is also below 2.0; or (3) their overall GPA is lower than 2.0 for three consecutive semesters. The progression of students to the following academic year will not be affected by the GPA obtained in Summer Term, unless Summer Term study is mandatory for all students of the programme and constitutes a requirement for graduation, and is so specified in this document. Notwithstanding the above, the BoE has the flexibility to de-register a student with extremely poor academic performance before the time specified in the categories (2) or (3) above. In the event that there are good reasons, the BoE has the discretion to recommend that students who fall into categories as stated in (2) and (3) above be allowed to stay on the programme, and these recommendations should be presented to the CPCE College Board for final decision. 40

50 11.7 Grading All subjects will be graded on the basis of Criterion-Referenced Assessment (CRA). Grades will reflect the extent to which a student has attained the Intended Learning Outcomes. Grades are to be interpreted as follows: Subject grade Grade point A+ 4.5 Short description Exceptionally Outstanding A 4.0 Outstanding B+ 3.5 Very Good B 3.0 Good C+ 2.5 Wholly Satisfactory C 2.0 Satisfactory D+ 1.5 D 1.0 Barely Satisfactory Barely Adequate F 0 Inadequate Elaboration on subject grading description The student s work is exceptionally outstanding. It exceeds the intended subject learning outcomes in all regards. The student s work is outstanding. It exceeds the intended subject learning outcomes in nearly all regards. The student s work is very good. It exceeds the intended subject learning outcomes in most regards. The student s work is good. It exceeds the intended subject learning outcomes in some regards. The student s work is wholly satisfactory. It fully meets the intended subject learning outcomes. The student s work is satisfactory. It largely meets the intended subject learning outcomes. The student s work is barely satisfactory. It marginally meets the intended subject learning outcomes. The student s work is barely adequate. It meets the intended subject learning outcomes only in some regards. The student s work is inadequate. It fails to meet many of the intended subject learning outcomes. F is a subject failure grade, whilst all others ( D to A+ ) are subject passing grades. No credit will be earned if a subject is failed. 41

51 11.8 Grade Point Average There are different types of Grade Point Average (GPA) as described below. All of them will be shown in the transcript of studies. GPA (Overall GPA) At the end of each semester/term, a Grade Point Average (Overall GPA) will be computed as follows, and based on the grade point of all the subjects taken by the student up to and including the latest semester/term: GPA = n Subject Grade Point x Subject Credit Value n Subject Credit Value where n = number of all subjects (inclusive of failed subjects) taken by the student up to and including the latest semester/term. For subjects which have been retaken, only the grade point obtained in the final attempt will be included in the GPA calculation. Exempted, ungraded or incomplete subjects, and subjects for which credit transfer has been approved without a grade assigned to it, will be excluded from the GPA calculation. In addition, subjects for which a student has been allowed to withdraw from (i.e. those with the grade W ) will be excluded. A student who is absent from examination will be given a failure grade. The respective subject will be included in the GPA calculation and will be counted as zero grade point. The GPA is thus the unweighted cumulative average calculated for all relevant subjects, including failed subjects (if a failed subject is retaken, only the grade obtained in the final attempt will be included) taken by a student from the start of the programme to a particular reference point in time. The GPA is an indicator of overall performance and is capped at 4.0. Semester GPA Calculation of Semester GPA is similar to the rules for GPA as described above, except that only subjects taken in that semester, including retaken subjects, will be included. This Semester GPA will be used to determine students eligibility to progress to the next semester alongside with the Overall GPA. However, the Semester GPA calculated for the Summer Term will not be used for this purpose as the Summer Term study is not mandatory for all students of the programme concerned or constitutes part of the graduation requirements. Award GPA When a student has satisfied the requirements for award, an Award GPA will be calculated to determine his/ her award classification. The calculation of Award GPA is similar to the rules for GPA, except that only subjects inside the programme curriculum concerned will be included. General education subjects for fulfilling the award requirements will also be included in the calculation of Award GPA. 42

52 Any subjects passed after the graduation requirement has been met or subjects taken on top of the prescribed credit requirements for an award shall not be taken into account in the grade point calculation for award classification. However, if a student attempts more elective subjects than the requirement for graduation in or before the semester within which he/she becomes eligible for an award, the elective subjects with a higher grade/contribution (with the exception of the additional subjects taken out of interest and not for satisfying the award requirements) shall be counted in the grade point calculation for award classification (i.e. the subjects attempted with a lower grade/contribution will be excluded from the grade point calculation for award classification), irrespective of when the excessive elective subjects are enrolled. The same principle applies to mutually exclusive compulsory subjects Retaking Subjects Students may retake any subject for the purpose of improving their grade without having to seek approval, but they must retake a compulsory subject which they have failed, i.e. obtained an F grade. If the failed subject is a mutually exclusive compulsory subject, a student may either retake that same subject or another mutually exclusive compulsory subject. If the failed subject is an elective subject, a student may retake that same subject or another elective subject from the same elective subject set. Students wishing to retake passed subjects will be accorded a lower priority than those who are required to retake (due to failure in a compulsory subject) and can only do so if places are available, as well as the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester is not exceeded. Furthermore, if a student is eligible to graduate upon completion of all graduation requirements of his/her programme of study, he/she will not be allowed to retake any subject for the purpose of improving the subject grade or GPA. The number of retakes of a subject is not restricted. While only the grade obtained in the final attempt of retaking (even if the retake grade is lower than the original grade for originally passed subject) will be included in the calculation of the Grade Point Average (Overall GPA) and the Grade Point Average for award classification (Award GPA), the grades obtained in previous attempts will also be reflected in the transcript of studies. This applies to the retake of the same subject only, and in cases where students take another subject to replace a failed subject, the fail grade will be retained and taken into account in the calculation of the Overall GPA, despite the passing of the other subject. If a student retakes a previously passed subject and fails in the latest attempt, the credits accumulated for passing the subject in a previous attempt will remain valid for satisfying the credit requirement for award. However, the fail grade in the latest attempt will be included in the calculation of the Overall GPA and Award GPA Taking Additional Subjects Students may take additional subjects in the following semester for broadening purpose, after they have fulfilled the graduation requirements. In the case when the Summer Term is mandatory for all students of a programme, students who have fulfilled the graduation requirements in Semester Two will be allowed to take additional subjects in Semester One of the following academic year, and not necessarily during the Summer Term. However, students will be subject to the maximum study load of 21 credits per semester and the availability of places in the subjects concerned, and their enrolment will be as subject-based students only. The grades earned for subject-based students who have 43

53 fulfilled all the graduation requirements will not be calculated towards the students Overall GPA or Award GPA and a separate transcript will be issued Plagiarism and Dishonesty Students should be honest in performing academic assignments and during examinations/tests. The College takes a very serious view against dishonesty in examinations/assessment and plagiarism in coursework. In particular, all students should read the sections on Conduct of Examinations and Academic Studies in the HKCC Student Handbook. Penalties ranging from disqualification to expulsion will be imposed in cases of proven dishonesty in examination/assessment and/or plagiarism Guidelines for Award Classification In using these guidelines for award classification, the BoE shall exercise its judgement in coming to its conclusions as to the award for each student, and where appropriate, may use other relevant information. The following are guidelines only for the BoE s reference in determining award classifications: Classification Distinction Credit Pass Guidelines The student s performance/attainment is outstanding, and identifies him or her as exceptionally able in the field covered by the programme in question. The student has reached a standard of performance/attainment which is more than satisfactory but less than outstanding. The student has reached a standard of performance/attainment ranging from just adequate to satisfactory Student Appeals A student may appeal on academic grounds. However, a student s disagreement with the marking done by the Subject Lecturer, or with the decision of a SARP/BoE, is not in itself an adequate ground for an appeal. Any appeal should be directed to the Director of HKCC. Details are set out in the HKCC Student Handbook Exceptional Circumstances Absence from an Assessment Component If a student is unable to complete all the assessment components of a subject, due to illness or other circumstances which are beyond his/her control and considered by the Subject Assessment Review Panel (SARP) as legitimate, the SARP will determine whether the student will have to complete a late assessment and, if so, by what means. This late assessment shall take place at the earliest opportunity, and before the commencement of the following academic year (except that for Summer Term, which may take place within 3 weeks after the finalisation of Summer Term results). If the late 44

54 assessment cannot be completed before the commencement of the following academic year, the CPCE College Board Chairman shall decide on an appropriate time for completion of the late assessment. Late Assessment The student concerned is required to submit his/her application for late assessment in writing to HKCC, within five working days from the date of the examination, together with any supporting documents. Where appropriate, applications for late assessment will be referred to the SARP for approval. Late assessment is not an automatic entitlement. Should a late assessment be granted, the examination will be regarded as a first assessment and the actual grade obtained will be awarded. Details of applications for late assessment can be found in the Student Handbook. Aegrotat Award If a student is unable to complete the requirements of the programme in question for the award due to very serious illness, or other very special circumstances which are beyond his/her control, and considered by the Board of Examiners (BoE) as legitimate, the CPCE College Board will determine whether the student will be granted an aegrotat award. Aegrotat award will be granted only under very exceptional circumstances. A student who has been offered an aegrotat award shall have the right to opt either to accept such an award, or request to be assessed on another occasion to be stipulated by the BoE; the student s exercise of this option shall be irrevocable. The acceptance of an aegrotat award by a student shall disqualify him or her from any subsequent assessment for the same award. An aegrotat award shall normally not be classified, and the award parchment shall not state that it is an aegrotat award. However, the BoE may determine whether the award should be classified, provided that they have adequate information on other students academic performance. Other Particular Circumstances A student s particular circumstances may influence the procedures for assessment, but not the standard of performance expected in the assessment Other Regulations Students of the Associate Degree Scheme in Business are bound by all other regulations of HKCC, the CPCE, and/or the University. 45

55 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (8C108-NS) Appendix I To be eligible for the Associate in Business award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects # together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting DS Elective Subjects complete 6 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 46

56 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (Accounting) (8C108-ACC) Appendix II To be eligible for the Associate in Business (Accounting) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2108 Business Law CCN2111 Cost Accounting CCN2121 Intermediate Accounting CCN2123 Introduction to Auditing and Taxation DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects # (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 47

57 Appendix III Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (Business Management) (8C108-BM) To be eligible for the Associate in Business (Business Management) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects # together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2005 Organisational Behaviour CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2105 Business Economics CCN2113 Financial Management CCN2126 Introduction to International Business DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 48

58 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (China Business) (8C108-CB) Appendix IV To be eligible for the Associate in Business (China Business) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects # together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN2001 Introduction to Chinese Political and Legal System CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2102 Accounting and Tax Practices in China CCN2106 Business Environment in China CCN2130 Marketing in China DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 49

59 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (Finance) (8C108-FIN) Appendix V To be eligible for the Associate in Business (Finance) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects # together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2113 Financial Management CCN2114 Financial Markets and Institutions CCN2129 Introduction to Macroeconomics CCN2132 Principles of Investments DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 50

60 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (Hospitality Management) (8C108-HM) Appendix VI To be eligible for the Associate in Business (Hospitality Management) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects # together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN1102 Hotel Operations CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2115 Food Service Operations CCN2116 Front Office Operations CCN2119 Housekeeping Operations DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 51

61 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (Human Resources Management) (8C108-HR) Appendix VII To be eligible for the Associate in Business (Human Resources Management) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects # together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN1101 Fundamentals of Human Resources Management CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2109 Compensation and Performance CCN2133 Staffing and Selection CCN2135 Training and Development DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 52

62 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (International Business) (8C108-IB) Appendix VIII To be eligible for the Associate in Business (International Business) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects # together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2006 Understanding Globalisation CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management CCN2122 International Finance CCN2126 Introduction to International Business DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 53

63 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (Logistics and Supply Chain Management) (8C108-LM) Appendix IX To be eligible for the Associate in Business (Logistics and Supply Chain Management) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) # GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management CCN2118 Global Transport and Trade Operations CCN2120 Information Technology in Global Supply Chain Management CCN2127 Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 54

64 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (Marketing) (8C108-MK) Appendix X To be eligible for the Associate in Business (Marketing) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects # together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2103 Advertising and Promotion CCN2110 Consumer Behaviour CCN2112 Customer Relationship Management CCN2131 Marketing Research Fundamentals DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 55

65 Graduation Requirement Checklist for Associate in Business (Tourism Management) (8C108-TM) Appendix XI To be eligible for the Associate in Business (Tourism Management) award, students should fulfill all the graduation requirements listed in Section (I) (IV) below. Please put a in the appropriate boxes for the graduation requirements that you have fulfilled. For details of the graduation requirements, please refer to Sections 5 and 8 of this definitive scheme document. (I) Credit and Level Requirements Credit Requirement (Refer to Section 8 for details) Please indicate the number of credits # that you have to attain for graduation. Study Pattern I 60 credits (normal study pattern) Study Pattern II 63 credits (taking CCN1002 Practical English for College Students) Level Requirement (Refer to Section 8.2 for details) At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 2 or above; PLUS At least 30 credits of subjects at Level 1 or above Study Pattern III 63 credits (taking one additional GE elective subject) (II) General Education (GE) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.3 for details) Study Pattern IV 66 credits (taking both CCN1002 Practical English for College Students AND one additional GE elective subject) # GE Compulsory Subjects CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students CCN1007 Information Technology for Business [OR CCN1001 Elementary Chinese (for Non-Chinese Speakers)] CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking College Students CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I CCN2002 Introduction to Economics CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II CCN2004 Managing Organisations For students taking Study Pattern II or IV CCN1002 Practical English for College Students GE Elective Subjects together with CCN2002 Introduction to Economics and CCN2004 Managing Organisations, the elective subjects belong to 4 Cluster Areas one of the elective subjects is China-related* For students taking Study Pattern I or II complete 4 GE elective subjects For students taking Study Pattern III or IV complete 5 GE elective subjects (III) Discipline-specific (DS) Requirements (Refer to Section 8.4 for details) DS Compulsory Subjects CCN1103 Introduction to Tourism CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing CCN2101 Financial Accounting CCN2104 Attractions Management CCN2134 Tourism and Transport CCN2136 Travel Agency Operations DS Elective Subjects complete 2 DS elective subjects (IV) Other Requirement (Refer to Section 5 for details) attain a Grade Point Average (GPA) of 2.0 or above at the end of the programme All subjects are of 3 credits each unless otherwise specified. * For students who have already successfully completed a discipline-specific subject which is designated as China-related, they are not required to select a designated China-related GE elective subject. 56

66 Section Two: Syllabuses

67 CCN1001 Elementary Chinese Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Putonghua) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CCN1003 Chinese Communication for College Students Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject introduces to non-chinese speaking students, or those whose Chinese standards are at junior secondary level or below, the Putonghua phonetic system as well as terms and phrases commonly used in everyday situations. It serves as a solid foundation for students to acquire basic Putonghua competence and to prepare themselves for studying Putonghua at more advanced levels. The subject requires students to learn and practise how to write 150 simple Chinese characters. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: apply the Putonghua phonetic system (the Hanyu pinyin system) to pronouncing the sounds of Chinese characters use Chinese terms and phrases commonly used in everyday situations conduct simple dialogues in Putonghua identify and recognise 150 Chinese characters have a better understanding of Chinese culture and Chinese people Indicative Contents Phonetic Structures of Putonghua and Hanyu Pinyin System The four tones; Initials; Simple, compound and nasal finals; Neutral tones; Tones sandhi; Retroflex ending -r. Sentence Patterns and Drills Word order; Measure words; Word Stress and intonation. Chinese Character Writing 150 Words General Knowledge of Relationship between Chinese Language and Culture Daily Life Conversations 57

68 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will provide students with a good understanding of the Putonghua phonetic system and a knowledge of Chinese sentence structures. Such knowledge will be reinforced with frequent oral practice, role play and class activities during tutorials. Assessment Approach Assessment will be in the form of dictation, written tests and oral presentations. The coursework will constitute 100% of the assessment of the subject. The dictation and written tests will assess students understanding of the Pinyin system and pinyin rules. Oral presentations will assess students ability to consolidate the knowledge gained in this course. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and tests. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Xiao, H. (2005) Talk Mandarin Today 今 日 學 說 普 通 話, 2 nd Ed., Chinese University Press. Reference Liu, X. (2010) New Practical Chinese Reader, 2 nd Ed., Beijing Language and Culture University Press. 58

69 CCN1002 Practical English for College Students Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 42 hours of seminars Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject aims to equip students with the essential English language foundations needed for effective communication in an English-medium learning environment at post-secondary education level. The main focus is to enhance students English proficiency in reading, writing, listening and speaking for academic purposes. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: develop strategies for vocabulary building and better comprehension of spoken and written academic texts use accurate and appropriate lexical-grammatical resources to perform essential spoken and written academic tasks in English apply fundamental writing techniques to structure and write short academic texts identify main ideas from spoken and printed sources and take effective notes in academic settings achieve a fair level of oral fluency and accuracy Indicative Contents Reading Skills Reading strategies (e.g. skimming and scanning); Skills for making inferences from academic texts and discerning meanings of vocabulary, idioms and other unfamiliar English expressions; Academic vocabulary. Writing Skills Grammar skills (e.g. subjects and verbs, subject-verb agreement, pronouns, adjectives and adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions, punctuations); Sentence skills (e.g. phrases, clauses, fragments, runons); Composition and variation of sentences (e.g. simple sentences, compound sentences and complex sentences); Academic writing (e.g. paragraph/essay structure, topic sentence, supporting sentences, and concluding sentence). Listening Skills Classroom note-taking skills; Listening strategies (e.g. listening for general and specific information; identifying the features of spoken English); Discrimination of English sounds. Speaking Skills Word pronunciation (e.g. vowels, consonants, diphthongs, syllables and stress); Intonation (e.g. stress in sentences); Linking. 59

70 Teaching/Learning Approach Seminars will focus on improving students English language skills through practices. Different learning activities such as diagnostic tests, writing practices, worksheets, reading exercises, and group discussions will be used to enhance students English proficiency for academic purposes. In language laboratory sessions, audio-visual and on-line materials will be used to reinforce students listening and speaking skills. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, written tasks, quizzes and test(s) designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking and analytical skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, quizzes and test. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Roemer, A. E., Ruetten, M. K and Thompson, C. (2009) Use of English, Cengage Learning. References Brown, K. and Hood, S. (2002) Academic Encounters: Reading, Study Skills, and Writing, 1 st Ed., Cambridge University Press. Espeseth, M. (2002) Academic Listening Encounters: Listening, Note Taking, and Discussion, 1 st Ed., Cambridge University Press. Hartmann, P. and Blass, L. (2007) Quest 1 Listening and Speaking, 2 nd Ed., McGraw-Hill. Hartmann, P. and Blass, L. (2007) Quest 1 Reading and Writing, 2 nd Ed., McGraw-Hill. Langan, John and Janet M. Goldstein (2010) English Brushup, 5 th Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill. Oshima, A. and Ann H. (2006) Writing Academic English, 4 th Ed., New York: Pearson Longman. Roemer, A. E. (2006) College Oral Communication 2, Houghton Mifflin. Ruetten, M. K. (2003) Developing Composition Skills: Rhetoric and Grammar, 2 nd Ed., Heinle. Thompson, C. (2004) Academic Word Power 2, Heinle. 60

71 CCN1003 大 專 中 文 傳 意 Chinese Communication for College Students 程 度 1 學 分 3 教 學 語 言 中 文 普 通 話 講 授 教 學 模 式 42 小 時 課 堂 講 授 修 讀 條 件 無 不 能 同 時 修 讀 的 科 目 CCN1001 Elementary Chinese 評 估 方 法 100% 課 堂 習 作 科 目 目 標 本 科 目 透 過 課 堂 講 授 課 堂 練 習 分 組 習 作 等 方 式, 培 養 同 學 中 文 閱 讀 書 寫 和 演 說 能 力 科 目 注 重 教 導 同 學 規 範 地 運 用 中 文 的 字 詞 句 ; 教 授 撰 寫 各 類 中 文 文 章 的 基 礎 知 識, 特 別 是 與 職 業 需 求 或 社 會 事 務 相 關 的 實 用 文 類 等 ; 培 養 同 學 閱 讀 中 文 經 典 名 家 名 著 的 興 趣 和 能 力 ; 訓 練 同 學 在 演 講 討 論 等 方 面 的 技 巧 科 目 統 籌 小 組 在 籌 備 講 授 及 評 核 本 課 程 時, 須 參 照 相 關 的 課 程 內 容 藍 圖, 了 解 本 科 目 的 角 色 定 位, 如 何 在 課 程 層 面 上 協 助 學 生 達 到 預 期 的 學 習 成 果 學 習 成 果 學 生 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 應 能 : 了 解 漢 字 流 變 及 漢 語 語 法 結 構 的 基 礎 知 識, 寫 正 字 及 規 範 的 漢 語 ; 掌 握 不 同 種 類 實 用 文 體 的 寫 作, 以 應 付 職 業 需 求 及 其 他 社 會 事 務 的 需 要 ; 提 高 閱 讀 中 文 著 作 的 能 力, 理 解 不 同 文 章 的 技 巧 和 思 想 內 涵 ; 通 過 個 人 演 說 及 討 論, 提 升 口 語 技 巧 及 能 力 課 程 內 容 基 礎 中 文 課 程 介 紹 漢 語 語 法, 包 括 詞 性 句 子 篇 章 結 構 ; 介 紹 漢 字 的 文 字 流 變, 學 習 簡 化 字 ; 學 習 閱 讀 名 家 名 作, 掌 握 文 章 閱 讀 技 巧 實 用 文 寫 作 訓 練 課 程 介 紹 中 文 實 用 文 的 定 義 種 類 及 應 用 範 圍 ; 學 習 書 信 ( 各 公 私 函 件, 包 括 投 訴 信 回 覆 投 訴 信 求 職 信, 同 時 也 介 紹 傳 統 書 信 電 子 郵 件 和 傳 真 等 信 函 格 式 ) 新 聞 稿 計 劃 書 報 告 工 作 總 結 等 文 類 的 寫 作 規 範 口 語 訓 練 課 程 介 紹 如 何 進 行 求 職 升 學 面 試, 包 括 個 人 及 小 組 面 試 ; 介 紹 如 何 參 與 討 論 闡 述 立 場 ; 介 紹 演 講 辭 的 寫 作, 如 何 針 對 演 講 的 不 同 場 合 和 對 象 發 揮 演 講 的 效 用 61

72 教 學 方 法 本 科 目 理 論 與 實 際 並 重, 透 過 大 量 個 案 分 析 ( 佳 作 及 病 例 ) 深 化 課 堂 所 教 知 識, 並 鼓 勵 學 生 參 與 討 論 及 小 組 報 告, 進 一 步 活 用 中 文 強 化 自 信 評 核 方 法 本 科 目 採 用 持 續 評 估 方 法, 學 生 須 撰 寫 平 時 習 作, 如 報 告 演 講 辭 及 計 劃 書 等, 也 須 完 成 導 修 課 堂 小 組 報 告 討 論 等, 另 有 期 中 測 驗, 檢 測 學 生 掌 握 本 科 目 的 水 平 每 班 的 教 學 計 劃 (Teaching Plan) 詳 述 個 別 習 作 佔 整 體 評 核 的 實 際 比 重 學 生 收 到 習 作 時, 均 會 獲 告 知 習 作 所 評 核 的 是 那 些 預 期 學 習 成 果 學 生 所 需 的 努 力 除 了 42 小 時 的 課 堂 講 授 外, 學 生 在 習 作 備 課 準 備 測 驗, 並 與 同 學 進 行 小 組 工 作 等 方 面 所 花 的 時 間, 預 期 約 為 84 小 時 指 定 課 本 本 科 目 涉 及 的 參 考 材 料 較 廣 泛, 無 指 定 課 本 參 考 書 于 成 鯤 主 編 : 現 代 應 用 文, 復 旦 大 學 出 版 社,1996 年 版 白 雲 開 : 21 世 紀 商 用 中 文 書 信 寫 作 手 冊, 香 港 城 市 大 學 出 版 社,2001 年 版 呂 叔 湘 : 現 代 漢 語 八 百 詞, 商 務 印 書 館,1984 年 版 李 錦 昌 編 著 : 現 代 商 業 傳 意 大 全, 商 務 印 書 館 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,2005 年 版 胡 裕 樹 : 現 代 漢 語 ( 增 訂 本 ), 三 聯 書 店,1992 年 版 路 德 慶 主 編 : 寫 作 教 程, 華 東 師 範 大 學 出 版 社,1984 年 版 張 斌 : 漢 語 語 法 修 辭 常 識, 香 港 教 育 圖 書 公 司,1991 年 版 陳 建 民 : 說 話 的 藝 術, 語 文 出 版 社,1994 年 版 蔡 富 春 主 編 : 中 國 商 務 應 用 文 書 手 冊, 經 濟 日 報 出 版 社 ( 香 港 ),2002 年 版 董 兆 傑 : 口 語 訓 練, 語 文 出 版 社,1990 年 版 盧 丹 懷 [ 等 ]: 中 港 應 用 文 傳 意 大 全, 商 務 印 書 館 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,2002 年 版 62

73 CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject equips students with critical and creative thinking skills. It provides the conceptual framework to identify problems in both everyday life and specific domains, and to make the right and appropriate decisions. By widening their horizons and stimulating their multi-dimensional thinking style, it cultivates a proper attitude for enhancing students critical and creative power. The subject also helps students develop critical thinking and creative thinking essential for their life-long learning and future work development. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the importance of thinking skills in everyday life appreciate their existing thinking habits, mental blocks and attitudes that hinder them from being critical and creative be aware of the different types of thinking, how they are different, how they can complement each other and how they can be applied to everyday situations become more attuned to fallacious reasoning in everyday life, and know how to correct the fallacies found apply the techniques for critical thinking in evaluating arguments and solutions develop the attitude and techniques for creative problem solving apply the basic skills for working in innovative problem solving teams Indicative Contents Thinking as a Skill Concept of Thinking; Importance of thinking; Habitual thinking vs. thinking as a deliberate skill that can be controlled; Vertical (critical) vs. lateral (creative) thinking; Attitude and psychological preparations for thinking. Critical Thinking: Introduction Critical thinking; Role of critical thinking and how it can complement creative thinking in problem solving; Logic and critical thinking. Meaning Analysis The nature of meaning; Meaning and reference; Basic functions of language; Language traps. 63

74 Argument Analysis Identifying arguments; Validity and Soundness; Inductive strength and cogency; Methods of enumeration; Analogical arguments; Arguments from consequences; Causal arguments. Fallacy Analysis Common errors in thinking including inconsistency, irrelevance, insufficiency, and inappropriate assumptions. Creative Thinking: Introduction Creativity as an ability to modify self-imposed constraints; Characteristics of creative people; Basic elements affecting creativity in practice: person, process, product and climate; Introduction to stages in the creative process. Generating Ideas Avoiding blocks to creativity; Stimulating ideas using various techniques and tools: forced uncommon responses, free association, analogy, unusual combinations, visualisation, brain storming, and Edward de Bono s various techniques such as the six thinking hats, etc. Creative and Critical Thinking in Teams Characteristics of effective teams; Stimulating creativity and problem solving in teams; Communication, trust building and conflict-reduction for teams. Teaching/Learning Approach The emphasis of the subject is on enabling students to acquire the attitudes and skills in practical thinking. Lectures will be used to explain and demonstrate the topics and techniques introduced. Cases and exercises will be used during tutorials to let students experience thinking in action. To motivate students to actively change their own attitudes and participate in experiential workshop-style tutorials, a lot of interesting and daily examples and cases will be used as illustration/demonstration during lectures, for exercises during tutorials and for assignments. To achieve the best learning outcomes, the lecturer/instructor will create a climate that is challenging, dynamic and yet idea-supporting, trusting, and playful. Debates and risk taking will be encouraged, which facilitates students to make their own judgments in a rational and fluent way. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students creative and critical thinking as well as communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). 64

75 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Joe Lau. (2011) An Introduction to Critical Thinking and Creativity: Think More, Think Better, Wiley. 貝 剛 毅 : 思 方 導 航 批 判 思 考 導 論, 匯 智 出 版,2011 年 版 References Bassham, G. et al. (2005) Critical Thinking: A Student s Introduction, 2 nd Ed., McGraw Hill. LeBlanc, J. (1998) Thinking Clearly: A Guide to Critical Reasoning, W. W. Norton & Company. Walton, D. N. (2005) Fundamentals of Critical Argumentation, Cambridge University Press. Walton, D. N. (1989) Informal Logic: A Handbook of Critical Argumentation, Cambridge University Press. 李 天 命 : 語 理 分 析 的 思 考 方 法, 青 文 書 屋,1981 年 版 李 天 命 : 哲 道 行 者, 明 報 出 版 社,2005 年 版 李 逆 熵 : 格 物 致 知 思 考 與 研 究 方 法 概 要, 經 濟 日 報 出 版 社,2009 年 版 方 子 華 等 : 批 判 思 考,McGraw Hill (Asia),2005 年 版 Recommended Websites 思 方 網 ( 香 港 大 學 ): Critical Thinking Web: 65

76 CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 42 hours of seminars Prerequisites CCN1002 Practical English for College Students or Level 3 or above in HKDSE English Language; or its equivalents Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject aims to help students acquire English language competence required to study effectively in a post-secondary, English-medium learning environment. Attention is given to developing students competence in English and to helping students adjust to studying in a post-secondary, English-medium learning environment. Where possible and appropriate, business-related teaching materials are to be used. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: deliver effective oral presentations for academic purposes summarize and paraphrase ideas write short, structured academic essays apply reading and listening skills to improve comprehension of academic materials research for information, integrate ideas, and document sources properly for academic purposes perform critical reflection on their learning experiences and processes Indicative Contents Speaking Skills Oral presentations (on business topics): planning, preparation, delivery, question-handling. Writing Skills Summarising and paraphrasing skills; Introduction to essay writing; Process approach for writing a short, structured academic essay (on a business topic), e.g. description or exposition; Skills for writing effective sentences; Skills for proofreading and revising written text. Reading and Listening Skills Reading skills and strategies for different purposes; Rapid reading; Skills for improving listening comprehension; Business vocabulary development. Research Skills Library research, online research and other forms of research; Awareness of plagiarism; Documentation of sources of information, e.g. APA style. 66

77 Study Skills Reflection on English language learning; Learning in class and working in groups; Use of dictionaries and thesauruses (printed and online); English learning on the Internet. Teaching/Learning Approach Students will be required to participate actively in the learning process. During seminars, students will take part in a wide range of interesting and challenging language learning activities such as role-plays, discussions, individual and group activities, which reflect students needs in their studies in business administration subjects. In particular, students will be required to plan and collaborate with peers in a major team project/assignment which will give them an opportunity to experience learning from peers as well. In language laboratory sessions, audio-visual materials will be used to improve students listening and speaking skills, and the online learning platform will be used as a tool to promote extended learning after class. Students are also encouraged to engage in constant reflection on learning processes and to evaluate their own as well as their peers performance and team work skills in the learning tasks. Through extensive interactive practices, the course helps students gain mastery of the academic language skills needed for effective academic communication. Assessment Approach The assessment of this subject is based on 100% continuous assessment. Students spoken and written academic English skills will be assessed through a combination of individual and group assessment tasks related to the learning outcomes of the subject. Tasks may include individual written tasks, group oral tasks, group written project, quizzes and tests, etc. Students will be assessed on accuracy as well as the appropriacy of the language used in fulfilling the assessment tasks. In addition, to encourage a spirit of enquiry and sharing and to help students explore the creativity and enjoyment of the process of learning and researching knowledge, part of students grade will be based on their class participation throughout the course of the semester. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and test(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Langan, J. (2010) English Skills for Academic Studies, McGraw-Hill. (A combined, abridged version of John Langan s College Writing Skills with Readings, 8 th Ed., and Reading and Study Skills, 7 th Ed.) Roen, D., Glau, G. and Maid, B. (2009) The McGraw-Hill Guide: Writing for College, Writing for Life (Chapter Extract), McGraw-Hill. 67

78 References Langan, J. and Goldstein, J. (2007) English Brushup, 4 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Reinhart, S. (2002) Giving Academic Presentations, University of Michigan Press. Steer, J. and Schmid, D. (1998) The Advanced Grammar Book (Workbook), 2 nd Ed., Heinle & Heinle. Collins COBUILD Advanced Learner s Dictionary (2006), 5 th Ed., HarperCollins. Collins Thesaurus A-Z (2006), 2 nd Ed., HarperCollins. 68

79 CCN1006 English for Academic Studies (Business) II Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 42 hours of seminars Prerequisites CCN1005 English for Academic Studies (Business) I Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject is a continuation of CCN1005. It aims to further enhance students English language abilities to function effectively in a post-secondary, English-medium learning environment. Attention is given to reinforcing students confidence in pursuing further studies in business subjects. Where possible and appropriate, business-related teaching materials are to be used. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: conduct effective seminar discussions for academic purposes write small-scale, fully fledged research essays to present arguments analyze business cases conduct basic research to gather primary data and information for research essays perform critical reflection on their learning experiences and processes Indicative Contents Speaking Skills Seminar discussions (on business cases): presenting analysis and opinion, agreeing and disagreeing, asking for clarification and summarizing. Writing Skills Structure of a research essay; Writing and revising a small-scale, fully fledged research essay (on a business topic) to present an argument; Incorporating data and information from different sources to support a thesis. Reading Skills Reading and analyzing business cases; Further business vocabulary development. Research Skills Designing and conducting research interviews, surveys and questionnaires. Study Skills Reflection on post-secondary experiences and processes in English language learning. 69

80 Teaching/Learning Approach Students will be required to participate actively in the learning process. During seminars, students will take part in a wide range of interesting and challenging language learning activities such as role-plays, discussions, individual and group activities, which reflect students needs in their studies in business administration subjects. In particular, students will be required to plan and collaborate with peers in a major team project/assignment which will give them an opportunity to experience learning from peers as well. In language laboratory sessions, audio-visual materials will be used to improve students listening and speaking skills, and the online learning platform will be used as a tool to promote extended learning after class. Students are also encouraged to engage in constant reflection on learning processes and to evaluate their own as well as their peers performance and team work skills in the learning tasks. Through extensive interactive practices, the course helps students gain mastery of the academic language skills needed for effective academic communication. Assessment Approach The assessment of this subject is based on 100% continuous assessment. Students spoken and written academic English skills will be assessed through a combination of individual and group assessment tasks related to the learning outcomes of the subject. Tasks may include individual written tasks, group oral tasks, group written project, quizzes and tests, etc. Students will be assessed on accuracy as well as the appropriacy of the language used in fulfilling the assessment tasks. In addition, to encourage a spirit of enquiry and sharing and to help students explore the creativity and enjoyment of the process of learning and researching knowledge, part of students grade will be based on their class participation throughout the course of the semester. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and test(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Langan, J. (2010) English Skills for Academic Studies, McGraw-Hill. (A combined, abridged version of John Langan s College Writing Skills with Readings, 8 th Ed., and Reading and Study Skills, 7 th Ed. McGraw-Hill) References Madden, C. and Rohlck, T. (1997) Discussion and Interaction in the Academic Community, University of Michigan Press. Oshima, A. and Hogue, A. (2006) Writing Academic English, Addison Wesley Longman. 70

81 Robbins, S. (2004) Collins COBUILD Business Vocabulary in Practice, 2 nd Ed., HarperCollins. Spencer, C. and Arbon, B. (1996) Foundations of Writing: Developing Research and Academic Writing Skills, NTC. 71

82 CCN1007 Information Technology for Business Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with fundamental knowledge in Information Technology and its applications in modern enterprises. It also enables students to apply Information Technology in business environments and develop end-user computing skills. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand and evaluate the concepts and applications of Information Technology in business environments analyse the different business cases related to Information Technology applications such as decision making on strategic management and marketing think critically and creatively in team work to apply Information Technology for different business requirements use current Information Technology necessary for business applications and decision making Indicative Contents Information Technology (IT) in Digital Economy IT Concepts and business models in digital economy; Business pressures, organisational responses, and IT support; Information systems and their roles in organisations. The Web Revolution Network computing; Communication; Collaboration; Web-based systems; E-business and e- commerce; Business-to-business and business-to-consumer applications; E-commerce support; Mobile computing; Mobile commerce; Location-based commerce; Pervasive computing. Introduction to Organisational Applications Transaction processing; Functional information systems; Supply chain management; Enterprise resource planning; Customer relationship management; IT planning and business process redesign. Overview of Managerial and Decision Support Systems Knowledge management; Data management: database, data warehousing, business intelligence, data mining; Decision making and its support systems. 72

83 End-User Computing Skills Word-processing; Spreadsheet processing; File processing and database handling; Working with presentation software; Web page developing. Teaching/Learning Approach Theories and basic concepts will be delivered through lectures. Video shows on relevant topics may be arranged so as to make lectures more interesting. IT applications for different business cases will be provided for class discussion and critical thinking among students. Students technical competence will be developed through (supervised) hands-on practice in computer laboratories and through related exercises in business applications. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including hands-on practice and computer lab assignments, tests, projects, presentation and an examination. All of these tools will be designed to help students to understand and evaluate the concepts and applications of Information Technology and assess their enduser computing knowledge and skills for business applications. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Stair, R. and Reynolds, G. (2010) Information systems essentials, 5 th Ed., International Edition, Cengage Learning: Course Technology. References Curtis, G. and Cobham, D. (2008) Business information systems: Analysis, design and practice, 6 th Ed., Prentice Hall. O Brien, J. and Marakas, G. (2010) Introduction to information system, McGraw Hill. Shelly, G. B., Vermaat, M. E. and Cashman, T. J. (2008) Microsoft Office 2007: Brief concepts and techniques, 1 st Ed., Cengage Learning: Course Technology. Turban, E. and Volonino, L. (2009) Information technology for management: Transforming organizations in the digital economy, 7 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. 73

84 CCN1008 Mathematics and Statistics for College Students Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CCN1028 Elementary Statistics and CCN1039 Information Processing and Quantitative Methods Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject introduces students with fundamental understanding of a variety of quantitative techniques and equips students with various statistical skills that are necessary for solving decision problems. It provides students with an understanding on how data are collected, summarised, presented, analysed, and interpreted. The subject also helps students develop their ability to think analytically and critically, which prepares them for further studies and life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand some basic knowledge and skills of mathematics and statistics and their applications in real life examples identify and apply appropriate techniques for the solution of decision making problems decide which methods can be used to collect, describe and present numerical data analyse numerical data and interpret the results for making recommendations Indicative Contents Descriptive Statistics Basic statistical terms; Sampling methods; Types of data; Organisation of data; Frequency distributions, Graphical representation; Measures of central tendency; Measures of variability; Interpretation of the numerical descriptive measures; Practical examples are used. Probability Basic concepts of probability; Probability rules; Conditional probability; Illustrations of their applications in real life examples. Probability Distribution Discrete and continuous random variables; Illustrations of their applications in real life examples. Simple Linear Regression Causal relationship in data; Scatter diagram; Least squares method; Assumptions of the regression analysis; Coefficient of determination; Coefficient of correlation. 74

85 Decision Sciences Mathematical thinking; Problem formulation; Decision making with and without probabilities; Risk analysis and sensitivity analysis; Utility and decision making. Linear Programming Formulation of linear programming models; Graphical solution of linear programs in two variables; Sensitivity analysis; Interpretation of solution. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of quantitative/statistics concepts and techniques, with specific reference to current decision problems and real examples wherever appropriate. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life problems. Activities in tutorials will normally include discussion on problems. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including end-of-chapter type problems, in-class assignments, written assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical, problem-solving and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Berenson, M. L., Levine, D. M. and Krehbiel, T. C. (2012) Basic business statistics: Concepts and applications, 12 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Anderson, D. R., Sweeney, D. J., Williams, T. A., Camm, J. D. and Martin, R. K. (2010) Quantitative methods for business, 11 th Ed., Thomson South-Western. References Render, B. E., Stair, R. M. and Hanna, M. E. (2012) Quantitative analysis for management, 11 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Taylor, B. W. (2010) Introduction to management science, 10 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 75

86 CCN1010 Cultural Study through Field Trip Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 7 hours of lectures 35 hours of study trips / workshops / tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject provides students with an opportunity to embark on a guided study trip to local or overseas places. It exposes students to new cultural make-up, so as to broaden their understanding and appreciation of different historical, political, socio-economical, and environmental contexts. The study trips provide students first-hand experience and opportunities of close observations, which allow them to develop their own perspectives and perceptions towards particular cultural issues through research. The subject also helps students develop critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: develop a deeper understanding and a positive appreciation of cultures develop their personal visions through the lateral connections between their own lives and experiences and those of other people undertake cultural research at beginner s level enhance their acuity and critical thinking skills work collaboratively with others as part of a team develop project management skills Indicative Contents What is culture? The changing context (from industrialisation to postmodernism); Ordinary culture; High culture/low culture; Mass culture/popular culture; The question of ideology; Traditions and contemporaries; Introduction to cultural theory; Signifying system; Cultural codes; Material culture and consumerism; Fashion and trend; Identity issues. Qualitative Research Qualitative research vs. Quantitative research; Interpretivism vs. positivism; Grounded theory; Phenomenology; Case study; Ethnographic research. Qualitative Data Collection & Analysis Field work; Observation (naturalistic observation and participant observation); Behaviour study (social behaviour, individual behaviour & material environment); Interactive interview; Survey; Written description; Hypothesis; Sampling (sorting, categorisation and naming themes). 76

87 Documentation and Representation Video and photo documentation; Photo and video journals; Field log book; Quick sketch and analytical drawings; Mappings (emotion, behaviour and relationship); Information graphics (tables, diagrams, charts, graphs and illustrations); Written report. Teaching/Learning Approach Using an interactive approach, this subject will be taught by means of lectures, study trips, workshops, tutorials and presentations. Lectures will introduce and explain various cultural and social theories. Study trips will be arranged to broaden students horizon and provide them opportunities to gain first hand experiences. Students need to bear the travelling expense themselves. Students will be required to compile a field research log book for the study and analysis of social, cultural, religious, political and economic aspects of an identified area of study (e.g. visits to urban or rural areas including city neighborhoods, commercial spaces, cultural organisations such as museums, galleries, design establishments, etc.). Workshops will be organised to develop students research, analytical and presentation skills. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the subject and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Students are expected to participate actively in class by leading discussions on their research findings and doing presentations. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentation of research findings, submission of field research log book and report. Emphasis will be placed on students ability to explore the unknown and develop a deeper sense of understanding and appreciation of culture. First-hand study materials such as drawings, photographs, video clips, written reports and presentation layouts will form the core of the deliverables. Students will be assessed by their ability to synthesise a broad range of information, identify useful resources and apply their developing understanding to novel problems. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and presentations. Indicative Readings References Alasuutari, P. (1995) Researching Culture: Qualitative Method and Cultural Studies, 1 st Publications. Ed., Sage Frow, J. (1995) Cultural Studies and Cultural Value, 1 st Ed., Oxford University Press. Mau, B., Leonard, J. and The Institute Without Boundaries (2004) Massive Change, 1 st Ed., Phaidon. Strauss, A. and Corbin, J. (2008) Basics of Qualitative Research: Techniques and Procedures for Developing Grounded Theory, 3 rd Ed., SAGE Publications. 77

88 Williams, R. (1980) Problems in Materialism and Culture: Selected Essays, 1 st Ed., Verso Books. 吳 俊 雄, 張 志 偉 編 : 閱 讀 香 港 普 及 文 化, ( 修 訂 版 ), 香 港.. 牛 津 大 學 出 版 社,2004 年 版 78

89 CCN1011 Elementary French Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction French, supplemented with English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with knowledge of basic and practical French. Practical aspects of using French in daily life scenarios will be used to help students broaden their horizons, gain some understanding of the French culture, and acquire basic proficiency to communicate in French, especially in the areas of writing and speaking. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: use the basic phonetics of French use common phrases in French to cope with their travel needs express themselves in French to survive in French speaking countries appreciate some aspects of French culture Indicative Contents French Pronunciation The consonants and vowels of French; Words in company; Intonation. Everyday Communication Addressing others and introducing oneself; Responding affirmatively, negatively and skeptically; Talking about time, date, and weather; Expressing gratitude and apology. Basic Survival Traveling by air, train and bus; Staying in a hotel, eating in a restaurant etc; Applying for a visa and going through customs. Social Life Starting, changing and closing a conversation; Making telephone calls and appointments; Expressing congratulations and good wishes; Meeting and seeing people off. Teaching/Learning Approach This foundation course, designed for students with no previous knowledge of the language, will focus on the development of the students linguistic skills through practical use of the language. Both oral and 79

90 written forms of communication will be given equal emphasis. Frequent interaction between the lecturer and the students is expected. Assessment Approach A variety of assessments such as individual and group assignments, short presentations/role plays, tests and an examination will be used to evaluate the application of the learnt knowledge in communication in both written and oral aspects. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Maheo-Le Coadic, M., Poisson-Quinton, S. and Vergne-Sirieys, A. (2005) Festival 1, livre de l élève and cahier d exercices, CLE International. References Charliac, L. and Motron, A. C. (2004) Phonétique Progressive Du Français-3 CD audio collectifs, CLE International. Grégoire, M. (1998) Grammaire Progressive Du Français: Avec 400 exercices, CLE International. Kendris, C. (2002) French Vocabulary, 2 nd Ed., Barron s. McCoy, H. (2011) 501 Essential French Verbs, Dover Publications, Inc. Oudot, S. (2007) French Verbs and Essentials of Grammar, 2 nd Ed., McGraw Hill. Concise Oxford-Hachette French Dictionary (2009), 4 th Ed., Oxford University Press. Audio-visual materials L Espace des Français (Niveau débutant) (video). (1996) CLE International. Une journée de Français (Niveau débutant) (video). (1997) CLE International. 80

91 CCN1012 中 醫 學 基 礎 知 識 Foundation of Traditional Chinese Medicine 程 度 1 學 分 3 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 10 小 時 導 修 4 小 時 課 堂 實 習 修 讀 條 件 無 不 能 同 時 修 讀 的 科 目 CCN3132 Fundamentals of Chinese Medicinal Therapy 評 估 方 法 100% 課 堂 習 作 科 目 目 標 中 國 醫 學 素 為 中 國 文 化 遺 產 的 重 要 部 份, 歷 史 悠 久, 內 涵 豐 富, 將 醫 學 科 學 倫 理 文 化 精 神 和 趣 味 融 為 一 體, 也 是 呈 現 中 國 文 化 精 義 天 人 合 一 的 形 式 之 一, 吸 引 眾 多 愛 好 者 研 習 傳 統 中 醫 文 化 學 習 中 醫 學 的 人, 往 往 能 藉 醫 學 原 理 及 劑 方, 融 合 個 人 於 大 自 然 奇 趣 之 中, 糅 合 道 學 剛 勁 與 陰 柔, 陰 陽 調 和 相 濟 學 習 中 醫 藥 學 有 無 窮 的 樂 趣, 故 本 科 目 尤 其 著 重 教 導 中 國 傳 統 醫 學 的 基 礎 知 識 及 文 化 要 義, 使 學 生 明 白 中 國 醫 學 的 文 化 精 神 同 時, 本 科 目 旨 在 提 高 學 生 學 習 中 國 醫 學 的 興 趣, 並 掌 握 中 國 醫 學 文 化 的 基 礎 知 識 科 目 統 籌 小 組 在 籌 備 講 授 及 評 核 本 課 程 時, 須 參 照 相 關 的 課 程 內 容 藍 圖, 了 解 本 科 目 的 角 色 定 位, 如 何 在 課 程 層 面 上 協 助 學 生 達 到 預 期 的 學 習 成 果 學 習 成 果 學 生 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 應 能 : 明 白 中 國 醫 學 文 化 的 基 礎 知 識 及 特 點 ; 運 用 掌 握 的 基 礎 知 識 與 同 學 交 流 中 醫 學 文 化 ; 分 辨 及 了 解 人 類 經 脈 的 分 佈 及 五 臟 六 腑 構 成 的 基 礎 原 理 ; 了 解 中 國 醫 學 的 特 色, 欣 賞 中 國 文 化 精 義 內 天 人 合 一 的 養 生 之 道 課 程 內 容 中 醫 學 歷 史 及 重 要 中 國 醫 學 的 地 位, 自 先 秦 至 近 代 中 國 醫 學 的 歷 史 發 展 中 醫 學 的 特 色 針 灸 骨 骼 的 原 理 中 醫 聞 診 問 診 及 切 診 中 醫 經 脈 及 診 斷 - 原 理 以 李 時 珍 本 草 綱 目 為 中 心 的 引 介 中 醫 學 與 道 學 文 化 氣 功 原 理 與 中 醫 的 發 展 81

92 中 醫 兒 科 及 方 劑 學 痲 疹 及 傷 寒 的 治 療 方 法 中 醫 骨 傷 及 婦 科 跌 打 損 傷 與 治 療 應 用 五 臟 病 理 五 臟 腸 胃 與 道 家 治 療 方 法 中 醫 膏 方 及 調 養 引 介 基 本 中 藥 及 飲 料 營 養 方 法 中 醫 療 傷 以 華 佗 論 醫 為 中 心 的 討 論 氣 功 與 養 生 道 家 氣 功 治 療 方 法 中 醫 倫 理 學 中 醫 的 醫 德 及 操 守 教 學 方 法 學 生 需 要 積 極 參 與 課 堂 及 導 修 課 的 教 學 活 動 在 課 堂 上, 主 要 由 講 師 介 紹 中 國 醫 學 的 基 礎 知 識 及 治 療 方 法, 尤 多 運 用 電 子 光 碟 及 視 覺 器 材, 講 解 中 國 醫 學 及 人 體 經 絡 等 知 識, 教 導 學 生 了 解 中 國 醫 學 的 要 義 及 其 蘊 含 的 歷 史 文 化, 使 科 目 更 富 趣 味 及 科 學 邏 輯 講 師 也 會 藉 導 修 課 及 課 堂 實 習, 使 學 生 掌 握 中 醫 學 經 脈 的 基 礎 知 識, 體 會 中 國 傳 統 醫 師 斷 診 的 方 法 與 規 則 評 核 方 法 本 科 目 廣 泛 利 用 各 種 評 核 方 式, 例 如 小 組 討 論 報 告 測 驗 實 習 報 告 及 個 人 終 期 報 告 的 評 鑑 模 式, 準 確 衡 量 學 生 所 學, 亦 特 別 重 視 學 生 課 堂 的 參 與, 務 求 透 過 各 種 評 核 模 式, 公 平 全 面 及 有 效 地 評 核 學 生 明 白 運 用 及 實 習 所 掌 握 的 中 國 醫 學 基 礎 知 識 的 能 力 1. 小 組 書 面 報 告 主 要 從 小 組 同 學 合 作 撰 寫 的 報 告 中, 考 核 同 學 的 合 作 能 力, 及 從 報 告 考 察 同 學 所 獲 的 中 國 醫 學 基 礎 知 識 2. 小 組 討 論 及 課 堂 匯 報 主 要 考 核 同 學 在 有 限 時 間 內 報 告 重 點 及 回 應 同 學 的 問 題 3. 測 驗 考 核 同 學 了 解 中 醫 學 理 的 基 礎 知 識 4. 個 人 實 習 報 告 考 核 同 學 觀 診 後 撰 寫 中 醫 病 理 文 化 的 報 告 5. 個 人 終 期 報 告 要 求 每 位 同 學 撰 寫 論 文 一 篇, 考 核 同 學 了 解 中 醫 藥 的 基 礎 知 識 每 班 的 教 學 計 劃 (Teaching Plan) 詳 述 個 別 習 作 佔 整 體 評 核 的 實 際 比 重 學 生 收 到 習 作 時, 均 會 獲 告 知 習 作 所 評 核 的 是 哪 些 預 期 學 習 成 果 學 生 所 需 的 努 力 除 了 42 小 時 的 課 堂 講 授 外, 學 生 在 習 作 備 課 準 備 測 驗 及 考 試, 並 與 同 學 進 行 小 組 工 作 等 方 面 所 花 的 時 間, 預 期 約 為 84 小 時 82

93 指 定 課 本 周 萍 : 中 醫 學 基 本 常 識 及 針 炙 學, 安 徽 科 學 技 術 出 版 社,1985 年 版 參 考 書 劉 燕 池 : 中 醫 學 基 礎 概 論, 中 醫 古 籍 出 版 社,1986 年 版 向 敬 協 : 中 醫 辨 脈 症 治, 中 國 中 醫 藥 出 版 社,1998 年 版 史 方 奇 : 中 醫 優 生 長 壽 法, 科 學 技 術 文 獻 社,1988 年 版 黨 毅 : 中 醫 營 養 食 療 學, 科 學 出 版 社,1988 年 版 申 卻 驕 : 中 醫 營 養 學, 中 醫 古 籍 出 版 社,1988 年 版 張 發 榮 : 中 醫 學 基 礎, 四 川 科 學 技 術 出 版 社,1991 年 版 楊 力 : 中 國 運 氣 學, 北 京 科 學 技 術 出 版 社,1995 年 版 趙 存 娥 : 中 國 病 因 病 機 學, 科 學 出 版 社,2000 年 版 門 九 章 : 中 醫 學 導 論, 科 學 出 版 社,2001 年 版 李 以 義 : 中 醫 痰 病 的 現 代 研 究 與 治 療, 學 苑 出 版 社,2002 年 版 劉 興 仁 : 中 醫 學 基 礎 概 論, 學 苑 出 版 社,2008 年 版 黃 英 儒 : 跟 名 老 中 醫 學 舌 診, 化 學 工 業 出 版 社,2009 年 版 孫 光 榮 : 當 代 名 老 中 醫 典 型 醫 案 集, 人 民 衛 生 出 版 社,2009 年 版 83

94 CCN1013 Freshman Seminar Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of mass seminars / lectures 14 hours of small-group seminars / workshops Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject aims to engage students to develop solid foundation of skills, knowledge and necessary attitudes to adapt themselves successfully in their tertiary education. It facilitates students to become self-regulated, independently discovering and deep-understanding learners. This subject focuses on fostering students problem-solving skills, sense of entrepreneurship and global outlook through studentcentred activities, guest talks and disciplinary-based projects. The subject also introduces students to their chosen disciplines and allows them to cultivate commitments to social responsibility and a spirit of life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: explain and demonstrate initial mastery of the skills and knowledge conducive to effective tertiary level learning describe the general characteristics and up-to-date development of the discipline chosen, including its relationship with globalisation articulate the importance of entrepreneurship and the attributes of an entrepreneurial approach to work and life in general identify fundamental approaches to problem solving and demonstrate some problem solving capabilities and creativity in a small scale project Indicative Contents Tertiary Level Learning Independent, self-regulated and autonomous learning; Shallow understanding vs. deep understanding; Learning styles; Learning cycle; Taxonomy on levels of learning; Outcome-based education and criteria-referenced assessment; Learning in campus: curricular and co-curricular resources; Time management and study skills; Life-long learning. The Discipline of Study Academic disciplines and sub-disciplines within the broad discipline; Range and clusters of subjects; Applied fields of practice; Discipline boundary; Inter-disciplinary and cross-disciplinary studies; Industries and job opportunities; Career trend and development; Normative and ethical considerations; Issues in contemporary development in the local and global context. Entrepreneurship Enterprising work style, personality and mindset; Situation analysis and opportunities; Risk-taking 84

95 attitudes and competencies, Professionalism and ethical issues; Crisis and contingency; Ownership culture and leadership; Intrapreneurhsip; Interpersonal communication; Life career perspective. Problem-solving skills Problem solving techniques; Creative problem solving process; elementary project management techniques. Teaching/Learning Approach Students will be divided into classes according to their broad disciplines. They are expected to take an active part in the learning process. Mass seminars and lectures will be done by subject teachers and guest lecturers/speakers from higher education and industries, covering topics on tertiary level learning, discipline-related knowledge including up-to date development, and entrepreneurship in discipline-related context. Audio-visual input and class exercises will be built-in means to help students to integrate and apply the concepts and ideas. In small group seminars and workshops, various activities such as case discussion, group exercises, simulated games, role playing and presentations will be used. They provide students with opportunities to deepen their understanding of the knowledge and ideas gained in mass seminars and lectures, and to apply them in real life situations relating to discipline-related development and learning in tertiary education institutions. To facilitate optimal involvement of guest lecturers/speakers, the subject may be timetabled not as the common semester-based way, but instead may cover both semesters of the year. Assessment Approach Continuous assessment is adopted in this subject. Students are requested to hand in their learning journals regularly and to do presentations or discussions on selected topics. Each student will complete a project on understanding and analysing a selected issue in discipline-related development, in which he or she demonstrates own knowledge of discipline chosen and sense of entrepreneurship, as well as own capacity of tertiary level learning, problem solving and global outlook. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Indicative Readings Reference On discipline-related knowledge Various pieces of readings about the general basic knowledge and up-to-date development of the discipline chosen. On learning in tertiary education Baldwin, Amy (2012) The First-Generation College Experience, Prentice Hall. Carter, Carol, Joyce Bishop and Sarah Kravits (2012) Keys to Success: Building Analytical, Creative, and Practical Skills, 7 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 85

96 Carter, Carol, Joyce Bishop, Judy Block and Sarah Kravits (2008) Keys to Effective Learning: Developing Powerful Habits of Mind, Prentice Hall. Pintrich, Paul R. (2008) Learning to Learn: The Skill and Will College Success, 2 nd Ed., Prentice Hall. Staley, Constance, C. (2011) Focus on College Success, Cengage Learning. 李 逆 熵 : 格 物 致 知 : 思 考 與 研 究 方 法 概 要, 經 濟 日 報 出 版 社,2009 年 版 On entrepreneurship Blonchek, Robert M. and O Neill, Martin F. (1999) Act Like An Owner: Building An Ownership Culture, John Wiley. Brooks, Arthur C. (2009) Social Entrepreneurship: A Modern Approach to Social Value Creation, Prentice Hall. Bygrave, William D. and Zacharakis, Andrew (2011) Entrepreneurship, 2 nd Ed., Wiley. Humphrey, Doris (2002) Quick Skills: Skills for Entrepreneurs, 1 st Ed., Engage Learning. Timmons, Jeffry A. and Spinelli, Stephen (2009) New Venture Creation: Entrepreneurship for the 21 st Century, 8 th Ed., McGraw Hill Education. On problem solving and global outlook Bucher, Richard, D. (2010) Diversity Consciousness: Opening Our Minds to People, Cultures and Opportunities, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. James M. Higgins (2006) 101 Creative Problem Solving Techniques: The Handbook of New Ideas for Business, New Management Pub. Co. Michael J. Kirton (2003) Adaption-Innovation: in the Context of Diversity and Change, Routledge. Daniel D. Matthews (2011) The A3 Workbook: Unlock Your Problem-Solving Mind, Productivity Press. 柯 思 仁 : 超 越 疆 界 : 全 球 化, 現 代 性, 本 土 文 化, 八 方 文 化 創 作 室,2008 年 版 86

97 CCN1014 Fundamental Visualisation Skills Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 14 hours of lectures 28 hours of studio work / tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims The aim of this subject is to help students develop their communication skills via the visual expression of hand drawings or photo images by equipping them with the basic techniques necessary for visualising and capturing both figurative and conceptual objects. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: acquire the basic knowledge of visualisation skills experience basic visualisation skills through hand drawing and digital photo taking achieve creativity through practice of different visualisation mediums represent realised and imaginative images in effective ways incorporate with visualisation skills on different means of communication Indicative Contents Introduction to visualisation skills Hand drawing and digital photo taking techniques; Building narrative concepts by using visualisation skills. Introduction to sketching Figurative objects representation through observation; Conceptual representation through imagination; 3-dimentional representation by light and shadow; Basic colour theory and mediums of drawing. Introduction to digital photo taking Basic knowledge of photographic technology and equipment; Expressing affective and narrative concepts through photo images; Recording practical scenarios by photo taking. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will emphasise the concepts and applications of the principles and key issues, using an interactive approach. Practical studio work such as life drawing and material exploration as well as outdoor sketching will be emphasised. 87

98 Assessment Approach 100% continuous assessment will be used in this subject. Students will be required to demonstrate visually progressive development and evaluate ideas through an intensive research study and through prototype making and testing. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, studio work and tutorials. Indicative Readings References Hutton-Jamieson, I. (1987) Coloured Pencil Drawing Techniques: 22 Coloured Pencil Projects, Illustrated Step-by-Step with Advice on Materials and Techniques, Studio Vista. Koenig, P. A. (2005) Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design Professionals, 2 nd Pearson/Prentice Hall. Ed., Shadrin, R. L. (1992) Design & Drawing: An Applied Approach, Davis Publications. Simpson, I. (2009) Drawing: Seeing and Observation, 3 rd Ed., A&C Black Publishers, Ltd. Wallschlaeger, C. (1992) Basic Visual Concepts and Principles for Artists, Architects, and Designers, Wm. C. Brown Publishers. Folts, J. A. (2005) Handbook of Photography, 6 th Ed., Delmar Thomson Learning. Ciaglia, J. (2006) Introduction to Digital Photography, 2 nd Ed., Prentice Hall. Langford, M. J. (2007) Langford's Basic Photography: The Guide for Serious Photographers, 8th Ed., Focal Press/Elsvier. White, R. (2007) How Digital Photography Works (How It Works), 2 nd Ed., Que. 88

99 CCN1015 Healthy Living and Common Health Problems Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English, supplemented with Chinese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills necessary for the understanding of the basic management of common health problems in Hong Kong and/or other developed countries. It increases students awareness and concepts of health promotion. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the common health problems in Hong Kong acquire the skills in finding updated information of health problems explain the concepts of management and care related to the common health problems apply the knowledge to lead a healthy living show analytical, critical thinking, and problem-solving skills Indicative Contents An Overview of Common Health Problems Based on Local Health Statistics The health indicators; Ten leading causes of death; Notifiable infectious diseases; Health reports. Fundamental Knowledge of Common Health Diseases/Problems Definition; Incidence; Risk factor; Etiology; Clinical feature; Investigation; Treatment; Common health diseases or problems: Neoplastic disorders Cardiovascular disorders Respiratory disorders Cerebrovascular disorders Gastrointestinal disorders Endocrine disorders Concepts of Care Management in Common Health Diseases/Problems Principles of care in identified common health diseases/problems. Health Promotion and Prevention Preventive measures related to the identified common health diseases/problems; Implementation of a healthy lifestyle. 89

100 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of common health problems, and the technique of searching updated information. Group discussions and activities might be arranged to stimulate students awareness of health problem prevention and healthy living. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to further explore the applications of the knowledge taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group projects and presentations, literature reviews, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Black, J. M. et al. (2001) Medical-surgical Nursing: Clinical Management for Positive Outcomes, 6 th Ed., Philadelphia: W.B. Saunder Company. References Ellis, J. R. and Hartley, C. L. (2000) Managing and Coordinating Nursing Care, Lippincott Williams and Wilkins. Kenworthy, N. et al. (2002) Common Foundation Studies in Nursing, Churchill Livingstone. Zelman, M. et al. (2010) Human Diseases--A Systemic Approach, 7 th Ed., Pearson Education Ltd. 90

101 CCN1016 Introduction to Internet Technology Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims to introduce the basic concepts and essential knowledge of the applications and technology of the Internet and World Wide Web. It provides a conceptual framework to understand the operation of the Internet and to understand how computers connect and communicate with each other. This subject also helps to develop students analytical ability on network technology. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic concepts and applications of the Internet and World Wide Web apply relevant Internet knowledge to enhance their understanding of other networking situations use current Internet Technology necessary for daily life application Indicative Contents Fundamentals of World Wide Web Internet basics; Client/server model; Browsers; Searching the Web; Web graphics; Multimedia; Basic HTML; Web programming tools; Web applications; Web 2.0. Internetworking Technology Concepts on internetworking; Network hardware; Transmission basics and media; Network architectures and topologies; OSI model; TCP/IP model; Protocols and standards; TCP, UDP and IP; IP addresses; MAC addresses; Routing; Domain name system. Internet Applications Client-server interactions; Electronic mail; Telnet; FTP; Electronic publishing, Electronic fund transfer; Electronic data interchange; Internet service providers; Application service providers; Internet applications and services in Hong Kong. Internet Security Privacy and security issues; Security risks and measures; Firewall; Virtual Private Network. 91

102 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key Internet concepts and theories, with specific reference made to the latest Internet Technology wherever appropriate. Simple exercises and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests of the subject. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of different network configurations. Activities in tutorials will normally include hands-on exercises and program writing with various web programming techniques. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignment(s), project(s), test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their analytical skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Dean, T. (2010) Network+ Guide to Networks, 5 th Ed., Cengage Learning. References Andrews, J., Beck, W. (2005) i-net+ Guide to Internet, 3 rd Ed., Cengage Learning. Comer, D. E. (2009) Computer Networks and Internets, 5 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Deitel, P. J., Deitel, H. M., Deitel, A. (2012) Internet & World Wide Web: How to Program, 5 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Sebesta, R. W. (2011) Programming the World Wide Web, 6 th Ed., Addison-Wesley. 92

103 CCN1017 Introduction to Psychology Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CCN2039 Fundamental Psychology for Health Studies Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject introduces different fundamental psychological theories which help explain the human mind and behaviour with a unified theme of academic psychology. Through applying the knowledge and different psychological perspectives to daily situations, students can better understand themselves and others, and thus facilitate their personal development. The subject also helps students build up positive social relationship, and develop critical thinking for their life-long learning. Furthermore, the subject serves as a foundation course that provides the necessary knowledge for students further pursuit in Psychology. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: distinguish the differences between popular psychology and academic psychology understand the use of scientific reasoning in the study of psychology understand the fundamentals of psychological theories explain phenomena in daily lives with the use of psychological concepts and theories Indicative Contents History and Development of Psychology as a Science Scope of psychology; History of psychology; Value and contributions of psychology to human life; Concept of scientific reasoning; Steps in conducting research in psychology. Research Methodologies Experimental method; Non-experimental methods; Survey; Case study; Observation; Correlation; Bias; sampling; Limitation of each method. Biological Foundations of Psychology Brain structure and function; Genes and behaviour. Emotion and Motivation Components of emotions; Psychological and physiological aspects of emotions; Universality of emotions; Theories of motivation: drives, incentive and hierarchy of needs. 93

104 Sensation and Perception Sensory modalities and processes; Principles of perceptual process. Learning Classical conditioning; Operant conditioning; Social and cognitive approaches to learning; Limitations and applications of each theory. Memory and Cognition Attention; Memory and its processes; Application of theories to improve memory; Organisation of long-term memory: schema; Mechanisms of forgetting. Perspectives of Human Development Cognitive development; Social and personality development; Emotional development; Moral development. Social Behaviour Social perception; Attitudes and behaviour; Attribution; Obedience and Conformity; Interpersonal attraction; Group influence. Key Issues of Mental Health, Stress and Coping Defining abnormality; Disorders and their types according to DSM classification; Source and effects of stress on psychological functioning and physical health; Coping with and managing stress. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will explain key concepts and theories with the aid of learning and teaching activities that have been prepared and provided on the Web in order to encourage students active participation during contact hours. Such activities will include self-assessment, class exercises, small group discussion topics, role-play and case demonstration. Moreover, audio-visual materials will also be used to facilitate learning during lecture. Tutorials will help students to deepen their understanding of psychological concepts learnt in lectures and to apply them in daily situations. Assessment Approach Students will be assessed on all the materials presented in lectures, specified chapters in the text book, plus video shows and demonstrations in tutorials. In addition to the final examination, assessment also includes mid-term test(s), individual assignment(s) and group project(s). The assessments are designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). 94

105 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Weiten, W. (2011) Psychology: Themes & Variation, 8 th Ed., Wadsworth Cengage Learning. References Coon, D., Mitterer, J. O. (2011) Psychology: A Journey, 4 th Ed., Wadsworth. Feist, G. J., Rosenberg, E. L. (2010) Psychology: Making Connections, McGraw Hill Higher Education. Gerrig, R. J., Zimbardo, P. G. (2008) Psychology and Life, 8 th Ed., Pearson Education, Inc. King, L. A. (2008) The Science of Psychology: An Appreciative View, McGraw Hill Higher Education. 95

106 CCN1018 Introduction to Sociology Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English, supplemented by Chinese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to systematically enhance students understanding of human social life, groups and societies from both the micro and macro sociological perspectives. It equips them with a critical mind and a humanistic attitude to observing, interpreting and articulating unique human actions and emerging social issues, and enables them to appreciate the importance of cultural diversity and social equality in the changing human world. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic concepts and theories in sociology apply from both the micro and macro perspectives to examining substantive social issues and analysing the dynamic among the social institution, individual action and social change demonstrate awareness and understanding of diverse and emerging social phenomena in both the local and global contexts Indicative Contents Sociology and Sociological Perspectives Sociological imagination; Research methods; Conflict approaches; Functionalism; Action theory. Culture, Socialisation and Social Relations Inter-cultural and intra-cultural variations; Agents of socialisation; Gender socialisation and inequality; Crime, sub-culture and deviance. Social Stratification and Capitalism Class structure and mobility; Class inequality and poverty; Interaction between class, gender and race; Education and social stratification; Professionalisation. Social Institution Power and politics; Bureaucracy and rationalisation; Total institution; Inequality and segregation. Social Change and Economic Development From agricultural to industrial and post-industrial societies; Theories of social change and economic development; Globalisation and the information society. 96

107 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will strongly emphasise active interaction between students and lecturers. They will be delivered, whenever necessary, with the aid of audio-visual materials to strengthen students awareness and discussion of current social issues. Seminars will be conducted in the form of group discussion and activity. Students will be divided into small groups to conduct presentations of assigned topics. They are expected to discuss their foci of presentation, conduct small scale first-hand enquiry, generate analysis from a range of data, apply relevant sociological theories and concepts to articulate social issues, and also facilitate group discussion. Assessment Approach Besides tests and an examination that assess students understanding and application of sociological concepts and theories, guided presentations and self-directed case studies will be used to examine students innovation, analytical ability and communication skills in conducting and presenting sociological analysis of substantive social issues. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Henslin, J. M. (2011) Essentials of Sociology: A Down-To-Earth Approach, Pearson/Allyn and Bacon. Macionis, J. J. and Plummer, K. (2008) Sociology: A Global Introduction, Prentice Hall. References Abbott, P. and Wallace, C. (2005) Introduction to Sociology: Feminist Perspectives, Routledge. Bauman, Z. (2001) Thinking Sociologically, Blackwell. Newman, D. M. and O Brien, J. (2010) Sociology: Exploring the Architecture of Everyday Life, Pine Forge Press. Taylor, S. (2000) Sociology: Issues and Debate, Palgrave. Tepperman, L. and Blain, J. (2006) Think Twice: Sociology Looks at Current Social Issues, Prentice Hall. 97

108 CCN1019 Japanese I Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction Japanese, supplemented with English and/or Cantonese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Ability to understand, read and write Chinese characters ( 漢 字 ) Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This course aims to introduce students to the basics of Japanese pronunciation, different writing systems, vocabulary, sentence structure and grammar, simple conversations, while stimulating their interests in both the Japanese language and Japanese culture. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: pronounce the Japanese sounds correctly read and write Japanese characters (Hiragana, Kanji and Rōmaji) and recognise Katakana develop a vocabulary repertoire of about 500 words (including Kanji, commonly used expressions and phrases) acquire a basic knowledge of the characteristics and grammar of the Japanese language understand and engage in simple conversations on everyday matters develop a preliminary interest in Japanese culture Indicative Contents Phonetic Systems All vowels and consonants, syllables, pitch accent, intonation. Writing Systems Various writing systems (Rōmaji, Hiragana, Kanji). Vocabulary / Reading / Writing Simple vocabulary (e.g. daily greetings, simple counting, numbers, currency, times and dates); Reading simple dialogues and short passages; Writing simple sentences. Grammar Simple verbs (present/past tense; affirmative/negative form), basic particles. Speaking / Listening Simple daily conversations (e.g. introducing oneself and others, giving a gift to someone, simple requests and invitation). 98

109 Culture / Society Selected topics on Japanese culture and society. Teaching/Learning Approach This foundation course, designed for students with no previous knowledge of the language, will focus on enabling students to master the Japanese sounds and writing systems. Through direct drills, practices and activities in class, students will participate actively in the learning process. A multimedia approach will be adopted whereby students will be exposed to audio and visual materials to enhance their understanding of the Japanese language and Japanese culture. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including written assignments, group projects, written reports, quizzes, tests and examination(s) designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject s intended learning outcomes as well as their communication skills in the Japanese language. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for quizzes, projects, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 : 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I ( みんなの 日 本 語 ), 大 新 書 局,2011 年 版 References 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 : 日 語 假 名 習 字 簿, 向 日 葵 出 版 社,2010 年 版 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 : 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 ( 讀 本 篇 ), 大 新 書 局,2010 年 版 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 : 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 句 型 練 習 冊 ), 大 新 書 局,2011 年 版 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 : 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 練 習 C 会 話 イラストシート ), 大 新 書 局,2007 年 版 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 : 日 本 語 90 日 1 (90 Days of Japanese Language 1), 向 日 葵 出 版 社,2010 年 版 99

110 CCN1020 Leadership and Intra-personal Development Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures and seminars 14 hours of tutorials and skills workshops Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CCN1022 Personal Growth and Development Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject aims to provide basic concepts of leadership and the essential skills required to become an effective leader. It enables students to know the leadership roles in a team and develop a sense of mindfulness toward others perspectives in working with teammates. The students are provided the opportunities to understand their personal traits, values and characteristics as a foundation for leadership development; as well as areas which require improvement. It also intends to train students to reflect on their intra-personal qualities. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: acquire effective leadership concepts and skills identify interpersonal skills needed for leadership articulate and reflect from a systemic perspective of their personal traits, values and characteristics to enhance self-awareness identify and expand their capacity of development develop self-reflection skills in their lives develop a personal development plan and a confident self-identity Indicative Contents Leadership Concepts Concepts of leadership; Changing nature of leadership; New way of understanding leadership; Leadership integrity. Understanding Oneself Self-awareness: personal traits and characteristics; Values dilemma and their resolutions; Life-career values; Personal strengths and weaknesses. Understanding Others and Interaction in Teams Diversity consciousness; Team dynamics and team building; Roles of self-understanding in effective leadership and roles of the leader in a team; Competencies on giving and receiving feedback; Ability to build up positive human relationship. 100

111 Personal Development Present personal actions and the directions; Target areas for personal development; Realistic goals and sense of direction for intra-personal development. Planning and Action Specific ways to fulfill personal development needs; Action plan/s for realistic personal development. Teaching/Learning Approach Students are expected to take an active part in the learning process. Learning environment will be engaging, challenging and fun. Lectures will be delivered to cover the conceptual parts of the subject. Class exercises and projects will be built-in as means to help students to integrate and apply the concepts gained. In tutorials and skills workshops, students will be grouped into small teams. Small group teaching will facilitate students participation and interaction. Various teaching and learning methods will be used such as role play, problem-based learning, simulation, and guest talks. Through experiential learning, students will be able to share their life experience to enhance their leadership and intra-personal development. Assessment Approach Continuous assessment will be adopted in this subject in order to give maximum space for students to put their ideas into practice. Students will be invited to hand in their portfolio regularly to show their reflection and personal leadership development throughout the learning in the subject. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and/or test(s). Indicative Readings Recommended References Adair, J. E. (2005) How to grow leadership: The Seven Key Principles of Effective Leadership Development, USA: Kogna Page. Corey, G., & Corey, M. S. (2010) I never knew I had a choice: Explorations in personal growth, Thomson. Northouse, P. G. (2009) Introduction to Leadership: Concepts and Practice, Sage Publishing. Susan, R. K., Nance, L. and Timothy, R. M. (1998) Exploring Leadership: for College Students Who Want to Make a Difference, Jossey-Bass. Weiss, D. H. (1999) The Self-management Workshop: Helping People Take Control of Their Lives and Their Work: A Trainer s Guide, New York American Management Association. 101

112 林 佩 璇 主 編, 陳 正 雄 編 著 : 掌 握 人 心 的 領 導 術 = Inspiring Leadership 國 家 出 版 社,2010 年 版 麥 克 斯 帝 普 雷 著 江 麗 美 譯 : 領 導 的 藝 術 經 濟 新 潮 社,2008 年 版 區 祥 江 著 : 生 命 軌 迹 : 助 人 成 長 的 十 大 關 鍵 突 破,2000 年 版 陳 寶 釗 著 : 創 出 積 極 人 生 NLP 應 用 手 冊 明 窗,2008 年 版 楊 小 雲 著 : 欣 賞 別 人 肯 定 自 己 健 行 文 化,1994 年 版 102

113 CCN1021 Personal Financial Planning Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims The primary focus of this course is to help students begin to plan for their own personal financial future. It explains the financial tools and techniques relating to their own financial needs. It helps prepare students to evaluate the alternatives they will be facing while making personal financial decisions. The subject also helps students develop the skills required to become an informed consumer of financial products. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the importance of personal financial planning develop personal financial statements and plans acquire the skill to look at, evaluate, and make decisions about financial alternatives and its relation to their financial needs describe the characteristics of various financial products, such as credit cards, consumer loans, insurance and investment products Indicative Contents Personal Financial Planning Financial planning process; Personal financial goals; Factors affecting financial decisions; Time value of money. Money Management Resources and choices; Financial statements; Budgeting; Checking and saving accounts; Risk assessment and strategies. Purchasing Decision Buying plans; Sources and benefit of credits; Consumer loans; Credit problems. Insurance Planning Life and health insurance; Property and liability insurance. Saving and Investing Saving and investment principles and strategies; Investment options. 103

114 Financial Future Retirement planning; Estate planning. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of financial planning processes and techniques supported by hypothetical and their own examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of importance of personal financial planning. Tutorials will provide students with opportunities to develop skills to prepare their own financial plans and evaluate the financial alternatives discussed in lectures. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations, discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Kapoor, J., Dlabay, L. and Hughes, R. J. (2012) Personal Finance, 10 th Ed., Mcgraw-Hill/Irwin. References Bajtelsmit, V. L. and Rastelli, L. G. (2008) Personal Finance, Wiley Pathways. Cheng, L., Leung, T. Y. and Wong, Y. H. (2009) Financial Planning & Wealth Management. An International Perspective, McGraw Hill. Gitman, L. J. and Joenk, M. D. (2011) Personal Financial Planning, 12 th Ed., Thomson South-Western. Ernst & Young, Nissenbaum, M., Raasch, B. J. and Ratner, C. L. (2004) Ernst & Young s Personal Financial Planning Guide, 5 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. 104

115 CCN1022 Personal Growth and Development Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials and skills workshops Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CCN1020 Leadership and Intra-personal Development CCN2037 Self Understanding and Communication Skills Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject aims to increase students self-understanding, to enhance their self-awareness, and to expand their capacity of self-management and development. It facilitates their understanding of personal characteristics and of themselves in relation to the social systems they have been brought up in. It also equips them with a positive mind set and a humanistic attitude to human actions. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: articulate and reflect from a systemic perspective upon their personal abilities, values, attitudes and life goals in order to enhance self-awareness identify their personal characteristics in relation to the social systems identify and expand their capacity of development acquire the essential tools of self-management develop a positive mind set and a humanistic attitude to human actions Indicative Contents Self-understanding Students growth in relation to their significant others and important events in life; Personal strengths and weaknesses; Self-acceptance. Self-awareness Awareness of oneself, of others and of reality; Awareness of prejudice and stereotyping; Perceiving life in a humanistic way. Values Clarification Formation of values; Values dilemma and their resolution; Impact of social system on life script. Self-management Emotional Quotient (EQ); Adversary Quotient (AQ); Capacity of coping with life crisis. Self-development Understanding the present personal actions and the direction that should be taken; Identifying target 105

116 areas and setting realistic goals for personal development; Internal locus of control: a sense of inner direction for personal development. Planning and action Identifying specific ways to fulfill personal needs and goals; Life-long learning; Life career perspective: formulating realistic study and career action plans. Teaching/Learning Approach Students will be expected to take an active part in the learning process. Lectures will cover the conceptual parts of the subject. Class exercises will be built in as means to help students to integrate and apply the concepts gained. In tutorials and skills workshops, students will be grouped into small teams. Small group teaching facilitates students participation and interaction. Various teaching and learning methods such as role play, problem-based learning, simulation, and guest talks will be used. Through experiential learning, students will be able to share their life experience in order to enhance their personal development. Assessment Approach Continuous assessment will be adopted in this subject in order to give maximum space for students to put their idea into practice. Students will be invited to hand in their portfolio regularly to show their reflection and/or development throughout the learning in the subject. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and/or test(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Corey, G. and Corey, M. S. (2010) I Never Knew I Had a Choice: Explorations in Personal Growth, 9 th Ed., Thomson. References Ford, L. (1997) Game Plan: A Guide for Improving Human Relations and Personal Adjustment, Prentice Hall. Johnson, D. W. (2009) Reaching Out: Interpersonal Effectiveness and Self-actualization, Allyn and Bacon. Leary, S. (1994) Activities for Personal Growth: A Comprehensive Handbook of Activities for Therapists, Maclennan & Petty. 106

117 Schiraldi, G. R. (2001) The Self-esteem Workbook, New Harbinger Pub. Stein, S. J. (2006) The EQ Edge: Emotional Intelligence and Your Success, Kogan Page. Weiss, D. H. (1999) The Self-management Workshop: Helping People Take Control of Their Lives and Their Work: A Trainer s Guide, New York American Management Association. 乙 武 洋 匡 著, 劉 子 倩 譯 : 五 體 不 滿 足, 圓 神,1999 年 版 莊 安 祺 譯 : 逆 境 商 數, 時 報 文 化,1997 年 版 區 祥 江 著 : 生 命 軌 迹 : 助 人 成 長 的 十 大 關 鍵, 突 破,2000 年 版 楊 小 雲 著 : 欣 賞 別 人 肯 定 自 己, 健 行 文 化,1994 年 版 107

118 CCN1023 Principles of Programming Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with the practical skills of computer programming in the context of problem solving. It provides students with an understanding of the structure of a high-level programming language, and of the design and analysis process of programming. It also provides students with some practical experiences of writing structured programs. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: write programs for solving practical problems in the business environment recognise the importance of documentation in software development further develop their analytical skills and problem solving skills in other areas enhance critical and creative thinking competence Indicative Contents Fundamentals of Programming Syntax; Semantics; Compilation; Linking; Execution; Introduction to programming approaches: functional programming, procedural programming, structural programming, object-oriented programming. Data Types String; Numerical data; Boolean; Operators; Literals. Input and Output Standard input/output; Files. Concepts and Technique of Control Sequencing; Selection; Repetition; Recursion. Practical Programming Programming in a selected high-level language e.g. C, C++ or Java. 108

119 Teaching/Learning Approach Theories and basic concepts will be delivered during lectures. In tutorials, students will be required to design and develop software solutions to practical problems by applying the general principles learned in lectures. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including programming projects, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess skills of writing programs to solve practical problems and of writing documentation. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Deitel, H. M. and Deitel, P. J. (2010) C++ How to Program, 7 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Liang, Y. D. (2008) Introduction to Java Programming, 7 th Ed., Prentice-Hall. References Charatan, Q. and Kans, A. (2009) Java in Two Semesters, 3 rd Ed., McGraw-Hill. Deitel, H. M. and Deitel, P. J. (2010) C: How to Program, 6 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Deitel, H. M. and Deitel, P. J. (2007) Java How to Program, 7 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Liang, Y. D. (2010) Introduction to Programming with C++, 2 nd Ed., Prentice-Hall. Savitch, W. (2006) Problem Solving with C++, 6 th Ed., Addison Wesley. Wu, T. C. (2008) A Comprehensive Introduction to Object-Oriented Programming with Java, McGraw- Hill. 109

120 CCN1024 大 專 普 通 話 Putonghua for College Students 程 度 1 學 分 3 教 學 語 言 普 通 話 學 習 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 60% 課 堂 習 作 40% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 科 目 旨 在 教 授 學 生 普 通 話 的 語 音 系 統 及 漢 語 拼 音 體 系 知 識, 鞏 固 他 們 對 普 通 話 語 音 的 認 識, 並 在 此 基 礎 上 增 強 學 生 對 普 通 話 和 粵 語 詞 彙 語 法 區 別 的 比 較 認 識, 從 而 使 他 們 能 夠 恰 當 準 確 流 利 地 在 日 常 生 活 中 運 用 規 範 普 通 話 進 行 交 際 科 目 統 籌 小 組 在 籌 備 講 授 及 評 核 本 課 程 時, 須 參 照 相 關 的 課 程 內 容 藍 圖, 了 解 本 科 目 的 角 色 定 位, 如 何 在 課 程 層 面 上 協 助 學 生 達 到 預 期 的 學 習 成 果 學 習 成 果 學 生 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 應 能 : 掌 握 整 套 漢 語 拼 音 系 統, 如 認 讀 聲 母 韻 母 聲 調 等, 同 時 加 強 對 普 通 話 語 音 特 點 如 輕 聲 兒 化 變 調 的 認 識, 從 而 能 夠 恰 當 準 確 有 效 地 運 用 普 通 話 ; 看 拼 音 讀 寫 漢 語 辭 彙 和 句 子 ; 瞭 解 及 分 辨 普 通 話 和 粵 語 在 語 音 詞 彙 和 語 法 上 的 差 別, 並 有 能 力 把 日 常 粵 語 常 用 辭 彙 和 句 子 翻 譯 成 規 範 普 通 話 書 面 語 和 口 語 ; 掌 握 普 通 話 表 達 和 溝 通 技 巧 通 過 小 組 合 作 和 互 相 觀 摩 來 培 養 自 我 學 習 的 能 力 和 團 隊 合 作 精 神, 同 時 增 強 使 用 普 通 話 的 自 信 心 課 程 內 容 普 通 話 語 音 訓 練 普 通 話 聆 聽 及 辨 音 練 習 多 音 字 練 習 輕 聲 兒 化 變 調 的 發 音 訓 練 普 通 話 說 話 朗 讀 訓 練 漢 語 拼 音 系 統 教 授 整 套 漢 語 拼 音 系 統 漢 語 拼 音 聲 母 韻 母 聲 調 漢 語 拼 音 拼 寫 規 則 普 粵 對 比 及 翻 譯 普 粵 詞 彙 比 較 和 對 譯 普 粵 語 法 對 比 及 句 子 翻 譯 普 通 話 名 詞 量 詞 的 搭 配 會 話 訓 練 有 關 日 常 生 活 的 會 話 訓 練, 掌 握 如 自 我 介 紹 購 物 旅 行 用 膳 等 情 境 的 普 通 話 表 達 技 巧 110

121 教 學 方 法 主 講 課 主 要 由 講 師 為 學 生 講 解 課 文 中 的 語 音 辭 彙 和 語 法 現 象, 學 生 依 次 朗 讀 及 做 書 面 練 習, 講 師 會 使 用 多 媒 體 教 材 作 領 讀 及 聆 聽 訓 練 導 修 課 由 講 師 準 備 課 外 練 習, 包 括 書 面 練 習 和 口 語 訓 練, 學 生 可 分 小 組 或 個 人 進 行 ; 口 語 訓 練 會 以 角 色 扮 演 專 題 討 論 小 組 報 告 等 形 式 進 行 評 核 方 法 本 科 目 兼 用 持 續 評 估 及 綜 合 評 估 方 法 持 續 評 估 方 面, 學 生 須 完 成 個 人 口 語 評 估 會 話 評 估 及 期 中 測 驗, 具 體 的 評 估 方 式 如 下 : (i) 個 人 口 語 評 估 : 以 個 人 短 講 的 方 式 評 估 (ii) 會 話 評 估 : 學 員 分 為 三 至 四 人 一 組, 自 選 題 目, 編 寫 並 表 演 一 段 情 景 會 話 (iii) 期 中 測 驗 : 內 容 包 括 漢 語 拼 音 辨 音 ; 看 漢 語 拼 音 拼 寫 漢 語 詞 語 及 句 子 ; 粵 語 方 言 詞 語 短 句 與 普 通 話 的 對 譯 ; 普 通 話 多 音 字 ; 聽 力 測 驗 另 有 期 末 考 試, 評 估 方 式 包 括 口 試 和 筆 試, 綜 合 檢 測 學 生 掌 握 本 科 目 的 水 平 每 班 的 教 學 計 劃 (Teaching Plan) 詳 述 個 別 習 作 佔 整 體 評 核 的 實 際 比 重 學 生 收 到 習 作 或 持 續 評 核 成 績 時, 均 會 獲 告 知 習 作 所 評 核 的 是 那 些 預 期 學 習 成 果 學 生 所 需 的 努 力 除 了 42 小 時 的 課 堂 講 授 外, 學 生 還 須 要 練 習 短 講 會 話, 完 成 課 程 佈 置 的 各 種 習 作 報 告, 與 同 學 進 行 小 組 工 作, 協 作 完 成 會 話 評 估, 並 準 備 測 驗 及 考 試 預 期 學 生 在 課 堂 外 所 花 的 時 間 約 為 84 小 時 指 定 課 本 袁 振 華 曾 迎 周 文 駿 編 著 : 活 用 普 通 話, 中 華 書 局,2011 年 版 自 編 大 專 普 通 話 輔 助 教 材 參 考 書 中 國 社 會 科 學 院 語 言 研 究 所 詞 典 編 輯 室 編 : 現 代 漢 語 詞 典 第 五 版, 商 務 印 書 館,2005 年 版 國 家 語 言 文 字 工 作 委 員 會 普 通 話 培 訓 測 試 中 心 : 普 通 話 水 平 測 試 實 施 綱 要, 商 務 印 書 館, 2004 年 版 曾 子 凡 編 著 : 香 港 人 學 說 普 通 話, 三 聯 書 店 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,2009 年 版 曾 子 凡 編 著 : 廣 州 話 普 通 話 口 語 詞 對 譯 手 冊, 三 聯 書 店,2002 年 版 普 通 話 研 習 社 編 : 普 通 話 第 一 冊, 普 通 話 研 習 社,2001 年 版 111

122 李 明 石 佩 文 編 著 : 漢 語 普 通 話 語 音 辨 正, 北 京 語 言 文 化 大 學 出 版 社,1998 年 版 王 國 安 主 編, 張 少 雲 彭 增 安 著 : 普 通 話 發 音 基 本 功, 商 務 印 書 館,1999 年 版 112

123 CCN1025 The History and Culture of Hong Kong Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CCN2036 Hong Kong Society Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims at introducing students to the history and culture of Hong Kong. It also helps students to develop their analytical and critical thinking skills for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the development of Hong Kong from the 19 th to the 21 st century from a historical perspective trace the political, socio-economic and cultural change of Hong Kong in relations to China and the world apply relevant knowledge and concepts to the analysis of issues and problems in Hong Kong demonstrate the ability of independent judgment on present-day Hong Kong social values and cultural practices develop a lifelong interest in reading and studying Hong Kong Indicative Contents Introduction The geographical conditions of Hong Kong; The historical development of Hong Kong before the coming of the British. Beginning of Colonial Hong Kong, The cession of Hong Kong; The Taiping Rebellion; The 1911 Revolution. Emergence of the Hong Kong Problem, Boycotts and strikes in the 1910s and the 1920s; The Second World War. Crown Colony for Ever, Interaction between the new PRC government and Hong Kong; The riots in the 1960s; The administration of MacLehose. Towards the Joint Declaration, Sino-British negotiations on the future of Hong Kong; Reactions in Hong Kong regarding the negotiations. 113

124 Hong Kong in Transition, Crisis of confidence; Democratic debates; The Tian anmen Massacre. End of Cooperation and a new era, 1992 post-1997 The interplay between Britain, China and Hong Kong before the handover; The HKSAR government. Case studies of cultural topics The roles of women in Hong Kong; Gender issues in Hong Kong; popular culture; Film culture. Teaching/Learning Approach An interactive approach will be adopted: students will be required to actively participate in discussions and presentations. Audio and visual materials will also be used to enhance students understanding of the teaching contents. Students will be divided into groups to present a topic on the history and/or culture of Hong Kong. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, such as case studies, written reports, individual assignments, presentations, tests and an examination designed to assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Carroll, J. M. (2007) A Concise History of Hong Kong, Rowman & Littlefield Publishers, Inc. Tsang, Steve. (2004) A Modern History of Hong Kong: , London: I. B. Tauris. References Chan, L. K. C. (1990) China, Britain, and Hong Kong: , The Chinese University Press. Faure, D. (Ed.). (2003) Hong Kong: A Reader in Social History, Oxford University Press. Smith, C. T. (1995) A Sense of History. Studies in the Social and Urban History of Hong Kong, Hong Kong Educational Publishing Co. 王 賡 武 主 編 : 香 港 史 新 編 上 下 冊, 三 聯 書 店 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,1997 年 版 蔡 榮 芳 : 香 港 人 之 香 港 史, 牛 津 大 學 出 版 社,2001 年 版 114

125 CCN1026 Themes of Art Appreciation Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips learners with proper and relevant analytical tools and cultural knowledge for interpreting, analysing and appreciating artworks with critical and cultural awareness of their creative metamorphosis structured in themes pertinent to the development of western and eastern art genres. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: interpret artworks with critical and cultural awareness understand the creative process of major artworks appreciate, analyse and criticise artworks & performances apply relevant concepts, principles and terminology to artworks Indicative Contents Art Analysis Color; Form; Shape; Materials; perspective; Spatial orientation and theme adopted in the creative process of an art piece and the foundation of art stream. Art Genres Painting; Sculpture; Pastiche; Collage; Installation; Public Art; Photography; Propaganda Art; Multimedia and digital art; Performing Art. Art Themes Religion; Humanity; Gender; Social Class; Reality; Society; Representation; Symbolism and allegory; individuality and collectivity. Art Streams and Art Schools Modernity and Modernism; Anti-realism and Dehumanisation; Impressionism and Postimpressionism; Expressionism and Avant-Gardism; Kitsch and Consumerism; Pop Art; Antiaesthetics; Postmodernism; Postcolonialism. 115

126 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be grounded in the explication of art concepts and theories and their relevant cultural knowledge contextualised by selected art works. Museum and gallery visits, if appropriate, will be arranged to supplement school teaching. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to learn and apply analytic concepts and interpretive tools for the discussion, understanding and appreciation of artworks and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools, including written reports, test and examination, will be adopted to develop and assess students achievement of the subject s intended learning outcomes as well as the depth of art analysis and art appreciation. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Aumont, J. et. al. (1992) Aesthetics of Film, Texas University Press. Barnet, S. (2010) A Short Guide to Writing about Art, 10 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Berger, J. (1996) Ways of Seeing, Penguin. Eldridge, R. (2003) An Introduction to the Philosophy of Art, Cambridge University Press. Gombrich, E. H. (1996) The Essential Gombrich: Selected Writings on Art & Culture, Phaidon. Lucie-Smith, E. (1992) Art & Civilisation, Lawrence King. Margolis, J. (Ed.). (1987) Philosophy Looks at the Arts: Contemporary Readings in Aesthetics, Temple University Press. Schapiro, M. (1999) Worldview in Painting - Art & Society, Braziller. 李 澤 厚 : 華 夏 美 學, 商 務 印 書 館 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,2010 年 版 孔 智 光 : 中 西 古 典 美 學 硏 究, 中 華 書 局,2009 年 版 116

127 CCN1101 Fundamentals of Human Resources Management Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides students with introductory theories and practices of human resources management in organisations. It equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of the functions of human resources management. This subject also provides a foundation for students who intend to specialise in the field of human resources management. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise the basic roles of staffing in supporting overall organisational strategy understand the introductory theories and practices of training and development in human resources management appreciate the importance of maintaining high employee performance in organisations identify the main features of labour-management environments at fundamental level analyse the human resources issues and recommend appropriate solutions at organisational level apply relevant elementary human resources knowledge to enhance their understanding of other business subjects Indicative Contents Human Resources Planning Understanding the underlying linkage between organisational strategy and human resource planning; Describing the processes of HR planning; Defining the job analysis. Recruitment and Selection Defining the recruiting goals; Discussing various sources of recruiting; Describing the selection processes; Selection tests and interviews; The importance of equal opportunities in recruitment and selection; Evaluating the effectiveness of recruitment and selection processes. Compensation and Benefits Identifying various types of employee rewards; Understanding job evaluation; Describing various compensation programs; Discussing the market practices on employee benefits. 117

128 Training and Development Describing the methods used for employee training and development; Evaluating the effectiveness of training and development; Purposes of new employee orientation and socialisation; Managing careers. Performance Appraisal Identifying the processes and methods of evaluating employee performance; Describing factors distorting performance appraisal; Describing effective performance management systems. Employment Relations Understanding labour unions and collective bargaining; Mechanisms for the resolution of industrial conflicts. Legal Context of Human Resources Management in Hong Kong Application of the Hong Kong Employment Ordinance at the beginning level; Legally required benefits in Hong Kong. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of concepts. Further reading may also be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complex human resources management theories. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions, exercises and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Decenzo, D. A. and Robbins, S. P. (2010) Fundamentals of human resource management, 10 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 118

129 References Chan, A. W., Mak, W. M., and Bannister, B. J. (2002) Managing human resources in Hong Kong, 3 rd Ed., Sweet & Maxwell Asia. Dessler, G. (2011) Human resource management, 12 th Ed., Prentice-Hall. Ivancevich, J. M. (2010) Human resource management, 11 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Useful Websites (Equal Opportunities Commission) (Hong Kong Institute of Human Resource Management) (Hong Kong Labour Department) (Hong Kong Labour Legislation) (Office of the Privacy Commissioner for Personal Data) 119

130 CCN1102 Hotel Operations Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides students with a holistic view about hotel industry. It provides introductory knowledge of major departments in a hotel, both operational and administrative. It highlights the situation of Hong Kong hotel industry with current issues. It also analyses the responsibilities and duties of each department and their inter-relationships. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe different types of hotel business and various types of hotel operations identify the respective responsibilities of different departments and their inter-relationships understand the types of services, facilities and amenities provided by hotels explain the inter-relationship among service, customers and staff of hotels appraise the target markets and target customers of hotels Indicative Contents An Overview of the Hotel Industry International hotel classification systems; Hong Kong Tourism Board hotel classification system; Relationship among hotels; hospitality and tourism industries; Organisational structure of a hotel; Characteristics of different types of hotel business. Hotel Customers Business and leisure tourists; Free independent travellers and group travellers; Needs for accommodation; Needs for food and beverages; Needs for entertainment; Needs for recreation; Needs for meetings, incentives, conventions and exhibitions (MICE). Major Departments and Functions Executive Office; Front Office Department; Concierge Department; Guest Relations Department; Service Centre Department; Business Centre Department; Housekeeping Department; Food and Beverage Department; Sales and Marketing Department; Events Management Department; Human Resources Department; Accounting and Finance Department; Engineering Department; Security Department. 120

131 Current Issues and Trends in the Hotel Business Green issues; Conservation and preservation of energy; Internet and technology applications; Future trends of hospitality industry. Teaching/Learning Approach Concepts will be delivered through lectures supplemented with discussions of case studies in tutorials. Hotel visits will be arranged to familiarise students with practical and realistic hotel environment in order to enhance their understanding of hotel and hospitality industries as well as of the future development. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations, case studies, group discussion, post-hotel-visit debriefing, test(s) and an examination designed in order to develop students understanding of hotel and hospitality industries. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, subject-related activities, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Walker, J. R. (2009) Introduction to hospitality, 5 th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall. References Barrows, C. W. and Powers, T. (2009) Introduction to management in the hospitality industry, 9 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. Chon, K. S. and Maier, T. A. (2010) Welcome to hospitality: An introduction, 3 rd Ed., Delmar Cengage Learning. Hayes, D. K. and Ninemeier, J. D. (2007) Hotel operations management, 2 nd Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall. 121

132 CCN1103 Introduction to Tourism Level 1 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to provide an introduction to the fundamental principles and scope of the tourism industry. It offers students an overview of the structure, organisation and interdependence of various sectors of the industry. It also provides a framework for students to apply the theories and practice of the field of tourism industry in Hong Kong. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the historical background and the development of the tourism industry recognise the variety of types and functions of tourism organisations and travel operations articulate the different travel segments and their roles in travel understand the significance role of travel intermediaries and their functions in the distribution system describe the economic, social, cultural and environmental impacts of tourism Indicative Contents Introduction and Perspectives Nature and concept of travel and tourism; History development of tourism; Structure and components of tourism. Tourism Suppliers Accommodation; Transportation; Destination; Attractions; Entertainment; and other related facilities. Tourism Organisations and Travel Intermediaries International, regional and local Tourism Organisations; Distribution channels; Tour operators and travel agents. Impacts of Tourism Economic, environmental, socio-cultural benefits and costs that result from tourism. Destination Marketing and Development Government involvement in tourism; Roles of Hong Kong Tourism Board; Tourism data and research. 122

133 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key tourism concepts, with specific reference to current tourism issues. Occasional group discussions will be conducted. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories taught. Activities in tutorials will include student presentations, discussions, and case studies. Various talks by industry experts, field trips or familiarisation tours will be organised to enhance students understanding in the real-life situations of tourism in Hong Kong. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination which are designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and presentation skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Goeldner, C. R. and Ritchie, J. R. B. (2009) Tourism: Principles, practices, philosophies, 7 th Ed., Wiley. Mancini, M. (2005) Access: Introduction to travel and tourism, 1 st Ed., Delmar, Cengage Learning. References Beech, J. and Chadwick, S. (2006) The business of tourism management, 1 st Ed., Prentice Hall. Cooper, C. and Fietcher, J. (2005) Tourism: Principles and practice, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. Holloway, J. C. (2006) The business of tourism, 7 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Cook, R. A., Yale, L. J. and Marqua, J. J. (2006) Tourism: The business of travel, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. 123

134 CCN2001 Introduction to Chinese Political and Legal System Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English, supplemented with Chinese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of developments and characteristics of China s political and legal system from the Chinese perspective and the Western perspective. It provides the fundamental conceptual framework for analysing selected issues and challenges to business decision involving the Chinese government. This subject also helps students develop critical thinking skills for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the developments of various political ideologies and its impact to contemporary China understand the current political structure and leadership appreciate the complexity of the Chinese policy making and judicial process apply relevant knowledge to enhance understanding of the business scenarios in China Indicative Contents Part 1: The Chinese Political System Chinese Political Ideology Confucianism; Marxism-Leninism; Mao Zedong Thought; and Deng Xiaoping Theory. Political Leadership Generations of political leaders, succession and recruitment. Party and Government Party and government structure; Central and regions. Chinese political culture Human right; Freedom of speech; Democracy. Part 2: The Chinese Legal System Legal Principles Rule of law against rule by law and rule by man. 124

135 Party and Judicial System Court system; Trial system; Judge and prosecution system. Legal Environment of Business Advertising laws, Patent law; Labour law; Anti-monopoly law. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the concepts, basic facts and updates on latest developments of the marketing environment and marketing mix practices. Activities such us video clips, guest speakers and company visits may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some issues. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include group discussion, debates and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook This is a wide and dynamic topic involving mainly current issues which are volatile, so a specific textbook which can easily get outdated is not recommended. References Kuhn, R. L. (2009) How China s Leaders Think: The Inside Story of China s Reform and What This Means for the Future, John Wiley Sons. McGregor, R. (2010) The Party: The Secret World of China s Communist Rulers, Harper Collins. Wasserstrom, J. (2010) China in the 21st Century: What Everyone Needs to Know, Oxford University Press. 許 知 遠 : 未 成 熟 的 國 家 : 變 革 中 的 百 年 中 國, 八 旗 文 化,2010 年 版 125

136 趙 紫 陽 : 國 家 的 囚 徒 : 趙 紫 陽 的 祕 密 錄 音, 時 報 出 版,2009 年 版 李 曉 蓉 張 祖 樺 : 零 八 憲 章, 開 放 雜 誌 社,2009 年 版 E references China Internet Information Centre "China s Judiciary." China Internet Information Centre "The National People s Congress." On-line Resources South China Morning Post, a Hong Kong newspaper. People s Daily, the official newspaper of the CCP. China Internet Information Centre Sina China News Digest Asia Wall Street Journal Financial Times The Economist Google News on China Asia Source China Radio International CNN Asia BBC Asia-Pacific New York Times - Asia Pacific news China Top News Carter Centre -China Village Elections Project Embassy of the People s Republic of China, in Washington D.C. Embassy of the United States of America, in Beijing. 126

137 CCN2002 Introduction to Economics Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CCN1042 Economics and Society (for Non-Business Students) Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject enables students to do simple analysis of business situations by applying conceptual frameworks drawn from Economics, and identify and analyze the means by which value is created in goods and services and delivered to the end-users. It also identifies and analyzes those aspects of the local and global business environment that affect the business decisions made by the business organisations. The subject also helps students develop critical thinking skills which are useful for lifelong learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the issues involved in the allocation of scarce resources for individual economic agents and the economy as a whole apply relevant economic knowledge to conduct economic analysis of the behaviour of firms and markets, and the effectiveness of government economic policy evaluate the issues relating to macroeconomics and analyze their impacts on an economy apply relevant economic knowledge to enhance their understanding of other business subjects Indicative Contents Scope of Microeconomic Analysis Scarcity, choice and opportunity cost; Nature of economic science; Relation with other subject disciplines; Cost and benefit analysis. Demand, Supply and the Price Mechanism The law of demand; Elasticity of demand; The law of supply; Functions of price and the market system; Market Intervention, including price control and taxation. Production and Costs Definition of short run and long run; Law of diminishing marginal returns; Cost of production; Economies and diseconomies of scale. 127

138 Market Structure Perfect competition and imperfect competition (monopolistic competition, oligopoly and monopoly); Definition of market; General features of different market structure; Profit maximisation; Sources of monopoly power. National Income Accounting Major macroeconomic issues; Concepts and approaches to national income accounting. National Income Determination and Price Level Explanation of the concepts of the aggregate demand curves and aggregate supply curve; Determination of the equilibrium level of output and price level in the AS-AD model. Unemployment, Inflation and deflation Meaning, types, and measurement of unemployment; Concepts of inflation and deflation; General price level as measured by Consumer Price Index and implicit price deflator of GDP. Money and Banking Nature, definition and functions of money; Definitions of money supply in Hong Kong; Credit creation and the simple banking multiplier. Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy Roles of government spending and taxation; Central banking and monetary policy. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key economic concepts, with specific reference to current economic issues wherever appropriate. Occasional group discussions will be conducted. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life economic issues. Activities in tutorials will include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). 128

139 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Mankiw, N. G. (2011) Essentials of Economics, 6 th Ed., Thomson South-Western. References Frank, R. H. and Bernanke, B. S. (2009) Principles of Economics, 4 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Parkin, M. (2010) Economics, 9 th Ed., Pearson Addison Wesley. Mankiw, N. G. (2009) Principles of Economics, 5 th Ed., Thomson South-Western. 129

140 CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims The subject introduces the basic principles and concepts of marketing. It provides students with marketing knowledge and skills to analyse diverse marketing situations and apply relevant concepts to real business situations. The subject also develops students oral and written communication skills, critical and creative thinking, and ability to work in a collaborative environment. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: analyse various marketing environments and identify opportunities, threats and other factors or issues affecting marketing planning and decisions describe the principles of various areas in marketing such as customer value, consumer behaviour, marketing research, international marketing and ethical issues identify marketing problems and issues, and suggest marketing strategies providing solutions to the marketing problems and issues identified apply relevant marketing concepts, knowledge and theories to practical marketing situations Indicative Contents Fundamentals of Marketing Role of marketing in modern organisations; Evolution of marketing; Customer value; Strategic marketing process. Marketing Environment Economic, technological, regulatory, political, competition and social factors. Segmentation and Positioning Importance of segmentation and Positioning; Different segmentation bases and types of positioning strategies. Consumer Behaviour and Organisational Buying Consumer purchase decision process; Sociocultural and situational influences; Organisational buying process and criteria. Marketing Research Introduction to methodologies and applications of basic marketing research. 130

141 Marketing Mix The foundation concepts and strategies of marketing mix: Products, Price, Place and Promotion. International Marketing Issues and Applications of IT Concepts, examples and issues related to international marketing; Applications of IT such as online marketing. Ethical issues Marketing impact on individuals and society; Social responsibility and marketing ethics. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key marketing concepts and theories, with reference to current marketing issues or examples wherever appropriate. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts and theories taught in lectures and to apply them to the analysis of real-life marketing situations. Activities in tutorials will normally include group work, student presentations and discussions of problems sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations and written reports, class discussions, individual assignment(s), test(s) and an examination designed to assess the expected outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Kerin, R., Hartley, S., Rudelius, W. and Lau, G. T. (2009) Marketing in Asia, McGraw Hill/Irwin. Kotler, P., Armstrong, G. (2010) Principles of Marketing, 13 th Ed., Prentice Hall. References Grewal, D., Levy, M. (2010) Marketing, 2 nd Ed., McGraw Hill/Irwin. Lamb, C., Hair, J. and McDaniel, C. (2011) Marketing, Thomson, South-Western. Armstrong, G., Kotler, P. (2011) Marketing: An Introduction, 10 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 131

142 CCN2004 Managing Organisations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CCN3107 Management in Human Services Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject introduces the key concepts of management and their practical implications relating to both business and non-business organisations. It provides a fundamental framework in the understanding of management applicable to different subject disciplines and daily life scenarios. This subject also helps students develop critical thinking beneficial to life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: explain the key concepts and theories in management analyse the functions and roles played by managers in various organisations articulate key issues involved in managing organisations apply concepts and theories of human behaviour relating to decision, teamwork and leadership in response to different organisational situations identify common issues related to ethical behaviour and social responsibility in organisations Indicative Contents Management and Management Theory Nature of management, Level of managers and the role of managers in an organisation; Evolution of management theories and their implications for managing organisations. Business Environment Factors affecting the performance of an organisation in a fast changing environment; General and specific environmental factors; Implications of globalisation to organisations; the Relevance of corporate culture to management, Social responsibility and ethical behaviour in organisations. Planning Principles of planning; Role and method of strategic planning in organisations; Decision making in organisations. Organising Key elements of organisational structure and design; Functions of the key units in an organisation; Identification of various forms of organisational structure and their advantages and disadvantages. 132

143 Leading Function of Managers Basic theories in motivation; Application of motivation theories in organisations; Leadership theories, styles and their implications to management. Control Function in Organisations Importance of control in organisations; Types of control and their application to organisation; Importance of performance assessments. Managing different functional units in Organisations Human Resources; Marketing; Production and Finance. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and theories of the syllabus topics. Occasional discussions on hypothetical and real examples will be conducted. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts and theories taught in lectures and to apply them to the analysis of real-life business issues. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations, discussions of problems sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, group project, tests and an examination designed to assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes and to develop critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. In addition, the group project will also offer an opportunity to broaden and assess students exposure in fields like entrepreneurship and community services. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Robbins, S. and Coulter, M. (2009) Management, 10 th Ed., Prentice-Hall International Editions. References Bateman, T. and Snell, A. (2009) Management Leading & collaborating in a competitive world, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill/Irwin. Jones, G. and George J. (2009) Contemporary management, 6 th Ed., McGraw-Hill/Irwin. Kinicki, A. and Williams, B. (2009) Management A Practical Introduction, 4 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Schermerhorn, J. (2010) Management, 10 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. 133

144 CCN2005 Organisational Behaviour Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject introduces the basic concepts and theories of human behaviour, and highlights their significant impact on managing workforce behaviour in organisations. It prepares students to further develop their knowledge in the field of management through either continuous professional development or academic studies. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate different workplace behaviour relevant to the management of organisations understand the basic organisational behaviour concepts and theories for managing workplace behaviour apply organisational behaviour concepts and theories to address relevant management issues Indicative Contents Introduction to Organisational Behaviour Nature of the study of organisational behaviour; Variables in organisational behaviour. Individual Behaviours Values; Cross-cultural values; Attitudes; Personality; Perception; Decision making; Motivation. Group Behaviours Group behaviour; Teams; Leadership; Power; Politics; Conflict. Organisational Systems Organisational culture; Organisational change; Resistance to organisational change; Approaches to managing organisational change. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and theories. Hypothetical and real examples will be presented wherever appropriate to help student grasp the essence of the concepts and theories. 134

145 Activities in tutorials may include group discussions and student presentations of problem sets and case studies to deepen students understanding and to stimulate their awareness of practical implications of some theories. They will provide opportunities for students to explore further the applications of the concepts and theories taught. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Robbins, S. P. and Judge, T. A. (2011) Organisational Behaviour, 14 th Ed., Prentice Hall. References Colquitt, J. A., LePine, J. A. and Wesson, M. J. (2011) Organisational Behaviour: Improving Performance and Commitment in the Workplace, 2 nd Ed., McGraw-Hill/Irwin. Griffin, R. W. and Moorhead, G. (2012) Organisational Behaviour: Managing People and Organisations, 10 th Ed., South-Western/Cengage Learning. Kinicki, A. and Kreitner, R. (2009) Organisational Behaviour: Key Concepts, Skills and Best Practices, 4 th Ed., McGraw-Hill/Irwin. McShane, S. L. and Von Glinow, M. A. (2009) Organisational Behaviour, 2 nd Ed., McGraw-Hill/Irwin. 135

146 CCN2006 Understanding Globalisation Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CCN3118 Globalisation and Development Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with a global perspective and sound understanding of current practices of globalisation. Students will be guided to analyse different globalisation concepts based on real-life situations. This subject also helps students develop critical thinking and practical skills in globalisation for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: define globalisation and trace its history and development issues investigate the role of the global institutions and their effect on local and international economies identify the relationship between globalisation and trade/ cultural flows study the effect of the spread of global media deal with, resist and discuss the future of globalisation Indicative Contents Foundation of Globalisation Origins and history of Globalisation; Some basic issues and debates on Globalisation. Globalisation and Related Processes Imperialism; Development; Americanisation/Anti-Americanism as a global process; Basic ideas of Neo-Liberalism. Global Political Structures, Global Institutions and Regional Organisations United Nations; European Union; North American Free Trade Agreement; Association of South East Asian Nations; World Trade Organisation; International Monetary Fund; World Bank; Other important economic organisations such as The Group of Eight, The Group of Twenty, Organisation of Petroleum Exporting Countries, World Economic Forum, Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development. Global Economic Flows Global trade; Trade surpluses and deficits; Developed and less developed world. 136

147 Global Culture and Cultural Flows World culture; Religion; Cultural imperialism; Cultural convergence. High-Tech Global Flows and Structures Technology; Media, thinking about the new global media; The internet in China. Dealing with, Resisting, and the Futures of Globalisation Dealing with the global economy, protectionism, fair trade, free trade; Resisting globalisation, local resistance; The Futures of globalisation. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts on globalisation, with specific reference to current international business issues wherever appropriate. Guest talks and activities will be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life globalisation issues. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations, discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group projects and presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical, problem-solving and communication skills in a global context. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Ritzer, G. (2010) Globalisation: A basic text, Wiley-Blackwell. References Ritzer, G. (2011) Globalisation: The essentials, Wiley-Blackwell. Rowntree, L., Lewis, M., Price, M. and Wyckoff, W. (2011) Globalisation and diversity: Geography of a changing world, 3 rd Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. Scholte, J. A. (2005) Globalisation: A Critical Introduction, 2 nd Ed., Palgrave Macmillan. Spence, M. and Leipziger, D. (2010) Globalisation and growth: Implications for a post-crisis world. Commission on Growth and Development, The World Bank. 137

148 CCN2007 商 務 普 通 話 Business Putonghua 程 度 2 學 分 3 教 學 語 言 普 通 話 學 習 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 的 必 備 條 件 [CCN1024 大 專 普 通 話 ] 或 相 關 普 通 話 課 程 ( 須 出 示 證 書 正 本 ) 評 估 方 法 60% 課 堂 習 作 40% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 根 據 學 生 在 [CCN1024 大 專 普 通 話 ] 課 程 中 所 建 立 的 普 通 話 和 漢 語 拼 音 知 識 基 礎, 進 一 步 提 升 他 們 的 普 通 話 水 平, 強 化 運 用 漢 語 拼 音 的 能 力, 並 廣 泛 應 用 商 務 情 景 語 彙 及 會 話, 期 望 學 生 的 普 通 話 表 達 能 力 達 到 較 高 水 準, 使 他 們 在 將 來 工 作 的 環 境 中 更 好 地 應 用 所 學 的 普 通 話 說 話 技 巧, 同 時 也 有 助 他 們 達 成 終 身 學 習 的 目 標 科 目 統 籌 小 組 在 籌 備 講 授 及 評 核 本 課 程 時, 須 參 照 相 關 的 課 程 內 容 藍 圖, 了 解 本 科 目 的 角 色 定 位, 如 何 在 課 程 層 面 上 協 助 學 生 達 到 預 期 的 學 習 成 果 學 習 成 果 學 生 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 應 能 : 強 化 漢 語 拼 音 練 習 及 普 通 話 正 音 訓 練, 了 解 普 通 話 與 廣 州 話 的 對 比, 能 說 較 純 正 的 普 通 話, 並 擁 有 自 學 普 通 話 的 能 力 ; 應 用 商 務 情 景 語 彙 及 會 話, 熟 悉 將 來 工 作 的 語 言 環 境, 並 能 以 普 通 話 與 上 司 客 戶 商 業 夥 伴 代 理 等 各 方 溝 通 ; 學 習 商 務 演 講 談 判 和 投 訴 的 技 巧, 從 而 掌 握 有 關 技 巧, 以 應 付 將 來 工 作 及 學 習 所 需, 也 能 增 強 說 普 通 話 的 自 信 課 程 內 容 普 通 話 和 漢 語 拼 音 強 化 練 習 漢 語 拼 音 強 化 練 習 及 辨 音 訓 練 普 通 話 正 音 訓 練 職 場 普 通 話 與 廣 州 話 對 比 及 翻 譯 商 務 情 景 語 彙 及 會 話 商 業 普 通 話 辭 彙 語 法 的 規 範 表 達 產 品 介 紹 及 推 銷 定 價 訂 貨 傭 金 包 裝 付 款 方 式 保 險 合 同 的 會 話 商 務 演 講 談 判 和 投 訴 的 技 巧 商 務 文 章 朗 讀 產 品 推 銷 及 介 紹 工 作 環 境 介 紹 及 工 作 經 驗 分 享 面 試 技 巧 商 務 演 講 商 務 談 判 商 務 投 訴 138

149 教 學 方 法 主 講 課 集 中 教 授 商 務 情 景 語 彙 及 會 話, 以 及 講 解 面 試 商 務 演 講 商 務 談 判 和 商 務 投 訴 的 技 巧, 亦 會 討 論 普 通 話 辭 彙 語 法 的 規 範 表 達 教 學 模 式 以 課 本 教 授 錄 音 聆 聽 角 色 扮 演 小 組 討 論 爲 主 導 修 課 集 中 訓 練 廣 州 話 與 普 通 話 對 譯 說 話 練 習 漢 語 拼 音 強 化 練 習 及 普 通 話 正 音 訓 練, 亦 會 介 紹 一 般 工 作 環 境 及 分 享 工 作 經 驗 教 學 模 式 將 以 課 堂 練 習 商 務 文 章 朗 讀 角 色 扮 演 小 組 討 論 和 辯 論 爲 主 評 核 方 法 本 科 目 兼 用 持 續 評 估 及 綜 合 評 估 方 法 持 續 評 估 包 括 : (i) 個 人 口 語 評 估 : 將 以 個 人 演 講 的 方 式, 進 行 一 次 不 少 於 5 分 鐘 的 商 務 演 講 內 容 方 面, 可 自 行 選 擇 產 品 介 紹 市 場 投 資 分 析 或 市 場 營 銷 分 析 等 (ii) 小 組 口 語 評 估 : 學 員 將 分 為 四 人 一 組, 自 選 題 目, 進 行 不 少 於 10 分 鐘 的 商 務 談 判 情 景 會 話 (iii) 課 堂 測 驗 : 內 容 包 括 漢 語 拼 音 辨 音 ; 漢 語 拼 音 與 詞 語 及 句 子 的 互 相 譯 寫 ; 語 方 言 詞 語 短 句 與 普 通 話 的 對 譯 等 形 式 期 末 考 試 分 口 試 和 筆 試 兩 次 進 行 每 班 的 教 學 計 劃 (Teaching Plan) 詳 述 個 別 習 作 佔 整 體 評 核 的 實 際 比 重 學 生 收 到 習 作 時, 均 會 獲 告 知 習 作 所 評 核 的 是 那 些 預 期 學 習 成 果 學 生 所 需 的 努 力 除 了 42 小 時 的 課 堂 講 授 外, 學 生 在 習 作 備 課 準 備 測 驗 及 考 試, 並 與 同 學 進 行 小 組 工 作 等 方 面 所 花 的 時 間, 預 期 約 為 84 小 時 指 定 課 本 香 港 理 工 大 學 中 國 語 文 教 學 中 心 編 : 商 貿 普 通 話 ( 上 冊 ) ( 附 多 媒 體 光 碟 ), 中 華 書 局, 2007 年 版 參 考 書 中 國 社 會 科 學 院 語 言 研 究 所 詞 典 編 輯 室 編 : 現 代 漢 語 詞 典 ( 第 五 版 ) 簡 體 字 修 訂 本, 商 務 印 書 館,2005 年 林 崗 : 職 場 普 通 話 特 訓 班, 萬 里 機 構,2010 年 版 香 港 理 工 大 學 中 國 語 文 教 學 中 心 編 : 商 貿 普 通 話 ( 下 冊 ), 中 華 書 局,2008 年 版 139

150 國 家 語 言 文 字 工 作 委 員 會 普 通 話 培 訓 測 試 中 心 : 普 通 話 水 平 測 試 實 施 綱 要, 商 務 印 書 館, 2005 年 版 曾 子 凡 編 著 : 廣 州 話 普 通 話 口 語 詞 對 譯 手 冊 電 腦 光 碟 版, 三 聯 書 店 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,2002 年 版 李 明 石 佩 文 : 漢 語 普 通 話 語 音 辨 正, 北 京 語 言 文 化 大 學 出 版 社,1998 年 版 施 仲 謀 編 著 : 廣 州 話 普 通 話 語 音 對 照 手 冊, 華 風 書 局 有 限 公 司,1986 年 版 曾 子 凡 編 著 : 香 港 人 學 說 普 通 話, 三 聯 書 店 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,1991 年 版 140

151 CCN2008 Chemistry and Modern Living Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills through the understanding of fundamental chemical concepts. It helps students to develop and use chemical concepts and skills, so that students can understand the chemistry behind some issues and problems that may arise within our society. The subject will also help students develop critical thinking skills for life-long learning through appreciating the benefits and shortfalls of technology. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the importance of chemical science and technology that are closely related to our everyday life conduct analysis of chemical properties for modern technology, including issues in environment, renewable energy and new materials, etc. appraise the issues relating to the benefits of technology and criticise the shortfalls of technology Indicative Contents The Nature of Matter Elements; Compounds and mixtures; Atoms and molecules; Periodicity. Traditional Materials Metals; Alloy; Glass; Porcelain; Their properties. Modern Materials Semi-conductor: doping of silicon to produce p-type and n-type semiconductors; Plastics and its structures: polymers, addition vs condensation; Nano-materials: distinguish between physical and chemical techniques to form molecules, structures and properties of carbon nanotubes; Implication of nanotechnology; The advantages and disadvantages of using these materials. Issues in Environment Measuring ph of rain; Acid rain; Ozone depletion; Greenhouse effect; Global warming; Air pollutants, e.g. sulfur dioxide and combustion of coal, nitrogen oxides, particulates and volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and its acidification. 141

152 Renewable Energy Energy; Work and heat; Conversation of energy; Several kinds of energy sources; Chemistry and society. Water Treatment and Recycling Primary pollutants found in wastewater; Hardness; Outline the primary, secondary and tertiary stages of wastewater treatment: distillation, filtration, disinfection. Food Major and minor components of food; Degree of crystallisation (solidification) and melting point of fats and oils from their structure; Occurrence of colour in naturally occurring pigments; Changes of food properties upon cooking, e.g. acidity, colour of food, and texture. Waste Treatment and Recycling Methods for waste disposal; Recycling of metal, glass and plastics; Landfill. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Examples and references will be given to students whenever appropriate. Worksheets may be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complex theories, and to conduct analysis of chemical properties. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to broaden, enlighten and reinforce their understanding. Problem based activities, group discussions and case studies will be arranged to stimulate student s interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts, and to develop student s critical thinking. The tutorials will enable students to understand, verify, and apply knowledge developed from lectures. Literature survey techniques will also be introduced to let students identify information, conduct analysis and find discrepancy when compared with their experimental data. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, group discussion, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Eubanks, L. P., Middlecamp, C., Pienta, N. J., Heltzel, C. E., Weaver, G. C. (2009) Chemistry in Context: Applying Chemistry to Society, 5 th Ed., McGraw Hill. 142

153 References Beard, J. M. (2009) Environmental Chemistry in Society, CRC Press. McGee, H. (2004) On Food and Cooking: The Science and Lore of the Kitchen, 1 st Scribner rev. Ed., Scribner. Sarai, D. S. (2002) Basic Chemistry for Water and Wastewater Operators, American Water Works Association. Seager, S. L. and Slabaugh, M. R. (2011) Chemistry for Today: General, Organic and Biochemistry, 7 th Ed., Cengage. 143

154 CCN2009 大 專 學 術 中 文 Chinese for Academic Purposes 程 度 2 學 分 3 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 或 普 通 話 講 授 教 學 模 式 42 小 時 課 堂 講 授 修 讀 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 100% 課 堂 習 作 科 目 目 標 本 科 目 透 過 課 堂 講 授 課 堂 練 習 分 組 習 作 等 方 式, 培 養 同 學 中 文 閱 讀 概 括 分 析 評 論 及 撰 寫 中 文 學 術 論 文 的 綜 合 能 力 本 科 目 注 重 訓 練 同 學 閱 讀 欣 賞 的 能 力 教 導 同 學 檢 索 重 要 的 中 文 學 術 資 料 辨 析 評 論 文 章 的 優 劣 掌 握 學 術 論 文 寫 作 的 要 領 等 此 外, 本 科 目 亦 注 重 知 識 的 應 用, 希 望 協 助 學 生 把 學 會 的 技 能 應 用 到 各 課 程 學 術 論 文 的 撰 寫 上 科 目 統 籌 小 組 在 籌 備 講 授 及 評 核 本 課 程 時, 須 參 照 相 關 的 課 程 內 容 藍 圖, 了 解 本 科 目 的 角 色 定 位, 如 何 在 課 程 層 面 上 協 助 學 生 達 到 預 期 的 學 習 成 果 學 習 成 果 學 生 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 應 能 : 瞭 解 學 術 文 章 的 論 點 論 據 及 論 證 ; 運 用 熟 練 的 中 文, 寫 作 一 般 的 評 論 文 章, 例 如 社 會 問 題 評 論 影 評 書 評 樂 評 等 ; 掌 握 撰 寫 學 術 論 文 的 基 礎 知 識 及 寫 作 學 術 文 章 的 基 本 能 力, 例 如 恰 當 歸 納 背 景 材 料, 靈 活 運 用 注 釋 分 論 總 結 等 各 項 寫 作 要 點, 從 而 具 備 良 好 的 文 章 表 達 力 組 織 力 和 論 辯 力 等 課 程 內 容 評 論 文 章 寫 作 策 略 概 說 文 類 理 論, 介 紹 什 麼 是 評 論, 如 何 作 評 論 ; 把 握 評 論 文 章 中 的 論 點 論 據 論 證 方 法 ; 介 紹 立 論 駁 論 演 繹 法 歸 納 法 等 論 證 方 法 ; 介 紹 評 論 文 章 的 篇 章 建 構 銜 接 和 邏 輯 聯 繫 等 ; 介 紹 基 本 的 研 究 方 法 一 般 評 論 文 章 寫 作 訓 練 介 紹 時 事 評 論 人 物 評 論 影 視 評 論 書 評 等 的 各 自 特 色 及 寫 作 要 訣 學 術 性 文 章 寫 作 訓 練 課 程 介 紹 一 般 論 文 ( 學 術 回 顧 研 究 要 點 結 論 注 釋 等 ) 畢 業 論 文 ( 標 題 目 錄 內 容 提 要 正 文 - 學 術 回 顧 文 章 結 構 章 節 安 排 結 論 注 釋 及 參 考 書 目 等 ) 的 寫 作 教 學 方 法 課 堂 講 授 主 要 介 紹 評 論 文 章 及 學 術 論 文 的 寫 作 策 略 及 寫 作 規 範 導 修 課 旨 在 通 過 學 生 報 告 及 小 組 討 論, 讓 學 生 應 用 及 深 化 在 課 堂 上 學 會 的 知 識 及 理 論 144

155 評 核 方 法 本 科 目 採 用 持 續 評 估 方 法, 學 生 須 撰 寫 評 論 文 章 完 成 閱 讀 報 告 及 主 題 研 究 論 文, 也 須 完 成 期 中 測 驗, 以 檢 測 學 生 的 評 論 及 書 寫 能 力 每 班 的 教 學 計 劃 (Teaching Plan) 詳 述 個 別 習 作 佔 整 體 評 核 的 實 際 比 重 學 生 收 到 習 作 時, 均 會 獲 告 知 習 作 所 評 核 的 是 那 些 預 期 學 習 成 果 學 生 所 需 的 努 力 除 了 42 小 時 的 課 堂 講 授 外, 學 生 在 習 作 備 課 準 備 測 驗, 並 與 同 學 進 行 小 組 工 作 等 方 面 所 花 的 時 間, 預 期 約 為 84 小 時 指 定 課 本 本 科 目 涉 及 的 參 考 材 料 較 廣 泛, 無 指 定 課 本 參 考 書 王 乾 任 : 替 你 讀 經 典 : 讀 書 心 得 報 告 與 寫 作 範 例 篇, 弘 智 文 化,2002 年 版 林 慶 彰 : 學 術 論 文 寫 作 指 引 : 文 科 適 用, 萬 卷 樓 發 行,1996 年 版 吳 和 堂 : 教 育 論 文 寫 作 與 實 用 技 巧, 高 等 教 育,2009 年 版 吳 宜 澄 盧 姵 綺 : 論 文 寫 作 格 式 手 冊, 桂 冠 圖 書 出 版 股 份 有 限 公 司,2004 年 版 高 小 和 編 : 學 術 論 文 寫 作, 南 京 大 學 出 版 社,2002 年 版 路 德 慶 主 編 : 寫 作 教 程, 華 東 師 範 大 學 出 版 社,1984 年 版 張 慶 勳 : 論 文 寫 作 手 冊, 心 理 出 版 社,2002 年 版 張 志 忠 : 中 國 當 代 文 學 作 品 導 讀, 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2005 年 版 鄭 文 貞 : 篇 章 修 辭 學, 廈 門 大 學 出 版 社,1991 年 版 畢 恆 達 : 教 授 為 什 麼 沒 告 訴 我 : 論 文 寫 作 的 枕 邊 書, 學 富 文 化,2005 年 版 145

156 CCN2010 English for Workplace Communication Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 42 hours of seminars Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CCN2182 Professional English I Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject is designed to equip students with the essential English language skills and business communication knowledge required in their future professional careers. The main focus is to develop in students the competence to select the appropriate language and strategies for effective communication in daily workplace contexts. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: acquire the basic knowledge of workplace communication apply appropriate strategies for writing business messages with different natures such as positive, negative and persuasive messages write business correspondence such as letters, memos and s with appropriate format, style and tone interact effectively in various oral communication tasks such as presentations, business telephoning, and job interviews Indicative Contents Principles of Workplace Communication Communication process; Analysis of purpose, audience, information and context; Strategies for verbal and nonverbal communication; Selection of communication channels. Writing Strategies Writing process; Patterns of organisation for messages with different natures (e.g. direct and indirect pattern); Reader-oriented approach (e.g. you view and impersonal statements); Emphasising and deemphasising ideas. Workplace Correspondence Business letters, memos and (e.g. format, structure and layout); Routine and goodwill messages; Persuasive and negative messages; Résumé and job application letters; Tone (e.g. informal and professional tones); Style (e.g. positive, inclusive, familiar and concise styles); Grammar and vocabulary for workplace writing. Oral Communication in the Workplace Business presentations; Business telephone skills; Job interviews. 146

157 Teaching/Learning Approach Seminars will focus on the study of different communication strategies and language skills with practical examples relevant to students potential career fields. Different learning activities such as writing practices, role-plays, case studies and group discussions will be used. In language laboratory sessions, audio-visual and on-line materials will be used to reinforce students learning. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, written tasks (e.g. writing a business letter, memo or ), quizzes and test(s) designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including teamwork, critical thinking and analytical skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, quizzes and test(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Guffey, M. E. and Almonte, R. (2010) Essentials of Business Communication, 6 th Thomson-Nelson. Canadian Ed., References Baugh, L. S., Fryar M., & Thomas, D. A. (1999) How to Write First-class Business Correspondence, NTC Publishing Group. Billow, G. T. (2004) Business Writing for Hong Kong, 3 rd Ed., Longman. Bovée, C. L. and Thill, J. V. (2010) Business Communication Essentials, 5 th Ed., Pearson. Krizan, A. C., Merrier, P. and Jones, C. L. (2008) Business Communication, 7 th Ed., Cengage Learning. Locker, K. O. and Kaczmarek, S. K. (2011) Business Communication Building Critical Skills, McGraw-Hill. 147

158 CCN2011 Environmental Science Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Mode of Study 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to introduce students some basic ecological concepts and to comprehend the interrelationships between natural and human-made world. It equips students with how ecosystems work and the causes of deterioration of environment. It enables students to understand the analysis and assessment of the thermal and acoustic performance characteristics of buildings. The concept of maintaining the built environment of buildings and integrating the buildings with the macro-environment are emphasised. This subject also promotes students awareness and understanding on environmental issues. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing of the subject, students will be able to: understand the Earth is one interconnected system explain interactions between species and their environments analyse and assess the thermal and acoustic performance characteristics of buildings use the performance requirements to maintain a stable built environment for human comfort integrate buildings into the macro-environment: geographical factor and the consequent social, economic and ecological impact of the buildings identify the impacts of human on the environment apply background concepts and knowledge to review and investigate possible solutions of environmental problems Indicative Contents The Earth s Life-Support System Four major components: Atmosphere, Hydrosphere, Geosphere, Biosphere; Structure and composition of atmosphere; Effects and impacts of meteorology and climatology on the microclimate and human comfort of buildings; Application in the design of buildings with consideration of weather and climate. Fundamental Ecological Principles Ecological terms and concepts; The structure of ecosystems; Abiotic and biotic factors in an ecosystem. 148

159 Energy Flow One way flow of energy; The law of thermodynamics; Basic physics of light and electromagnetic radiation; Food chains, food webs and trophic levels; Ecological pyramids. Matter Cycles Cycling of matter or nutrients; Carbon biogeochemical cycle; The hydrologic cycle. Heat Nature of heat and heat transfer with heat gains or losses in buildings; Use of insulating materials, thermal insulation and comfort with design of buildings; Energy efficiency and conservation. Water Water supplies; Treatment of water before discharge; Water pollution. Degradation of Environment Types of pollution; Noise pollution; Nature of sound and its levels; Control of noise with building acoustics; Green buildings; Global agreements and conventions on environmental issues. Teaching/Learning Approach To create an environment that encourages active learning a wide range of methods will be adopted, and they may include lectures, small group discussions, student presentations, project based and problemsolving tasks and case study work. Where appropriate, the use of computer assisted learning techniques will be employed. Students will be encouraged to reflect on their learning activities to review what they have learned and to plan further action and activity. Assessment Approach Assessment such as individual assignments, reports, tests and examination(s) will be used to assess the application of the knowledge assimilated in lectures and reinforced in tutorials. Students are trained to search for information, comprehend, criticise and summarise in own words in the project reports and problem-solving tasks. Students are required to present findings from projects and case studies. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Cunningham, W. P. and Saigo, B. W. (2010) Environmental Science: A Global Concern, 11 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. McMullan, R. (2007) Environmental Science in Building, 6 th Ed., Palgrave Macmillan. 149

160 References Baker-Laporte, P. (2001) Prescriptions for A Healthy House : A Practical Guide for Architects, Builders, & Homeowners, 2 nd Ed., New Society Publishers. Burberry, P. (1997) Environment and Services, 8 th Ed., Pearson Education. Heerwagen, D. (2004) Passive and Active Environmental Controls: Informing the Schematic Designing of Buildings, 1 st Ed., McGraw-Hill. Miller, G. T. and Spoolman, S. (2008) Environmental Science: Problems, Concepts, and Solutions, 12 th Ed., Thomson learning. 150

161 CCN2012 Experiencing Architecture Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 21 hours of lectures 21 hours of tutorials/seminars Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject aims to arouse students awareness and interest in architecture, from feeling architecture, experiencing architecture to thinking architecture. The subject provides students a general understanding of architecture and introduces them to the various means with which architecture fulfills the varied and conflicting demands for beauty, stability, function, environmental considerations and socio-economy. Examples of Hong Kong architecture will be used as case studies to assist students in understanding the subject through first hand experience. Studying the subject will broaden students cultural perspective and help them develop critical and analytical thinking skills for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise basic architectural aesthetic concepts appreciate architectural works with relevant principles recognise how architecture is shaped by and at the same time reflects cultural and social values Indicative Contents Man and Architecture Meaning and significance of architecture; Body, shelter and house; Terrain, community and city. Order of Architecture Size, dimension, anthropometrics and proxemics; Form and geometry; Scale and proportion; Symmetry, axes, hierarchy, repetition, sequence, rhythm, texture, ornament; Light and space. Understanding Architecture Beauty, stability and utility; Climate and environment; Programme and building typologies; Architectural components: walls, floors, stairs & openings; Zoning and circulation; Solid and void; Mass and envelop; Public and private; Enclosed and open; Materials, structure and construction; Architectural details. Appreciation of Architectural Works Introduction to traditional Western Architecture; Introduction to traditional Chinese Architecture Vernacular Architecture; Introduction to Modern and Contemporary Architecture; Introduction to key architects; Architecture in Hong Kong: field trips and case studies. 151

162 Contemporary Architectural Issues Urbanisation and urban redevelopment; Heritage and conservation; Green architecture and sustainability; City form and public space; Collective housing; World fair and Expo; Museum and Bilbao Effect; Architecture and power. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will introduce students to the social, cultural and historical contexts in which architecture is generated and experienced. Tutorials and assignments (including short essays, written reports and presentations) will provide students with the opportunity to develop their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures. Field trips will provide students with the opportunity to contextualise their learning and appreciate architecture with first hand experience. Assessment Approach Students will be required to actively participate in lectures, tutorial and seminars, read articles, work on projects and conduct self-study. A variety of tools including class presentations, case studies, tests, essays, and written reports will be used to assess students critical and analytical understanding of the subject. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, and tests. Indicative Readings References Ching, F. D. K. (2007) Architecture: Form, Space, and Order, 3 rd Ed., Wiley. Conway, H. and Roenisch, R. (2005) Understanding Architecture An Introduction to Architecture and Architectural Theory, 2 nd Ed., Routledge. Girouard, M. (1985) Cities and People: A Social and Architectural History, 1 st Ed., Yale University Press. Koolhaas, R. and Mau, B. (1998) Small, Medium, Large, Extra-large: Office for Metropolitan Architecture, 2 nd Ed., Monacelli Press. Rasmussen, S. E. (1962) Experiencing Architecture, 2 nd Ed., M. I. T. Press. 152

163 CCN2013 Exploring Human Nature Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject equips students with the analytical skills for the understanding of different theories of human nature. Such understanding enables students to be aware of the intellectual environment, in which they are embedded, where the holding of different sets of assumptions might often lead to the adoption of very different approaches of studies, hence might drastically change one s beliefs and the course of one s action. It also enhances students critical thinking for inter-disciplinary studies and lifelong learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the survey of major thinkers and their theories of human nature identify reasons and paradigms underlying each theory examine how these theories would lead to different approaches of studies, and the beliefs underlying one s actions recognise the strengths, weaknesses and unique contribution of different theories in examining human nature Indicative Contents Ancient and Medieval Theories Plato: forms or ideas, divided line, theory of knowledge, nature of soul, justice; Aristotle: causation and theology, hierarchy of souls, sensation and perception, ethics and politics, concept of Good Life; Augustine: evil and free will, doctrine of love and ethics; Biblical view: sinful nature, God as Creator and Redeemer, Salvation. Eastern Tradition Confucianism: social discord, jen, self-discipline; Hinduism: Atman is Brahman, reincarnation; Buddhism: suffering in ignorance, Anatman self is illusory, nirvana. Modern Theories Hobbes: The State of Nature; Rousseau: The Social Contract, Schopenhauer: The World as Idea, The will to live; Kant: Categorical Imperative, Transcendental Appercetion; Marx: Historical Materialist Determinism, Alienation; Freud: Id, Ego, Superego, Unconscious; Existentialism: Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Satre, existence precedes essence, Radical Freedom, Meaning of Life; Darwinian Evolution and Sociobiology; Skinner and Behaviourism. 153

164 Themes and Debates in Theories of Human Nature Determinism vs. Libertarianism; Debates of Free Will; Consciousness; the Mind-Brain Relationship; Knowledge: a priori, a posterior; Monism, Dualism, Materialism; Telos and Destiny, Transcendent reality; Subjectivity; Intentionality; Artificial Intelligence. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of different concepts and theories of human nature. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of the practical implications of some concepts. Worksheets may also be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complex theories. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and essays designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and essay(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Pojman. L. P. (2006) Who Are We? : Theories of Human Nature, Oxford University Press. Stevenson, L. F. (2004) Ten Theories of Human Nature, 4 th Ed., Oxford University Press. ( 萊 斯 列. 斯 蒂 芬 森, 大 衛. 哈 貝 曼 著, 施 忠 連 譯 : 世 界 十 大 人 性 哲 學, 上 海 市 : 復 旦 大 學 出 版 社,2007 ) References Gross, R. (2009) Themes, Issues and Debates in Psychology, 3 rd Ed., Hodder & Stoughton. Hergenhahn, B. R. (2009) An Introduction to The History of Psychology, 6 th Ed., Wadsworth. Matthews, E. (2005) Mind (Key Concepts in Philosophy), Continuum. Searle, J. R. (2004) Mind: A Brief Introduction, Oxford University Press. 154

165 CCN2014 Food Hygiene and Nutritional Health Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject introduces the basic science of nutrients and the general principles of food safety and hygiene. The goal is to equip students with the framework of the background knowle dge, so as to enable them to appreciate the relation between diet and health, and progressively to create an awareness of the current issues of nutrition, food safety and hygiene. After studying the subject, students will be able to assess the validity of nutritional information, and in the long term, sharpen their critical thinking for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to: understand the role and function of nutrients in health and diseases, and the inter-relation between diet and fitness appreciate the current issues of nutritional claims on health from a critical point of view plan a balanced diet for different stages during the life cycle plan a balanced and sanitary diet to maintain health, fitness and vitality adopt the principles in food preservation, and follow the guidelines of preventive measures against food-borne diseases appreciate the current issues of food safety and hygiene on health Indicative Contents Overview of Nutrients and Nutrition Important nutrients to human health, carbohydrates, lipids, proteins, vitamins, minerals and water; Dietary reference intakes and nutritional assessment; Food labelling law in Hong Kong. Metabolism Digestion, absorption, transportation, and storage or utilisation of nutrients in the human body. Planning of Diet in Health and for Prevention of Some Common Degenerative Diseases Principles and guidelines in planning balanced diet to maintain health and prevent certain diseases such as heart disease, stroke, cancer and diabetes. Weight Management Energy balance between intake and expenditure; Definition of normal, over- and under- weight using body mass index; Maintenance of body weight within a healthy range. 155

166 Nutrition and Fitness Energy requirement for various physical activities, occupational needs and ages. Nutrition in Life Cycle Dietary consideration during various stages in the life cycle: childhood, adolescence, adulthood, elderly, pregnancy and lactation. Food Safety Changes of foods during storage; Principles of food storage; Examples of maintaining freshness in foods; Current and local issues of food contamination and adulteration. Food Hygiene Common microbial contamination and spoilage of food; Risk factors for foodbourne illness; Food preservation, prevention measures against microbial foodbourne illness. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will emphasise on the understanding and explanation of the basic information and relevant concepts of nutrition and food hygiene. Local issues will serve as illustrated examples. Tutorials will provide a channel for discussion and illustration of the background knowledge in nutritional assessment, design of a healthy diet for health and for some common degenerative diseases. Tutorial questions and activities will be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of the practical implications of some concepts. Assessment Approach Assessment such as individual and group assignments, tests and an examination will be used to assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and application of the theoretical knowledge. Written assignments and tutorial participation are for training written and oral communication skills respectively. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Wardlaw, G. M. and Smith, A. M. (2012) Contemporary Nutrition: A Functional Approach, 2 nd Ed., McGraw-Hill. Whitney, E., DeBruyne, L. K., Pinna, K. and Rolfes, S. R. (2011) Nutrition for Health and Health Care, 4 th Ed., Wadsworth, Cengage Learning. 156

167 References Geissler, C. A. and Powers, H. J. (Eds.) (2009) Fundamentals of Human Nutrition: For Students and Practitioners in the Health Sciences, Elsevier/Churchill Livingstone. McSwane, D., Rue, N. R. and Linton, R. (2005) Essentials of Food Safety and Sanitation, 4 th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall. Heredia, N., Wesley, I. and Garcia, S. (Eds.) (2009) Microbiologically Safe Foods, John Wiley & Sons. 157

168 CCN2015 Gender Issues Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject aims at enhancing students awareness of gender stereotypes and gender inequality in society from both the personal perspective and the sociological perspective. It equips them with a critical and gender-sensitive mind to observe and interpret social interaction and phenomena. Social construction of gender issues is discussed to enable students to appreciate the importance of gender balance and equality in the changing human world. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify a framework of study in gender issues analyse the current issues of gender inequality from a sociological perspective apply relevant perspectives in analysing gender issues demonstrate gender sensitivity toward social issues Indicative Contents Thinking about Gender Sociological imagination and the sociological framework for thinking about women and men. Gender Difference and Gender Inequality Natural differences between the sexes; Discrimination in everyday life; Gender inequality in sociological perspectives. The Social Construction of Gender Femininity, masculinity and the concept of androgyny; Gender-related language and knowledge; Social construction of gender in cultural contexts and in Chinese societies. Sex Segregation and Work The male/female earnings gap; Sex segregation in the workplace; Consequences of occupational sex segregation. Family, Economy and the Institutionalisation of Gender Inequality Historical perspectives on modern families; Feminist perspective on families; Diversity of contemporary households. 158

169 Gender, Social Stratification and Social Policy Current social policy related to gender issues; Concept of a gender-balanced society. Teaching/Learning Approach To facilitate students learning in this subject, lectures, seminars and group presentations will be offered. Students will be encouraged to actively participate in the learning process. During lectures, theories and concepts on sociology and gender issues will be delivered. In seminars, students will take part in group presentations and discussion to consolidate and enrich their understanding and critical analysis of the subject matter. Assessment Approach In addition to a test that assesses students understanding and application of gender concepts and theories, presentations, case studies and group projects as well as written reflection papers will be used to enhance students analytical ability and sensitivity in conducting personal and sociological analysis of gender issues. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and test(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Andersen, M. L. (2006) Thinking About Women: Sociological Perspectives on Sex and Gender, Allyn and Bacon. Lindsey, L. L. (2011) Gender Roles: A Sociological Perspective, Pearson Prentice Hall. References Francis. B. and Skelton, C. (2001) Investigating Gender Contemporary Perspectives in Education, Open University Press. Lee, E. W. Y. (2003) Gender and Change in Hong Kong: Globalisation, Postcolonialism and Chinese Patriarchy, Hong Kong University Press. Lips, H. M. (2005) Sex & Gender : An Introduction, McGraw-Hill. Thorne, B. (1993) Gender Play: Girls and Boys in School, Open University Press. Pamela Abbott & Claire Wallace 著 俞 智 敏 等 譯 : 女 性 主 義 觀 點 的 社 會 學, 巨 流 圖 書 公 司, 1996 年 版 顧 燕 翎 林 芳 玫 等 : 女 性 主 義 理 論 與 流 派 : 本 土 撰 寫 最 完 整 女 性 主 義 入 門 讀 本, 女 書 文 化 事 業 有 限 公 司,2000 年 版 159

170 CCN2016 Grammar in Context Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This course provides a platform for students to acquire, consolidate, and improve their knowledge in English grammar in different contexts that involve extensive use of the English language, such as news reporting, business writing, oral communication, and literary writings. Through these contexts, students will understand the underlying English grammatical principles, with a major focus on the formation and functions of various sentence patterns for different purposes of writing. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: apply relevant grammatical concepts learnt to facilitate the communication process for various purposes analyse, explain and correct grammatical inconsistencies, ambiguities and other stylistic aberrations to achieve communicative success in different contexts identify the use of different sentence patterns in different text types (e.g. news, commercial advertisements, business correspondences, fictions, films, etc) produce grammatical and context-specific texts with reference to the nature and purpose of communication Indicative Contents Grammar in Newspaper Simple sentence; Compound and complex sentence; Sentence part; Word class; Phrase; Clause; Variation in sentence structure. Grammar in Business Subjunctive; Imperative; Narrative; Interrogative; You-attitude; Sentence reduction for brevity; Sentence expansion for clarity. Grammar of the Spoken Language Contraction; Minor sentence; Word stress; Sentence stress; Intonation; Connected speech; Coarticulation; Assimilation. Grammar and Literary Language Artistic license; Stylistic aberrations; Grammar of artistic language. 160

171 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be reserved for discussing and analysing the inner workings of English grammar in different contexts. Tutorials will be practice sessions for ensuring students thorough comprehension of the rules of English grammar by applying them to the analysis and production of grammatical and context-specific sentences. Students are thus expected to be specially disciplined and committed to the subject which entails a rather systematic and largely logical approach to the study of English grammar. Assessment Approach Assessment tools will include take-home assignments that help students to revise materials taught and discussed in the classes, quizzes and a final examination that evaluate the depth of internalisation of the newly-learnt concepts through students demonstration of applying these concepts to their analysis and creation of texts for different contexts. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, quizzes and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Steer, J. M., Carlisi, K. A. (1998) The Advanced Grammar Book, 2 nd Ed., Heinle & Heinle-Thomson. References Casagrande, J. (2006) Grammar Snobs Are Great Big Meanies, Penguin. Crystal, D. (2004) Making Sense of Grammar, Pearson Longman. Hughes, R. (2005) Exploring Grammar in Writing, Cambridge University Press. Koch, R. S. (2000) Focus on Grammar: An Advanced Course for Reference and Practice Workbook, 2 nd Ed., Addison Wesley. Nettle, M. and Hopkins, D. (2003) Developing Grammar in Context: Grammar Reference and Practice (Intermediate), Cambridge University Press. 161

172 CCN2017 中 國 文 化 導 論 Introduction to Chinese Culture 程 度 2 學 分 3 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 50% 課 堂 習 作 50% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 科 目 主 要 介 紹 中 國 文 化 的 基 本 精 神 及 特 質, 簡 論 中 西 文 化 在 價 值 系 統 及 哲 學 觀 念 的 差 異 本 科 目 分 別 從 傳 統 政 治 社 會 倫 理 法 律 哲 學 宗 教 藝 術 美 學 等 多 方 面, 講 解 中 國 文 化 基 本 概 念 和 知 識 本 科 目 尤 重 引 導 學 生 運 用 所 學 的 中 國 文 化 知 識, 反 思 傳 統 思 想 和 價 值 對 今 日 生 活 的 影 響 同 學 須 就 不 同 的 文 化 議 題, 擬 定 研 究 課 題, 撰 寫 報 告 及 書 面 習 作, 體 會 中 國 文 化 的 特 質, 中 國 文 化 與 現 代 社 會 的 命 運 科 目 統 籌 小 組 在 籌 備 講 授 及 評 核 本 課 程 時, 須 參 照 相 關 的 課 程 內 容 藍 圖, 了 解 本 科 目 的 角 色 定 位, 如 何 在 課 程 層 面 上 協 助 學 生 達 到 預 期 的 學 習 成 果 學 習 成 果 學 生 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 應 能 : 了 解 中 西 方 文 化 的 基 本 不 同 ; 體 會 中 國 文 化 的 意 義 ; 學 習 從 上 層 及 下 層 的 不 同 角 度 欣 賞 中 國 文 化 ; 從 多 元 的 視 野 中, 分 析 中 國 文 化 的 要 義 及 特 點 ; 培 養 從 宏 觀 及 微 觀 的 角 度, 探 討 中 國 文 化 ; 從 日 常 生 活 中, 應 用 中 國 哲 學 及 文 化 的 知 識 課 程 內 容 中 國 文 化 的 要 義 何 謂 中 國 文 化? 研 究 文 化 的 方 法, 介 紹 當 代 中 外 學 者 對 中 國 文 化 的 看 法 家 國 同 構 的 倫 理 觀 長 幼 有 序, 內 外 有 別 同 心 圓 的 逐 層 放 大, 家 庭 倫 理 如 何 拓 展 為 國 家 秩 序, 成 為 中 國 社 會 的 普 遍 共 識 家 國 的 秩 序 : 中 國 禮 法 觀 念 傳 統 社 會 的 刑 法 禮 法 從 禮 到 法, 國 家 秩 序 的 需 要 如 何 在 社 會 共 識 上, 依 靠 國 家 權 力 而 建 立 162

173 中 國 宗 教 觀 從 儒 道 釋 三 家 人 生 觀 和 生 死 觀, 民 眾 信 仰 的 基 本 觀 念, 闡 明 中 國 上 層 和 下 層 的 兩 個 信 仰 世 界 中 國 美 學 思 想 中 國 人 的 傳 統 審 美 觀 念, 與 中 國 文 化 思 想 價 值 的 關 係 中 國 藝 術 傳 統 藝 術 的 基 本 特 點 及 欣 賞 中 國 地 理 觀 中 國 地 理 觀 從 古 代 的 天 下 到 近 代 的 萬 國 中 國 飲 食 文 化 中 國 南 北 飲 食 文 化 的 異 同, 飲 食 文 化 的 器 具 教 學 方 法 本 科 目 理 論 與 思 考 並 重, 除 了 於 課 堂 上 講 解 傳 統 文 化 的 特 質, 也 要 求 學 生 運 用 所 學 知 識, 反 思 傳 統 文 化 對 現 代 生 活 的 影 響 學 生 須 參 與 討 論 及 小 組 報 告, 進 一 步 活 用 傳 統 文 化 知 識 評 核 方 法 本 科 目 採 用 持 續 評 估 方 法, 學 生 須 撰 寫 學 期 論 文, 也 須 完 成 導 修 課 堂 小 組 報 告, 另 有 期 中 測 驗 及 期 末 考 試, 綜 合 檢 測 學 生 掌 握 本 科 目 的 水 平 每 班 的 教 學 計 劃 (Teaching Plan) 詳 述 個 別 習 作 佔 整 體 評 核 的 實 際 比 重 學 生 收 到 習 作 時, 均 會 獲 告 知 習 作 所 評 核 的 是 那 些 預 期 學 習 成 果 學 生 所 需 的 努 力 除 了 42 小 時 的 課 堂 講 授 外, 學 生 在 習 作 備 課 準 備 測 驗 及 考 試, 並 與 同 學 進 行 小 組 工 作 等 方 面 所 花 的 時 間, 預 期 約 為 84 小 時 指 定 課 本 葛 兆 光 : 古 代 中 國 文 化 講 義, 臺 北 : 三 民 書 局,2005 年 版 參 考 書 Craig, A. M. (2001) The Heritage of Chinese Civilisation, Prentice Hall. De Bary, W. T. (Eds). (2000) Sources of Chinese Tradition, Columbia University Press. Ebrey, P. B. (Eds.). (1993) Chinese Civilisation: A Sourcebook, The Free Press. Fairbank, J. K., Goldman, M. (Eds.). (1998) China: A New History, Harvard University. 163

174 王 力 編 : 中 國 古 代 文 化 史 講 座, 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,1989 年 版 余 英 時 : 歷 史 人 物 與 文 化 危 機, 上 海 人 民 出 版 社,1987 年 版 李 澤 厚 : 美 學 論 集, 台 北 : 三 民 書 局,1996 年 版 周 育 德 : 中 國 戲 曲 文 化, 中 國 友 誼 出 版 社,1995 年 版 香 港 城 市 大 學 中 國 文 化 中 心 編 : 中 國 文 化 導 讀, 香 港 城 市 大 學,2001 年 版 唐 君 毅 : 中 國 文 化 之 精 神 價 值, 廣 西 師 範 大 學 出 版 社,2005 年 版 黃 嫣 梨 : 文 史 十 五 講, 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2001 年 版 錢 穆 : 民 族 與 文 化, 東 大 圖 書 股 份 有 限 公 司,1989 年 版 龔 鵬 程 : 中 國 傳 統 文 化 十 五 講, 北 京 : 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2006 年 版 164

175 CCN2018 中 國 文 學 概 論 Introduction to Chinese Literature 程 度 2 學 分 3 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 或 普 通 話 講 授 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 條 件 無 評 估 方 法 60% 課 堂 習 作 40% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 科 目 透 過 課 堂 講 授 導 修 練 習 及 分 組 習 作 的 方 式, 訓 練 同 學 對 中 國 文 學 的 閱 讀 及 鑑 賞 能 力 透 過 掌 握 中 國 文 學 的 特 質, 同 學 可 明 瞭 文 學 與 社 會 生 活 的 關 係, 以 及 提 升 自 身 的 文 化 素 養 科 目 統 籌 小 組 在 籌 備 講 授 及 評 核 本 課 程 時, 須 參 照 相 關 的 課 程 內 容 藍 圖, 了 解 本 科 目 的 角 色 定 位, 如 何 在 課 程 層 面 上 協 助 學 生 達 到 預 期 的 學 習 成 果 學 習 成 果 學 生 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 應 能 : 認 識 中 國 文 學 各 種 文 體 的 特 點 ; 掌 握 中 國 文 學 的 流 變, 了 解 中 國 文 學 的 特 質 ; 有 效 運 用 各 種 閱 讀 文 本 的 方 法, 提 高 對 文 學 作 品 的 鑑 賞 能 力 ; 加 強 對 中 文 的 運 用, 培 養 中 國 文 化 修 養 ; 提 升 批 判 思 考 及 創 造 性 思 維 的 能 力 課 程 內 容 閱 讀 中 國 文 學 的 方 法 概 述 中 國 文 學 的 特 質, 並 介 紹 閱 讀 中 國 文 學 文 本 的 方 法 詩 言 志 探 討 文 本 與 作 者 的 關 係, 文 學 作 品 的 創 造 及 作 者 的 感 發 問 題 可 選 用 文 本 : 詩, 如 杜 甫 登 高 李 商 隱 無 題 八 歲 偷 照 鏡 等 中 國 文 學 的 情 探 究 中 國 文 學 的 重 要 特 質 情, 如 何 在 作 品 表 現 的 問 題 可 選 用 文 本 : 詩 詞 書 信 小 說, 如 元 好 問 雁 丘 詞 問 世 間 情 是 何 物 林 覺 民 與 妻 訣 別 書 張 愛 玲 傾 城 之 戀 等 文 以 載 道 探 討 文 學 與 社 會 的 關 係 講 解 文 學 作 品 如 何 承 載 社 會 課 題 可 選 用 文 本 : 詩 文, 如 杜 甫 新 婚 別 梁 啟 超 論 小 說 與 群 治 的 關 係 等 165

176 中 國 文 學 與 生 活 講 解 中 國 文 學 作 品 如 何 體 現 文 人 的 生 活 趣 味, 如 茶 酒 藥 旅 遊 與 文 學 作 品 可 選 用 文 本 : 詩 文 小 說, 如 陶 淵 明 飲 酒 劉 鶚 老 殘 遊 記 沈 從 文 湘 行 散 記 等 中 國 文 學 的 雅 與 俗 剖 析 雅 俗 這 對 概 念 與 中 國 文 學 的 關 係, 及 審 美 標 準 的 變 遷 等 問 題 可 選 用 文 本 : 詞 小 說 戲 曲, 如 羅 貫 中 三 國 演 義 王 實 甫 西 廂 記 金 庸 射 雕 英 雄 傳 等 教 學 方 法 本 科 目 理 論 與 實 踐 並 重 主 講 課 集 中 講 解 與 課 題 相 關 的 概 念 和 理 論, 導 修 課 為 學 生 提 供 相 關 的 課 堂 練 習, 如 口 頭 報 告 小 組 討 論 及 小 習 作 等, 以 鞏 固 所 學 本 科 目 採 用 材 料 廣 泛, 體 裁 眾 多, 古 今 兼 備 評 核 方 法 本 科 目 採 用 持 續 評 估 方 法, 分 別 從 學 生 的 口 頭 報 告 書 面 報 告 課 堂 參 與, 加 上 測 驗 和 考 試, 檢 測 學 生 掌 握 本 科 目 的 水 平 每 班 的 教 學 計 劃 (Teaching Plan) 詳 述 個 別 習 作 佔 整 體 評 核 的 實 際 比 重 學 生 收 到 習 作 時, 均 會 獲 告 知 習 作 所 評 核 的 是 那 些 預 期 學 習 成 果 學 生 所 需 的 努 力 除 了 42 小 時 的 課 堂 講 授 外, 學 生 在 習 作 備 課 準 備 測 驗 及 考 試, 並 與 同 學 進 行 小 組 工 作 等 方 面 所 花 的 時 間, 預 期 約 為 84 小 時 指 定 課 本 本 科 目 涉 及 的 參 考 材 料 較 廣 泛, 無 指 定 課 本 參 考 書 朱 自 清 : 朱 自 清 古 典 文 學 論 文 集, 上 海 古 籍 出 版 社,1981 年 版 青 木 正 兒 : 中 國 文 學 概 說, 莊 嚴 文 化,1981 年 版 徐 復 觀 : 中 國 文 學 精 神, 上 海 書 店 出 版 社,2004 年 版 葉 維 廉 : 中 國 詩 學, 人 民 文 學 出 版 社,2006 年 版 劉 大 杰 : 中 國 文 學 發 展 史, 百 花 文 藝 出 版 社,2007 年 版 鄭 振 鐸 : 中 國 俗 文 學 史, 上 海 人 民 出 版 社,2006 年 版 魯 迅 : 中 國 小 說 史 略, 三 聯 書 店,1996 年 版 龔 鵬 程 : 文 學 散 步, 漢 光 文 化 事 業 股 份 有 限 公 司,2003 年 版 166

177 CCN2019 Introduction to Communication Studies Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of seminars Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This course provides various communication models and theories for students to understand the human communication process. It develops their abilities and interests in evaluating the effectiveness of communication in different kinds of contexts ranging from self-concept to communication in mass media. It also helps students develop their creativity and problem-solving skills and prepares them to take more focused courses in communication such as media design and production. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify and explain models and theories that are relevant to the nature of human communication process apply communication models and theories, creativity and problem-solving skills to evaluate the effectiveness of self-communication, communication in personal relationships, communication in groups and communication in organisations suggest improvements on ineffective communications explain the role and impact of mass media on human communication apply the concept of equality and respect in modern communication Indicative Contents Fundamentals of Communication Importance of communication; Key elements of communication; Models of communication; Historical development of communication; Communication research; Equality and respect. Communication Theories Perceiving and understanding; Verbal and nonverbal communication; Listening and responding; Creating supportive communication climates; Adapting communication to cultures and social communities. Communication in Different Contexts Communication and self-concept Personal identity; Particular others and generalised others; Influence from family, peers and society; Ways to build up self-esteem. 167

178 Communication in Personal Relationships Passion and commitment; Relationship dialectics. Communication in Groups and Teams Definitions of groups and teams; Limitations and strengths of groups; Four kinds of communication in groups (Task, procedural, climate and egocentric); Conflict management. Communication in Organisations Definition of an organisation; Different elements of organisational culture; Functions of organisational communication. Mass Communication Nature of mass communication; Historical development of mass media; Different theories of mass communication (Hypodermic Needle Model, Uses and Gratification, Agenda Setting, Cultivation); Media literacy. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of communication theories with specific reference to examples from local daily life. Students will have the chance to discuss and reflect on communication dialogues. Seminars will deepen students' understanding of the theories by engaging them in more active learning tasks. Students will be provided the opportunity to watch videos of simulated communication contexts and to discuss the effectiveness of communication in those particular contexts. They will also have the chance to share their analyses and suggestions with classmates. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group projects and presentations, written reports, case studies, test(s) and examination(s) designed to develop and assess students' achievement of the subject s expected learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, quizzes and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Wood, L.T. (2011) Communication Mosaics: an Introduction to the Field of Communication, 6 th Ed., Wadsworth. 168

179 References Baran, S. (2010) Introduction to Mass Communication: Media Literacy and Culture, 6 th Ed., McGraw- Hill. Devito, J. A. (2012) Human Communication: the Basic Course, 12 th Ed., Pearson-Education. Folkerts, J., Lacy, S. (2007) The Media in Your Life: An Introduction to Mass Communication, 4 th Ed., Pearson-Education. Gamble, T. K., M. Gamble. (2010) Communication Works, 10 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Hybels, S., Richard L. W. (2012) Communicating Effectively, 10 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. 169

180 CCN2020 哲 學 概 論 Introduction to Philosophy Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours lectures 14 hours tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides a solid foundation of knowledge for Eastern and Western philosophy and further equips students with a basic understanding of the scope and the meaning of philosophy. The course aims to demonstrate the importance of philosophical reflection on things that matter in life, such as knowledge, the nature of mind, rationality, god, moral values, art, human identity and the meaning of life. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the scope and meaning of philosophy grasp the basic characteristics of both western and eastern philosophy, and also their main differences understand the basic methods and problems in philosophy, and appreciate the works of philosophers apply the philosophical theories in analysing students own situation and develop their plausible worldview Indicative Contents The Nature of Philosophy The different branches of philosophy; The meaning of philosophy; The significance of philosophical reflection. Metaphysics The existence of God; Personal identity; Mind and body; Free will and determinism. Epistemology Skepticism; The nature of knowledge; Theories of truth; Theories of meaning. Ethics Ethical absolutism and relativism; Different types of normative theories; The meaning of life. Eastern philosophy Confucius; Mencius; Taoism; Buddhism. 170

181 Western philosophy Rationalism, Empiricism; Pragmatism; Existentialism. The Differences between Eastern and Western philosophy An elementary outline on the differences between Eastern and Western philosophy. Teaching/Learning Approach Learning philosophy is a matter of acquiring not so much a body of information but skills to reflect on concepts and their relations in a critical manner. The lectures will provide students with a basic understanding of some of the major philosophical fields, figures and topics. Students will be encouraged to criticise those ideas, develop their own views and defend them with rigorous reasoning. Discussions and debates will be conducted in tutorial lessons to sharpen the students philosophising ability. Moreover, a number of films will be used as examples for discussing philosophical ideas. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, group projects, book reading reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 hours of class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Nagel, T. (2004) What Does It All Mean? A Very Short Introduction to Philosophy, Oxford University Press. Pojman, L. (2007) Introduction to Philosophy: Classical and Contemporary Readings, 4 th Ed., Oxford University Press. References Blackburn, S. (2001) Think: A Compelling Introduction to Philosophy, Oxford University Press. Hosphers, J. (1996) An Introduction to Philosophical Analysis, 4 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Warburton, N. (2004) Philosophy: The Basics, 4 th Ed., Routledge Press. Rahula, W. (1974) What the Buddha Taught, Grove Press. 勞 思 光 : 新 編 中 國 哲 學 史, 三 民 書 局,1999 年 版 171

182 CCN2021 Introduction to Political Science Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to develop students knowledge and understanding of the basic concepts of politics and political science with reference to current issues. It gives students a broader outlook on the world through an appreciation of different political systems and the relationship between individuals and the state. It equips students with analytical skills to apply the concepts learnt into examining the politics of Hong Kong, the greater China and the rest of the world. The interplay between government institutions and the informal actors are also introduced. This subject also aims to nurture in students attitudes that are conducive to their participation in political and social affairs as active and responsible citizens. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand and discuss the multi-faceted concepts in political science acquire the knowledge of the underlining operation of political dynamics analyse current affairs with reference to conceptual frameworks of political science outline the political development of Hong Kong, the Greater China and Western democracies Indicative Contents Basic Concepts Politics; Political sciences; Political power; Authority; Legitimacy; Nation; State; Sovereignty; Ideology; Democracy; Liberty; Political culture; Bureaucracy. Government Structure Constitution; Legislature; Executive and civil services; Judiciary. Informal Actors Political parties; Interest groups; Mass media; Public opinion; Social movement. Political Issues Democratisation; Political development, Hong Kong political reform; the Basic Law; Election. International Relations Cold War; Post-Cold War; Globalisation; International political economy and international institutions. 172

183 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will expound the concepts and applications of theories and approaches illustrated by current issues. Audio-visual materials will be used during lectures whenever necessary to facilitate learning and to consolidate students understanding of topics. Tutorials will be conducted with small group presentations and issue-based learning. Off campus observation and interview will be used as one of the methods to enhance students interest of the subject matters and to consolidate the knowledge learnt. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools, such as presentations, a field research project, a term paper, tests, and an examination, will be applied to assess the knowledge assimilated, and the analytical and critical thinking ability. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, field observation, test (s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Roskin, M. G. et al. (2010) Political Science: An Introduction, 11 th Ed., Pearson Education Inc. Heywood, A. (2007) Politics, 3 rd Ed., Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. References Sing, M. (Ed.). (2003) Hong Kong Government and Politics, Oxford University Press. Lam, W. M. et al. (2007) Contemporary Hong Kong Politics: Governance in the Post-1997 Era, Hong Kong University Press. Ma, N. (2007) Political Development in Hong Kong: State, Political Society, and Civil Society, Hong Kong University Press. 173

184 CCN2022 Japanese II Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction Japanese, supplemented with English and/or Cantonese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN1019 Japanese I, or a minimum 42 hours training in Japanese and/or an equivalent level of proficiency in Japanese, which must be supported by an official document Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This foundation course is basically a continuation of CCN1019 Japanese I. It aims to further develop and reinforce students competence in correct pronunciations, different writing systems, vocabulary, sentence structures and grammar, as well as daily conversations through more reading, writing, speaking and listening practices of the Japanese language. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: pronounce, read and write Katakana, and other new sounds develop a cumulative vocabulary pool of about 1,000 words (including Kanji, commonly used expressions and phrases) acquire a fundamental knowledge of Japanese grammar and sentence patterns at the elementary level speak simple Japanese phrases and sentences to initiate and respond in situational conversations at the elementary level read and understand short passages by mastering all Japanese characters, namely Hiragana, Katakana, and Kanji cultivate a preliminary understanding of Japanese culture Indicative Contents Phonetic and Writing Systems All vowels and consonants in their Katakana forms; More new sounds and their corresponding Katakana practices. Vocabulary/ Reading/ Writing Essential daily vocabulary (e.g. location and position, different counters and counting methods); Read short dialogues and passages; Writing basic sentences in correct word order. Grammar More verbs (e.g. transitive, give, receive), state verbs (e.g. understand, like); Present/past tense form, affirmative/negative form and verb conjugations; Expressions of existence; Adjectives and conjugations; Comparative and superlative structure; More particles. 174

185 Speaking/ Listening Substitution, transformation and expansion drills; Situational conversations (e.g. pay a visit to someone, invitation and decline, shopping, sightseeing, ordering); Simple listening comprehension practice. Culture/ Society Selected topics on Japanese culture and society. Teaching/Learning Approach This course will reinforce students acquisition of correct Japanese sounds and to master the Katakana writing system. Through direct drills, practices and activities in classes, students will participate actively in the learning process. A multimedia approach will be adopted whereby students will be exposed to audio and visual materials to enhance their understanding of the Japanese language and culture. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including written assignments, group projects, written reports, quizzes, tests and examination(s) designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as communication skills in the Japanese language. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for quizzes, projects, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 : 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I ( みんなの 日 本 語 ), 大 新 書 局,2011 年 版 References 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 : 日 語 假 名 習 字 簿, 向 日 葵 出 版 社,2010 年 版 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 : 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 ( 讀 本 篇 ), 大 新 書 局,2010 年 版 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 : 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 句 型 練 習 冊 ), 大 新 書 局,2011 年 版 大 新 書 局 出 版 社 編 輯 部 : 大 家 的 日 本 語 初 級 I, II ( 練 習 C 会 話 イラストシート), 大 新 書 局,2007 年 版 向 日 葵 出 版 社 編 : 日 本 語 90 日 1 (90 Days of Japanese Language 1), 向 日 葵 出 版 社,2010 年 版 175

186 CCN2023 Light, Man and Environment Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with basic knowledge on the importance of light to our living and work, and on the parameters affecting human s perception on the natural and built environment. It provides students with analytical skills to appraise the natural and built environment based on human biological, psychological and physiological needs. With a better understanding of the interrelationship between light, human and the environment, students will be able to develop their ability in suggesting ways of improvement for the benefits of human and the environment. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the nature of light and compare the properties of natural and artificial light sources give an account of the parameters used to describe the natural and built environment identify the interrelationship between light, human and the environment explain the requirements of environmental parameters to satisfy human biological, psychological and physiological needs Indicative Contents Lighting Quantities and Terminologies Quantities for measurement of light and colour; Terminologies used to describe human vision. Overview of Natural and Artificial Light Sources Daylight availability; Working principles and photometric characteristics of artificial light sources. Human Senses Sensation, perception and environmental stimuli; Non-linearity and power law; Subjective sensory perception; Visual sense and the eyes; Aural sense and the ears; Skin senses of heat and cold. Natural Environment Climate classification; Meteorological data: wind, temperature, precipitation, humidity, solar angles, direct and diffuse solar radiation, sun-path diagrams, etc; Interaction with the built environment. Built Environment Human requirements; Thermal comfort issues; Sound and noise control; Indoor air quality; Natural ventilation. 176

187 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures and tutorials will constitute the delivery of this subject. Lectures will aim at delivering the basic knowledge of theories and facts which will lead to the achievement of all intended learning outcomes. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to enhance their problem-solving ability. Activities in tutorials will normally include problem-solving exercises, case studies, and presentations, which will facilitate learning to achieve all intended learning outcomes. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Chadderton, D. V. (2007) Building Services Engineering, 5 th Ed., Taylor & Francis. References HK-BEAM Society (2005) Enhancing Hong Kong s Built Environment, HK-BEAM Society. Goldstein, E. B. (2010) Sensation and Perception, 8 th Ed., Wadsworth Cengage Learning. Phillips, D. (2000) Lighting Modern Buildings, Architectural Press. Valberg, A. (2005) Light, Vision, Color, John Wiley & Sons. 177

188 CCN2024 Logic and Reasoning Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN1004 Creative and Critical Thinking or CCN1035 The Art of Reasoning or CCN1036 Creative and Design Thinking or equivalent Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject introduces students to the vocabulary and grammar of logic, and enables them to master the basic techniques to determine the validity of arguments. It equips students with the ability of logical reasoning and makes them critically aware of fallacies in everyday reasoning. It also cultivates students appreciation of logic and reasoning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise arguments presented in natural language apply logical techniques in assessing reasoning both in everyday life and in academic pursuits become more critically aware of fallacies in everyday reasoning Indicative Contents Logic and Reasoning The nature and uses of logic; Logic and arguments; Arguments and reasoning; Distinction between deductive logic and inductive logic. Propositional Logic The concept of proposition; Logical connectives and truth functions; Analysis of arguments by means of logical symbols; Rules of natural deduction; The truth-table method and the short-cut method. Predicate Logic Predicates and quantifiers; Translating a sentence into predicate symbols; The use of natural deduction to prove the validity of an argument. Applications of Logic and Reasoning Analysis and evaluation of logical reasoning in western philosophy; Analysis and evaluation of logical reasoning in Chinese philosophy; Analysis and evaluation of logical reasoning in advertisements. 178

189 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and rules of logic and reasoning illustrated with examples. Students will be required to do exercises after the lectures, so as to ensure that they can apply the concepts and the rules. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of logical techniques. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations, discussions of problems, and doing exercises. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assignments, group projects, presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students grip of logical concepts and techniques and their ability of applying these concepts and techniques to everyday reasoning. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 hours of class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Hurley, P. (2011) A Concise Introduction to Logic, 11 th Ed., Thomson Wadsworth. References Copi, I., Cohen, C. & McMahon, Kenneth. (2011) Introduction to Logic, 14 th Ed., Pearson Education. Fisher, A. (2004) The Logic of Real Arguments, Cambridge University Press. Thomas, S. N. (1997) Practical Reasoning in Natural Language, 4 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 馮 耀 明 : 公 孫 龍 子, 東 大,2000 年 版 179

190 CCN2025 Love, Intimacy and Identity Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Assessment Nil 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to introduce the theoretical frameworks and research findings on love and intimacy, as well as examining their roles in identity formation of individuals. Students are expected to understand the issues concerned with reference to the significant evolutions over time and drastic changes in social structures. This subject also provides a general orientation of personal growth, so that students can develop healthy and positive social relationships with others. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: elaborate different approaches to defining and measuring love analyse the nature of intimacy on various levels of social relationships explain the formation of self-identity from the perspectives of personality, life-span development, feminism, law, and media reflect on various practical concerns and social phenomena based on the dynamic interaction of love, intimacy and self-identities of different individuals Indicative Contents Basic Dynamics of Interpersonal Attraction Development of relationship science; Varieties of relationships; Proximity, physical attractiveness, similarity and reciprocity; Research findings on cultural and gender differences on mate selection. Conceptualisation of Love Sternberg s Triangular Theory of Love; Lee s six styles of love; Scientific measurements of love; Attachment styles in love relationships; Love and marriage over the history and under different social structures; Problematic aspects of love (including obsession and mismatched love styles). Nature of Intimacy Building blocks of closeness (verbal and non-verbal communication); Exchange versus communal relationships; Effective strategies to enhance relationships; Constructive coping styles in relationship loss; Intimate relationship issues and related research findings (including jealousy, conflict, and loneliness). 180

191 Formation of Identity Different aspects of self-identity; Bio-psycho-social processes of identity development; Theoretical views on gender and sexual identities; The Feminist Revolution; Media, gender stereotypes and identity; Psychological adjustments on identity transformations. Current Issues and Social Problems Marriage laws and related social welfare or resources planning; Sexual harassment and gender politics; Sexual Liberation Movement and moral implications concerned (e.g., sexual orientations and cyber-sex practices); Complexities in conceptualising disorders related to relationship difficulties or identity maladjustments; Ethical principles in sex education. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions on various case studies, newspapers, films and TV commercials may be arranged to stimulate students interest or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. The Experiential learning approach will be adopted in debate sessions, simulation exercises, role-plays and so on to let students reflect on their personal values and real life experiences. Assessment Approach In order to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical abilities and communication skills, a variety of assessment tools will be used, including case studies, self-reflection paper, journal review or critique, test(s) and a final examination. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Miller, R. S. and Perlman, D. (2012) Intimate Relationships, 6 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Higher Education. References Berscheid, E. and Regan, P. (2005) The Psychology of Interpersonal Relationships, Pearson Education. Firestone, R. W., Firestone, L. A. and Catlett, J. (2006) Sex and Love in Intimate Relationships, American Psychological Association. Gauntlett, D. (2008) Media, Gender and Identity: An Introduction, 2 nd Ed., Routledge. 181

192 CCN2026 Mass Media and Culture Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English, supplemented with Chinese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides an introductory survey of mass media and its effects on culture, in particular in Hong Kong society. It enables students to understand and apply relevant concepts in cultural and media theory, and identify the relationship between media and cultural production across various mass media including television, newspaper, and the Internet, especially within the context of Hong Kong. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: apply concepts in cultural and media theories compare and contrast the nature of various types of mass media and their potential effects on the individual and society identify the relationship between media and cultural production, especially within the context of Hong Kong Indicative Contents The Process and Functions of Mass Communication The SMCR model; Mass communication and its characteristics; Five social functions of mass media. Newspapers The case of Apple Daily; Multiple definitions of news; Gatekeeping; Framing; Agenda-setting; Implications of the study of news production. Television History and significance of television; Regulation of television; The idea of public service broadcasting; Principles and crisis facing public service broadcasting. Internet and the Era of New Media Significance of Internet; Internet as new media; Study of the impact of Internet; Global village; Double-edged sword. Media Influences Media s tremendous and limited effects; Micro- and macro- level media s impacts; Social learning theory; Observational learning. 182

193 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will provide students the opportunity to learn concepts through a variety of media, including books, lecture PowerPoint s, videos, newspaper cuttings, and the Internet. By exposing students to the mass media as they are used and consumed in modern societies, the subject will help students draw connections between theoretical concepts and real world applications. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, projects, case studies, class exercises, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Chan, A. (2010) Understanding Media and Culture, 2 nd Ed., McGraw Hill. References Baran, S. J. (2012) Introduction to Mass Communication: Media Literacy and Culture, 7 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Dominick, J. R. (2011) The Dynamics of Mass Communication: Media in Transition, 11 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Wilson, J. R. and Wilson, S. L. (1998) Mass Media/Mass Culture: An Introduction, 4 th Ed., McGraw Hill. 183

194 CCN2027 Oral Communication in English Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims The main purpose of this subject is to help students develop their oral skills in English. It aims at enhancing their English pronunciation, eloquence and communication skills. It also helps students increase their confidence in spoken English and raise their awareness of their own language learning strategies. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: use the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and pronunciation rules to improve their accuracy in spoken English apply skills and strategies to communicate fluently in interpersonal, group, and public situations analyse the effectiveness of communication in interpersonal, group, and public situations increase their awareness and confidence in their ability to communicate orally in English Indicative Contents English Pronunciation International Phonetic Alphabet (the IPA system); Features of English consonant and vowel sounds; Pronunciation patterns; Syllables; Stress; Intonation; Linking. Interpersonal Communication Communication and relationship development; Interpersonal communication in school life, social life, and business life. Group Communication Problem-solving process; Teamwork skills. Public Communication Organising presentation content; Improving delivery techniques; Types of delivery; Overcoming presentation fear. Teaching/Learning Approach The emphasis of lectures will be placed on acquiring knowledge and strategies to enhance students communication skills in English. Through in-class activities and out-of-class assignments, students will 184

195 build fluency and confidence in their oral English production. They will also be exposed to audio-visual recordings of interpersonal, group, and public communication, thus developing the ability to critique examples which will serve as another means for them to internalise the knowledge and techniques of the subject. Some tutorials will be conducted in the language laboratory, where students will make use of audiovisual materials and the Internet to reinforce the accuracy of their spoken English. Assessment Approach Assessment tools will mostly be speaking tasks, including mini-presentations, quizzes, role plays, speeches and reflections to assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills, including verbal and non-verbal communication skills in English. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and quizzes. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Grant, L. (2010) Well Said: Pronunciation for Clear Communication, 3 rd Learning. Ed., Heinle Cengage References Anderson, K., Maclean, J. and Lynch, T. (2004) Study Speaking: A Course in Spoken English for Academic Purposes, 2 nd Ed., Cambridge University Press. Hancock, M. (2003) English Pronunciation in Use, Cambridge University Press. Hybels, S. and Weaver II, R. L. (2011) Communicating Effectively, 10 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. 185

196 CCN2028 Products and Materials in Modern Society Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims to introduce students the availability of various engineering materials and their characteristics. It gives students an understanding of the applications and selections of engineering materials based on the consideration of product design, properties, cost, and their in-service performance. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the fundamentals of materials science and engineering conduct simple engineering analysis of the relationships between material properties and their possible applications appraise the applications of advanced materials technology in their daily life apply relevant scientific and engineering knowledge to enhance their understanding of the impact of materials technology on society Indicative Contents Materials Availability and Selection Evolution of engineering materials; Materials in design; Engineering materials and their properties; Price and availability; Materials selection criteria. Fundamentals of Materials Structure and phase diagrams; Methods of strengthening; Mechanical properties of engineering materials; Mechanical properties testing; Structure and properties relationship. Design against Fracture and Degradation Ductile and brittle fracture; Stress intensity factor approach; Fatigue, creep, corrosion, and wear; Design against fracture and degradation; Examples of component failure in engineering. Applications and Selection of Engineering Materials Ferrous and non-ferrous alloys; Commodity and engineering plastics; Engineering ceramics and composites; Sources of material property data; Performance indices (based on Ashby s analysis); Materials selection charts; Performance maximising criteria. 186

197 Advanced Materials and High Technology Products Composite materials; Nanotechnology; Biomaterials; Smart materials; Technological impacts of advanced materials on society. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Worksheets may also be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complex theories. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and examination(s) designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Callister, W. D. and Rethwisch, D. G. (2010) Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, 8 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. References Ashby, M. and Johnson, K. (2010) Materials and Design: The Art and Science of Material Selection in Product Design, 2 nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann. Cresswell, L., Attwood, J., Goodier, A. and Lambert, B. (2004) Product Design: Graphics with Materials Technology, 2 nd Ed., Heinemann. Pradeep, T. (2008) Nano: The Essentials: Understanding Nanoscience and Nanotechnolgy, McGraw-Hill. 187

198 CCN2029 Professionals and the Society Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject enables students to learn about the roles of professionals in real-life situations and their responsibilities towards the profession, colleagues, employers, clients and the public. It facilitates students to appreciate the historical context of modern technology and the nature of the process whereby technology develops. It also enables students to describe the social, political, and economic impact of technology on society. It helps students appreciate the effects of the development of technology relating to economy, legislation, people s livelihood, safety, health and environment and the implied social costs and benefits. In addition, it provides students information about professional conduct and the legal and moral constraints relating to professions. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe different types of intellectual property protection and to evaluate the impacts of modern technology on development in education, business, profession and the society identify the importance of professional conduct and responsibilities in various professional activities identify the effects on the development of technology relating to economy, legislation, people s livelihood, safety and health, environment and welfare of the public in real life cases interpret the academic, training and professional requirements of local and overseas professional institutions work responsibly, effectively and appropriately as an individual and as part of a group Indicative Contents Technology and Profession Impacts of technology on Society innovation and creativity; The history and trend of technology on the development of society and profession. Industries The outlook of Hong Kong s industries; Its supporting organisations and impact on development from the China Market; Intellectual property rights, protection and the enforcement organisations; Basic Contract law for professionals. Occupational Safety and Health Occupational safety and health including the work of the Labour Department and the Occupational Health and Safety Council; Legislation on occupational safety and health. 188

199 Environment Environmental protection and related issues; Roles of professionals in energy conservation, ecological balance and sustainable development. Professionalism Local and overseas professional institutions and education systems; Qualification and criteria of professionals. Legislation and Codes of Ethics Professional ethics and legislation; Bribery and corruption including the work of the Independent Commission Against Corruption (ICAC); Social responsibilities of professionals. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of essential knowledge and information on the relationship between society and professionals. Current issues and relevant topics may be used to stimulate students interest or their awareness of the relationship in real-life cases. Some lectures may be delivered by guest speakers. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding on the relationship. Activities will normally include case studies, discussions, group projects, report writing, presentations or other activities for students to synthesise and apply the acquired knowledge, some of which may be acquired from relevant newspapers, magazines and journals. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, such as case studies, presentations, written reports, test(s) and an examination, to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Hjorth, L. S., Eichler, B. A., Khan, A. S. and Morello, J. A. (2003) Technology and Society: A Bridge to the 21 st Century, 2 nd Ed., Prentice Hall. References Harris, C. E., Pritchard, M. S. and Rabins, M. J. (2008) Engineering Ethics: Concepts and Cases, 4 th Ed., Wadsworth Cengage Learning. 189

200 Herkert, J. R. (1999) Social, Ethical and Policy Implications of Engineering: Selected Readings, Wiley- IEEE Press. Martin, M. W. and Schinzinger, R. (2005) Ethics in Engineering, 4 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Winston, M. E. and Edelbach, R. D. (2012) Society, Ethics and Technology, 4 th Ed., Wadsworth. Parkin, M. (2012) Economics, 10 th Ed., Pearson Education. 190

201 CCN2030 Social Development in China Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject provides students with an overview of the general social development in China after 1949, and a basic understanding of the important issues involved. It guides students to consider some basic theories relevant to explaining social development in China and certain commonly-held views concerning China s development experience. It also guides students to begin examining the dilemmas and controversies in social development in China. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: outline an overview of the general social development in China after 1949 identify important issues in the course of social development in China describe some basic theories to explain China s development experience analyse selected issues of social development in China identify the dilemmas and controversies in the contemporary social development of China Indicative Contents Development and Environment Modernisation; Economic reform; Rural industrialisation; Environment and sustainable development. Employment and State Enterprise Reform Danwei; Privatisation; State enterprise reform; Changing employment structure; Unemployment; Social security. Growing Social Inequality Social classes in transformation; Globalisation; Dualistic development; Rural poverty and rural unrest. Population and Social Issues Population policy; Rural-urban population flow; Aging, Changing family structure; Gender equality; Democratisation. 191

202 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on explaining concepts and theories as well as outlining the key issues of social development in China. They will be delivered, whenever necessary, with the aid of audio-visual materials and actual research reports. In tutorials, students will be divided into small groups to conduct presentations of their seminar presentation projects on selected issues. Case studies will also be used in tutorial to discuss on dilemma and controversies faced by China in her course of social development. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports and term essays all designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials and assignments. Indicative Reading Recommended Textbooks Mok, K. H. (2000) Social and Political Development in Post-Reform China, Macmillan Press. 林 貢 欽 : 衝 突 vs. 和 諧 : 中 國 社 會 發 展 的 困 惑, 天 地 圖 書 有 限 公 司,2009 年 版 References Bray, D. (2005) Social Space and Governance in Urban China: The Danwei System from Origins to Reform, Stanford University Press. MacPherson, S. and Wong, H. K. (Eds). (1998) Social Development and Societies in Transition, Ashgate. Meisner, M. J. (1999) Mao s China and After: A History of the People s Republic, Free Press. 郭 繼 嚴 主 編 : 中 國 社 會 發 展 藍 皮 書, 雲 南 人 民 出 版 社,1996 年 版 張 德 勝 : 思 入 風 雲 : 現 代 中 國 的 思 想 發 展 與 社 會 變 遷, 巨 流 圖 書 公 司,1997 年 版 192

203 CCN2031 Statistics Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject equips students with various statistical skills that are necessary for solving decision problems under uncertainty in social science, business, reliability, management science, and other similar fields of endeavour. It provides students with an understanding on how data are collected, summarised, presented, analysed, and interpreted. The subject also helps develop student develop their critical thinking and analytic skills for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: develop the abilities in data presentation using statistical packages such as R apply appropriate statistical methods to solve practical problems under uncertainty in social science, business, reliability, management science, and other similar fields of endeavour decide which methods can be used to collect, describe and present data analyse data and interpret the results for making recommendations relate probability theories to solve real life problems Indicative Contents Data Presentation using Statistical Packages Basic statistical terms; Types of data; Scales of Measurement; Use of tables and plots to summarise categorical and numerical data; Measures of central tendency; Measures of variation; Description of the properties of central tendency, variation, and shape in numerical data. Counting Methods and Probability Law Permutations and combinations; Probability Laws: addition law, multiplicative law and complement law; Conditional probability; Statistical independence; Collective exhaustive; Bayes Theorem. Probability Distribution Discrete and continuous random variables; Probability mass function; Probability density function; Expected value and variance; Binomial and Poisson probability distribution; Normal distribution and Normal approximations. Sampling Distribution Sampling distribution of mean and proportion; Central limit theorem; Probability problems involving sampling distribution; Sampling methods; Sampling and non-sampling errors. 193

204 Interval Estimation Point estimation; Confidence interval and its interpretation; Underlying assumptions; Sample size determination. Hypothesis Testing Hypothesis testing procedures using critical value approach; Z test; t test; Underlying assumptions. Multiple Regression Model description; Estimation of parameters; Properties of estimates; Prediction; Underlying assumptions. Teaching/Learning Approach The lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key statistical concepts. Emphasis is on problem formulation, problem solving skills, assumptions, and interpretation. Occasional group discussions will be conducted. The tutorials will provide students with opportunities to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in the lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life social science /business/engineering/industrial problems. The activities in tutorials will normally include discussions of problems sets. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including interactions between teacher and students, group discussions, assignments, tests and examination(s) designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and interpersonal skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and revisions for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Mario F. Triola (2012) Elementary Statistics Technology Update: International Edition, 11 th Pearson Higher Education. Ed., References Michael Sullivan (2010) Statistics: Informed Decisions Using Data, 3 rd Ed., Pearson Higher Education. Robert R. Johnson (2012) Elementary Statistics International Edition, 11 th Ed., BrooksCole. Allan Bluman (2011) Elementary Statistics: A Step By Step Approach, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. 194

205 CCN2032 The History and Culture of East Asia Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This is an interdisciplinary subject designed to introduce students to the history and culture of East Asia, in particular China, Korea and Japan. This subject also explores the similarities and differences between China, Korea and Japan in the contexts of their historical and cultural developments. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the historical and cultural divergences of different countries in East Asia appreciate the multiple perspectives with which people view East Asian historical and cultural developments analyse the complex interplay between the culture, society and history of an East Asian country demonstrate an ability of independent judgment on present-day East Asian cultural practices and social institutions apply different concepts and theories to the analysis of modern social and cultural issues in East Asia develop a lifelong interest in reading and studying East Asia Indicative Contents The Concept of East Asia The geographical and cultural definitions of East Asia; The needs for historical and cultural understandings; The Sinoshpere; A brief introduction of present-day China, Korea and Japan. The Historical Development The relationship of China, Korea and Japan from the seventh to the tenth century A.D.; The kentōshi diplomatic envoys sent to China from Japan; Cultural exchanges between China, Korea and Japan prior to the nineteenth century A.D.; Reforms and wars in East Asia after the nineteenth century; The Second World War ( ) in East Asia. The Division of North and South Korea Colonisation of the Korean peninsula by the Japanese in the twentieth century; The Korean War ( ); The politics and society of South and North Korea after the Korean War. The Economic Development in Historical and Cultural Contexts The economic miracle in Japan; The bubble burst in Japan; The economic reform in China; The economic development in South Korea after the Korean War. 195

206 Women in East Asia The roles of women in ancient and modern East Asia; Gender in East Asia. Traditional Culture in East Asia Traditional performing arts; Cultural heritage; Ancient philosophical ideas and religions; Historical architecture; Languages and culture. Popular Culture in East Asia East Asian cinemas; Pop industries in Japan and Korea; The soft power of Japan, Korea and China; East Asian fashion. Teaching/Learning Approach An interactive approach will be adopted. Students will be required to actively participate in discussions and presentations. Audio and visual materials will also used to enhance students understanding of the teaching contents. Students will be divided into groups, and each group will present a topic on the history and/or culture of East Asia. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including case studies, written reports, individual assignments, presentations, tests and an examination designed to assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings References Barnes, G. L. (1993) China, Korea and Japan: The Rise of Civilisation in East Asia, Thames & Hudson. Bowman, J. S. (2000) Columbia Chronologies of Asian History and Culture, Columbia University Press. Brødsgaard, K. (Ed.). (2001) State Capacity in East Asia: China, Taiwan, Vietnam, and Japan, An edition of the 1 st Ed., Oxford University Press. Chang, S. J. (2006) Financial Crisis and Transformation of Korean Business Groups: The Rise and Fall of the Chaebols, Cambridge University Press. Chun, A., Rossiter N. and Shoesmith, B. (Eds.). (2004) Refashioning Pop Music In Asia: Cosmopolitan Flows, Political Tempos, And Aesthetic Industries, RoutledgeCurzon. Clyde, P. H. and Beers, B. F. (1991) The Far East: A History of Western Impacts and Eastern Responses, , 6 th Ed., Prentice-Hall. 196

207 Cumings, B. (2005) Korea s Place in the Sun: A Modern History, Updated Edition, Norton. Fairbank, J. K., Reischauer, E. O. and Craig, A. M. (1989) East Asia: Tradition and Transformation, Revised Edition, Houghton Mifflin. Hall, J. W. (1995) Japan: From Prehistory To Modern Times, Charles E. Tuttle Company. Hsü, I. C. Y. (1999) The Rise of Modern China, 6 th Ed., Oxford University Press. Jackson, A., Gibb, M. and White, D. (Eds). (2006) How East Asian Films Are Reshaping National Identities: Essays On The Cinemas Of China, Japan, South Korea, And Hong Kong, Edwin Mellen Press. Jansen, M. B. (2000) The Making Of Modern Japan, Belknap Press of Harvard University Press. Murphey, R. (2009) East Asia: A New History, 5 th Ed., Pearson Longman. Penkala, M. (1970) Correlated History of the Far East, C. E. Tuttle. Shin, D. M. (2003) Social And Economic Policies In Korea: Ideas, Networks And Linkages, RoutledgeCurzon. Steinhardt, N. S. (1999) Chinese Imperial City Planning, University of Hawaii Press. Steven, C. S. (2008) Japanese Popular Music, Routledge. von Verschuer, C. Japan s foreign relations A.D. A translation from Zenrin Kokuhōki. Monumenta Nipponica Vol. 54 No. 1:1-39. 董 向 榮 : 南 韓 : 創 造 奇 蹟, 香 港 城 市 大 學 出 版 社,2009 年 版 梁 英 明 : 近 現 代 東 亞 文 化, 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,1995 年 版 余 定 邦, 喻 常 心 編 : 近 現 代 中 國 與 東 亞 關 係 史, 中 山 大 學 出 版 社,1999 年 版 張 慧 智 李 敦 球 合 著 : 北 韓 : 神 秘 的 東 方 晨 曦 之 國, 香 港 城 市 大 學 出 版 社,2008 年 版 張 望 : 軍 國 主 義 復 活 了 嗎?, 星 克 爾 出 版 有 限 公 司,2006 年 版 Audio-visual materials Discovery Channel (produced) (2008) China Rises: A Documentary in Four Parts, Discovery Channel. National Geographic Channel (produced) (2007) Inside North Korea, National Geographic Video. Television Broadcasts Limited (produced) (27 March, 1995) Japanese Women, Television Broadcasts Limited. Williams, S. (dir.). (2007) China: A century of revolution, Zeitgeist Films Ltd. 電 視 廣 播 有 限 公 司 制 作 : 財 經 透 視 : 日 本 經 濟 之 從 傳 統 走 出 來, 電 視 廣 播 有 限 公 司,2004 年 10 月 24 日 版 香 港 電 台 制 作 : 鏗 鏘 集 : 韓 國 製 造, 電 視 廣 播 有 限 公 司,2002 年 9 月 30 日 版 香 港 電 台 制 作 : 鏗 鏘 集 : 戰 後 六 十 年 警 號, 電 視 廣 播 有 限 公 司,2005 年 8 月 8 日 版 197

208 唐 健 垣 主 講 : 香 港 城 市 大 學 中 國 文 化 中 心 藝 術 講 座 七 弦 古 琴 之 美, 香 港 城 市 大 學 中 國 文 化 中 心,1999 年 8 月 12 日 版 ( 七 弦 古 琴 %7COrightresult%7CX3?lang=eng&suite=pearl) 198

209 CCN2033 The History of Modern China Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject introduces students to the historical knowledge and analytical skills essential to understanding the evolvement of modern China. It familiarises students with key events and issues in China s history from the early 19th century to the present. It also provides students with a contextual framework for understanding major scholarly interpretations and debates. The subject also enhances students generic skills such as critical thinking and effective presentation of ideas. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand key events and issues in the history of modern China cultivate a sensitivity to the complexity of historical narratives concerning modern China develop competence in presenting ideas in coherent and well-structured form apply relevant concepts and interpretations of history to modern Chinese society foster a lifelong interest in learning about China after the completion of the course Indicative Contents Introduction: Approaches to Understanding Chinese History Basic geographical and ethnic facts of China; Variety of historical perspectives. The Coming of the West, Rebellions, and Reforms The tribute system and the treaty system; Cultural and economic clashes between China and the West; Reasons and impacts of the Opium War; The Taiping Rebellion; The Self-Strengthening Movement and its failure. The Republican Revolution and the Warlord Era Late Qing reform; Sun Yat-sen and the 1911 Revolution; Limited success of the 1911 Revolution; Warlordism. The May Fourth Movement and the Rise of the Chinese Communist Party Impact of Western cultures on Chinese intellectuals; Rise of modern Chinese nationalism; The early Chinese Communist Party and the rise of Mao Zedong. 199

210 The Sino-Japanese War and the Civil War Japanese aggression; The War of Resistance; Growth of the Communist Party during the war; The American interlude. The People s Republic of China Establishment of a new order; The Great Leap Forward; The Cultural Revolution; Economic reform and its problems; the protests of Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will introduce general historical background, important issues and major scholarly interpretations, supported by audio and video materials when appropriate. Discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interest in historical issues and the variety of historical narratives. Tutorials will adopt an interactive approach to help students deepen their understanding and explore further the issues and concepts taught in lectures. Activities in tutorials will normally include discussions and student presentations. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools could be used, including assignments, presentations, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and delivery skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test and examination. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Hsü, I. C. Y. (2000) The Rise of Modern China, 6 th Ed., Oxford University Press. ( 徐 中 約 : 中 國 近 代 史 上 下 冊, 香 港 中 文 大 學 出 版 社,2001 年 版 ) Vohra, R. (2000) China s Path to Modernisation: A Historical Review From 1800 to the Present, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. References Fairbank, J. K. and Goldman, M. (2006) China: A New History, 2 nd Ed., Belknap Press. Spence, J. (1999) The Search for Modern China, 2 nd Ed., W.W. Norton. 陳 永 發 : 中 國 共 產 革 命 七 十 年, 臺 北 : 聯 經 出 版 事 業 公 司,2001 年 ( 修 訂 版 ) 200

211 郭 廷 以 : 近 代 中 國 史 綱, 香 港 : 香 港 中 文 大 學 出 版 社,1986 年 ( 第 3 版 ) 張 玉 法 : 中 國 現 代 史, 東 華 書 局,2001 年 ( 增 訂 9 版 ) 201

212 CCN2034 The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject is designed to familiarise students with a primary and systematic understanding of the basic differences and similarities between Chinese and Western cultures through the comparative study of selected themes such as religious, philosophical and ethical thinking. The study of cultural interaction is intended to help students acquire a broad range of cultural knowledge through which a deeper bicultural consciousness can be cultivated. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the differences and similarities of Eastern and Western ways of thinking become more sensitive to different cultural novelties and distinctiveness analyse critically the strengths and weaknesses of the Eastern and Western thoughts adapt the interaction between the Chinese and Western cultures in society nowadays Indicative Contents The Conceptions and Definitions of Eastern and Western Cultures Concepts and definition of culture in Eastern and Western perspectives; Representations of the East and the West. Language and Communication Language and the society; Accent and class; Tone and gender; Greetings and manners; The difference between verbal and body languages in the East and West. Religious Belief The conception of heaven and hells in the different religions; The life and thoughts of Jesus and Buddha; The rise of different religions; The impact of religion in Hong Kong and the world. Human Relationship The conception on relationship in the East and West; The difference between Eastern and Western conceptions on family relationship; The secret of having good and happy relationship in Eastern and Western cultures. 202

213 Gender and Sexuality The rise of feminism in modern western society; Ancient Chinese representations of Chinese womanhood; Different attitudes toward sex and gender; Sex education in the East and West; Cultural Relativism. The Conceptions of Beauty The concepts of beauty in the East and West; The ancient and modern representations of beautiful figures;the western images of Eastern beauty; The Japanese influences on Hong Kong; Modern cultural meaning of Miss Univsrse. Childhood and Toy Culture History of Barbie doll; Barbie culture and the representation of American womanhood; The impact of American Barbie culture on China, Hong Kong and the world; The Gundam culture and the Japanese worldview. Popular Cultures : TV culture and the Society The impact of Western popular cultures to the East; The interactive relationship of popular cultures between the East and the West; The interactive relationship between TV culture and cultural identities. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on introduction of concepts and understanding the basic differences and similarities between Eastern and Western cultures through audio-visual materials. Students may occasionally be required to participate in fieldwork under the guidance of the lecturer. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Students will be required to actively participate in discussion and presentation in order to help them to adapt the interaction between the Chinese and Western cultures in the real world. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, projects, case studies, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Au, C. K., Chan, W. K. and Man, I. Wu, P.H. (2011) The Perspectives of Eastern and Western Cultures, 3 rd Ed., McGraw Hill. 203

214 References Geertz, C. (1993) The Interpretation of Cultures: Selected Essays, Fontana Press. Li, S. L., Wong, W. C. and Chan, S. C. K. (1997) Hong Kong Un-Imagined: History, Culture and the Future, Rye Field. Pun N and Yee L. M. (2003) Narrating Hong Kong culture and identity, Hong Kong University Press. 金 耀 基 : 從 傳 統 到 現 代, 時 報 文 化,1992 年 版 閻 江 肅 妮 妮 : 中 西 方 文 化 比 較, 上 海 辭 書 出 版 社,2003 年 版 陳 序 經 : 東 西 文 化 觀, 北 京 : 中 国 人 民 大 学 出 版 社,2010 年 版 趙 孝 萱 : 兩 腳 踏 東 西 文 化 : 林 語 堂 相 冊, 台 北 市 : 台 北 市 政 府 文 化 局,2003 年 版 204

215 CCN2035 Values and Ethics in Daily Life Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Cantonese) Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% coursework Aims This subject aims to help students recognise the ethical dimension in daily life. It provides an introduction to the key moral theories used in applied ethics, and considers how such theories help in making ethical judgments about the problems encountered in the above aspects. Furthermore, the course identifies a number of core values integral to the social organisation of modern society, analyses the schools of thoughts in support of these values, and reviews the debate among these schools of thoughts. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: develop a working knowledge of basic moral principles and theories, and the ability to identify moral disagreements in relation to common issues in applied ethics grasp the underlying values involved in the controversy of applied ethical issues identify the modern values integral to the organisation of modern society articulate the arguments in support of these values Indicative Contents Normative Ethical Theories Utilitarianism; Deontological Theory; Virtue Ethics. Social Ethical Concepts and Theories Liberalism; Tyranny of the majority; Harm principle; Toleration; Paternalism; Egalitarianism; Social primary goods; Social contract; Communitarianism; Common Good; Libertarianism; Feminism; Socialism. Values Liberty and Autonomy; Equality; Distributive Justice; Community; Rights; Democracy. Applied Ethical Issues Abortion; Euthanasia; Sex and Marriage; Pornography and Censorship; Environment; Surrogate Mother; Minimum Wage; Drug Control; Media Ethics. 205

216 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will introduce students to the major concepts and arguments related to the relevant topics. Various exercises will be designed to help students grasp the concepts, and assignments will be offered to stimulate them to reflect upon the core values of modern society. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life moral controversies, such as abortion, government regulation of pornography and social security. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and assignment(s), will be used to assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and essay(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Swift, A. (2006) Political Philosophy: A Beginners' Guide for Students and Politicians, 2 nd Ed., Polity. 楊 國 榮 : 青 紅 皂 白 : 從 社 會 倫 理 到 倫 理 社 會 ( 修 訂 本 ), 三 聯 書 店 ( 香 港 ) 有 限 公 司,2008 年 References Mappes, T. A. and Zembaty, J. S. (2007) Social Ethics. Morality and Social Policy, 7 th Ed., McGraw- Hill. Pojman, L. P. (1999) Life and Death: Grappling with the Moral Dilemmas of Our Time, 2 nd Wadsworth Pub Co. Ed., Rachels, J. and Rachels, S. (2009) The Elements of Moral Philosophy, 6 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Wolff, J. (2006) An Introduction to Political Philosophy, Rev Ed., Oxford University Press. 羅 秉 祥 : 生 死 男 女 - 選 擇 你 的 價 值 取 向, 突 破 出 版 社,1994 年 版 羅 秉 祥 : 自 由 社 會 的 道 德 底 線, 基 道,1997 年 版 李 琪 明 : 倫 理 與 生 活 : 善 惡 的 變 與 辨, 五 南 圖 書 出 版 股 份 有 限 公 司,2003 年 版 206

217 許 志 偉 : 生 命 倫 理 : 對 當 代 生 命 科 技 的 道 德 評 估, 中 國 社 會 科 學 出 版 社,2006 年 版 波 伊 曼 著, 江 麗 美 譯 : 生 與 死 : 現 代 道 德 困 境 的 挑 戰, 桂 冠,1995 年 版 207

218 CCN2043 Digital Storytelling Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims The purpose of this subject is to help students to develop their expressive capabilities and relevant skills of storytelling in the digital era. The new form of storytelling uses digital technologies and sharing platforms to convey message, which is totally different from the conventional form. Along with the popularity of digital equipment, smartphones and software used by the general public, digital storytelling becomes an effective communication channel to make meaningful content and ideas in the areas of education, community, business, social, health and human services agencies, entertainment and personal or interpersonal expression. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: demonstrate an innovative way to solve communicative problems in a variety of disciplines acquire knowledge of a conceptual framework of digital storytelling on interdisciplinary relationships identify the applications of digital storytelling apply essential techniques in digital storytelling in terms of narrating, editing and sharing demonstrate digital storytelling as an effective communication channel Indicative Contents Genres in Digital Storytelling Various forms of digital storytelling; Micro-film; Viral video; Video art; Sound art; Animation; Documentary; TV commercials; Digital film. Storytelling Methods of telling stories; Personal narrative; Character; Scene; Location; Timing; Dialogue; Monologue; Storyboard. Creating a Digital Story Tools for telling digital stories; Digital images; Digital sound; Digital media. Publishing of a Digital Story Interactive communication between the author and audience via different social networking platforms; Ethical considerations. 208

219 Teaching/Learning Approach Students will be guided to express their ideas through the integration of still imagery, moving imagery, sound, and text which can never be achieved by the conventional modality. The extensive engagement of digital storytelling in the social networking platform is propitious for the enhancement of communication and interaction between the authors and audiences. Lectures will focus on the foundation theory in digital storytelling. Works appreciation will be included in lectures. Students will have an overview of different genres in digital storytelling. Workshops conducted in the laboratory/studio will focus on exploring a variety of digital communication tools. Students will learn to arrange a digital storytelling in the laboratory by using photos, sound and editing software, as well as a digital camera. Tutorials will focus on analysing, generating and creating a digital storytelling work. Students will have a chance to discuss their works and generate different ways to create a digital storytelling work. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including individual assignments/group projects, presentations, and/or quiz to assess students understanding of basic concepts in digital storytelling, digital works, ability of telling stories by using digital media communication tools. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Students are expected to spend approximately a total of 126 hours on activities such as attending lectures and tutorials, doing assignments, reading and revision. Indicative Readings References Alexander, B. (2011) The New Digital Storytelling: Creating Narratives with New Media, 1 st Praeger. Ed., Bordwell, D. (2008) Film Art: An Introduction, 8 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Brown, B. (2002) Cinematography: Theory and Practice: Image Making for Cinematographers, Directors, and Videographers, 1 st Ed., Focal Press. Hockrow, R. (2013) Storytelling Techniques for Digital Filmmakers; Plot Structure, Camera Movement, Lens Selection, and More, 1 st Ed., Amherst Media. Lambert, J. (2012) Digital Storytelling: Capturing Lives, Creating Community, 1 st Ed., Routledge. Straczynski, J. (2002) The Complete Book of Scriptwriting, 1 st Ed., Writers Digest 吳 昊 陳 家 樂 : 編 劇 手 冊, 香 港 : 天 地 圖 書,2011 年 版 209

220 CCN2044 Digital Visualisation in New Media Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims New Media is a cross-discipline subject integrated from computer science, visual arts, and literature, etc. It covers a wide range of forms from experimental film, video installation to programming art and web media. This subject aims at appreciating the trend of New Media from the point of view of Visual Arts, and to connect visual arts and science together by understanding the basic techniques of creating dynamic visual effects through the use of programming. Students are encouraged to visualise natural and innovative visual effects in digital format through using simple programming skills and fundamental scientific principles. This subject emphasises cross-media study with creative outputs. Thus programming effects will be furthermore integrated with other media like drawing and video for innovative representation. The taught effects are widely applicable to different art and design projects, like animation, web media, and interactive interface design. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate the background and current trend of New Media for lifelong learning distinguish different scientific principles for different visual effects develop simple programmes for information visualisation demonstrate creativity in integrating different media for innovative representation Indicative Contents Introduction to New Media History and representative art works in New Media. Programming Basics to Visualise Data Basic concepts of programming; Decision branches; Looping; Coloring; 2D Array; Data processing; Animation output by programming. Randomisation Simple use of Random number; Perlin noise; Random number with tendency; Application of randomisation. Motion Basic concepts of algebra and trigonometry; Simple random motion; Motion with force. Media Crossing Programming effects integrated with drawing; Programming effects integrated with video. 210

221 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction of New Media, the explanation of different scientific and programming concepts, and the applications of concepts on effect visualisation with relevant examples. Tutorials will be conducted in laboratories. Under the supervision and guidance of the lecturer, students will have hands-on practice in programming to visualise scientific concepts, and have cross-media experiments to integrate programming effects with traditional media like drawing and video. Possible outputs can be still image, animation, or interactive interface. This will build up their competence in visualising concepts through media integration for creative purposes. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including individual assignments/group projects, presentations, and/or quiz to assess students understanding of scientific concepts, ability of visualising ideas by programming for creative purposes, and skills of visual communication. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Students are expected to spend approximately a total of 126 hours on activities such as attending lectures and tutorials, doing assignments, reading and revision. Indicative Readings References Bohnacker, H., Gross, B., Laub, J., Lazzeroni, C. (2012) Generative Design, 1 st Architectural Press. Ed., Princeton Reas, C., Fry, B. (2007) Processing: A Programming Handbook for Visual Designers and Artists, 1 st Ed., MIT Press. Reas, C., Fry, B. (2010) Getting Started with Processing, 1 st Ed., Maker Media, Inc. Shiffman, D. (2008) Learning Processing: A Beginner's Guide to Programming Images, Animation, and Interaction, 1 st Ed., Morgan Kaufmann. Shiffman, D. (2012) The Nature of Code: Simulating Natural Systems with Processing, 1 st Ed., The Nature of Code. 211

222 CCN2045 Healthy Ageing Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English, supplemented with Cantonese Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CCN2259 Health Management for the Elderly People Assessment 60% Coursework 40% Examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with an overview of healthy aging and wellness promotion of older adults in view of Hong Kong s local situation. Topics include physical, cognitive, psychological and behavioral factors in aging. Socio-economic and policy factors that support healthy aging will be examined. Wellness promotion strategies involving exercise/nutrition planning, development of healthy attitudes and management of personal security will be explored in a practical approach. Throughout the subject, emphasis is placed on normal and healthy aging. Students are expected to acquire basic knowledge and skills that are relevant to living and working with elderly persons in Hong Kong. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successful completion of this subject, students will be able to: communicate effectively with elderly people in daily context develop a positive attitude towards healthy aging demonstrate knowledge of the basic study of aging related to health, physiological, psychological, and social aspects that impact on older adults and those who work with and care for them acquire the basic skills in assessment of functional independence, psycho-social well-being of the elderly people identify wellness strategies that promote healthy aging in areas of physical wellness, personal development and security locate community resources, family and social support system, and professional or agency setting that serve the older population Indicative Contents Socio-economic Issues for the Older People in Hong Kong Current scenario of aging population in Hong Kong and its social impact. Range of health and social services currently available and needed by senior citizens of Hong Kong. Wellness Promotion Aging processes of various body systems; Wellness strategies that prevent disease and promote functioning in these body systems. Sensory-perceptual alteration, cognitive changes and psychological health issues; Wellness strategies that promote coping and healthy aging. 212

223 Developing Healthy Attitudes Healthy attitudes to life; Strategies for coping with life transitions and end of life; Strategies for financial planning. Nutrition and Exercise Planning Assessment of unique nutritional needs; Nutrition and exercise plans. Home Life, Safety, and Personal Security Assessment of functional independence and psycho-social well-being; Home and personal security; Drug and food safety. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will be used to explain and demonstrate the topics introduced. Case studies, videos, discussions and interactive exercises will be used during tutorials to let students share experience and information. A field visit to geriatric care settings will be arranged for students to get a general knowledge of the different care models for older people. At the end of the field visit, a briefing session will be conducted to encourage learners to reflect on their classroom learning. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, which may include wellness portfolio, group project, presentation, field visit report, test and final examination. The aims are to assess students level of awareness of the general health and social issues; ability to apply theory and assessment techniques that help them achieve the intended learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Students are expected to spend approximately a total of 126 hours on activities such as attending lectures and tutorials, doing assignments, reading and revision. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Haber, David. (2013) Health Promotion and Aging: Practical Applications for Health Professionals, 4 th Ed., New York: Springer. References Ferrini, A. and Ferrini, R. (2012) Health in Later Years, 5 th Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill. Levkoff, Sue and Jeanne Wei (2001) Aging Well: The Complete Guide to Physical and Emotional Health, New York: Wiley. McDonald, R. B. (2014) Biology of Aging, New York: Garland Science/Taylor & Francis Group. Woo, J (2012) Aging in Hong Kong: A Comparative Perspective, New York: Springer. 213

224 陳 燕 禎 : 銀 髮 照 顧 產 業 之 發 展 : 資 源 整 合 的 觀 點 Development Trends of Elderly Care Industry: From the Perspective of Integration of Resources, 新 北 市 : 威 仕 曼 文 化 事 業 股 份 有 限 公 司,2012 年 版 衞 生 署 長 者 健 康 服 務 : 運 動 有 方 活 出 健 康, 香 港 : 天 地 圖 書 有 限 公 司,2012 年 版 214

225 CCN2046 Music, Mind and Human Behaviour Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Written: Chinese; Spoken: Cantonese) Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This subject aims to explore the meanings and functions of music in the modern world. It enables students to develop basic knowledge of music, and to understand how music is related to culture, communication, psychology, human behaviour and mental health. It also provides students with a contextual framework for understanding related research. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify various meanings and functions of music in societies examine the multiple perspectives with which people view and understand music describe the interplay between music, mind and human behaviour apply concepts and theories to the analysis of the cultural and social implications of musical performances demonstrate a foundation knowledge base for further study of the meanings of music to culture and both the mental and behavioral aspects of human living Indicative Contents Basic Elements of Music Tone; Pitch; Rhythm; Timbre; Dynamic; Contour; Tempo; Spatial location; Reverberation; Melody; Meter; Harmony. Music and Human Behaviour The concept of musical behaviour; Functions of classical (art) music; Producers and consumers of music. Music and Mind Music cognition; Cognitive neuroscience of music; Music and the brain; Spatial-temporal reasoning; Early childhood exposure to classical (art) music; The Mozart Effect. Music and Mental Health Mental therapy; Emotional and affective development; Biomusicology; Psychoacoustics. Music, Culture and Society Gender and music; Musical anthropology; Ethnomusicology; Social studies and music. 215

226 Teaching/Learning Approach Interactive approach is adopted: students are required to actively participate in discussions and presentations. Audio and visual materials are used to enhance students understanding of the teaching contents. Lectures will be used to present information, concepts and theories of the subject whereas discussions and in-class assignments regarding the concepts and theories will be held in the tutorials. In the tutorials, students will be divided into groups, and they will deliver a comprehensive presentation with a selected topic using the concepts and theories taught and examined in the lectures. Assessment Approach Continuous assessment is adopted in this subject. A variety of assessment tools will be used, including case studies, written reports, individual assignments, test(s) and presentations designed to assess students analytical skills on the cultural and social implications of music. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Student Study Effort Required Students are expected to spend approximately 126 hours on activities such as attending lectures and tutorials, doing assignments, reading and revision. Indicative Readings References Blacking, J. (1995) Music, Culture and Experience, University of Chicago Press. Campbell, D. (1997) The Mozart Effect: Tapping the Power of Music to Heal the Body, Strengthen the Mind, and Unlock the Creative Spirit, Avon Books. Deliege, I. & Sloboda J. (1997) Perception and Cognition of Music, The Psychology Press. Erlmann, V. (Ed.) (2004) Hearing Cultures: Essays on Sound, Listening and Modernity, Bloomsbury Academic. Grout, D. J. et al. (2009) A History of Western Music, 8 th Ed., W. W. Norton & Company. Hodges, D. A. & Sebald, D. C. (2011) Music in the Human Experience, Routledge. Levitin, D. J. (2006) This is Your Brain on Music: The Science of a Human Obsession, Dutton. Patel, A. D. (2008) Music, Language, and the Brain, Oxford University Press. Peretz, I. & Zatorre R. J. (2003) The Cognitive Neuroscience of Music, Oxford University Press. Snyder, R. (2001) Music and Memory: An Introduction, MIT Press. Wallin N. L. et al. (Ed.) (2001) The Origins of Music, New Edition, A Bradford Book. 216

227 CCN2047 Understanding Society through Visual Arts Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and Chinese (Spoken: Cantonese; Written: Chinese) Prerequisites Nil Assessment 100% Coursework Aims This is an interdisciplinary subject that aims to help students to develop a critical understanding of cohesive relationship among society, culture and visual arts. The subject will look at the evolution of artistic tendencies in the 1970s with large social engagement and less skill-based practices. Hence, artworks can be interpreted as systematic reflections of society and societal behaviour through controversial subject matters and popular visual idioms in social realm. A diverse set of artists express their personal thoughts and insights towards our society by unconventional mediums and activities. In summary, this subject provides hands-on experience and an overview of the role of visual arts in the community and the impact those contemporary artists casted on contemporary existence. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students to achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: develop the understanding of the cohesive relationship between society and visual arts apply creative solution through arts practices demonstrate critical thinking ability through the employment of visual arts as a new channel of social communication develop lifelong learning towards cultural and aesthetic values Indicative Contents Introduction to Sociological Perspective on Art The relationship between society and visual arts; Comparison of social functions and uses of the arts over time; The conceptual framework and development of sociological art. Visual Arts in Sociological Paradigm Art as propaganda; Gender; Consumption in art; Popular culture and mass media. Art Practices as a New Channel of Social Communication Public art and artistic events in public space; Collaboration works of community art; Art participation in social networking platform; Explore and use popular visual idioms in art practice creatively; Cases in Hong Kong, Taiwan and Mainland China. Teaching/Learning Approach The subject will go through key social themes adopted by contemporary artists; students will be guided to develop creative art practices towards their social concerns after lectures and critical discussions. 217

228 Using an interactive approach, this subject will be taught by means of lectures, field visits, tutorials, workshops, seminars and presentations. Lectures introduce and explain the basic concepts and the subject matters of visual arts in sociological paradigm. Seminars and classroom discussions broaden students interpretative opinion on selected social themes adopted by contemporary artists. Workshops lead students to produce meaning-making artworks. Students are expected to participate actively in class by leading discussions on their research findings and doing presentations. Tutorials provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the subject and to explore further the applications of ideas taught. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, written reports, quiz, artworks creation and portfolio designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including creative and critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. Students will be assessed by their ability to synthesise a broad range of information with critical arguments. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Students are expected to spend approximately a total of 126 hours on activities such as attending lectures and tutorials, doing assignments, reading and revision. Indicative Readings References Arnold W. Foster and Judith R. Blau, (1989) Art and Society Readings in the Sociology of the Arts, 1 st Ed., State University of New York Press. Kristine Stiles and Peter Selz, (2012) Theories and Documents of Contemporary Art: A Sourcebook of Artists' Writings, 2 nd Ed., University of California Press. Thomas Crow (2005) The Rise of the Sixties: American and European Art in the Era of Dissent, 1 st Ed., Yale University Press. Toby Clark (1997) Art and Propaganda in the Twentieth Century The Political Image in the Age of Mass Culture, 1 st Ed., Harry N. Abrams, Inc. Victoria Alexander, (2003) Sociology of the Arts - Exploring Fine and Popular Forms, 1 st Ed., Wiley- Blackwell. 陳 秉 璋 陳 信 木 : 藝 術 社 會 學, 台 北 : 巨 流 圖 書 公 司,1993 年 版 218

229 CCN2101 Financial Accounting Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusion CCN1041 Accounting for Non-Business Students Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject introduces the basic concepts of financial accounting. It enables students to apply fundamental financial theories, analyse financial statements and reports, and prepare basic financial statements. This subject also helps students develop critical thinking and analytical skills for their lifelong learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the assumptions, principles and conventions in the financial accounting process appreciate the role and importance of accounting information in assisting decision-making in a business context undertake the work involved in the recording, processing, summarising and reporting phases of the accounting cycle apply relevant accounting concepts and principles in the preparation of financial statements apply fundamental analytical tools for the interpretation of financial statements Indicative Contents Role and Principles of Financial Accounting and Reporting Nature, principles and scope of financial accounting; Management accounting, Financial management and auditing; Users of financial accounts and statements; Accounting Standards; Application of information technology in processing financial and related information; Ethical consideration in Financial Reporting. Financial Accounting Framework Double-entry bookkeeping and accounting systems; Methods of classifying expenditure between capital and revenue; Accounting treatment of fixed assets, current assets, liabilities, provisions and reserves, and capital; Control accounts, bank reconciliation, suspense accounts, and correction of errors; Preparation of journal, ledger accounts, trial balance and basic financial statements. Additional Issues on Earnings Extraordinary items; Accounting changes; Earnings per share; Cash and stock dividends. 219

230 Preparation of Financial Statements Preparation of Financial Statements for sole-traders, clubs or societies, partnerships, and limited companies. Analysis and Interpretation of Financial Statements Need for analysis and interpretation of financial statements; Interpretation techniques including ratio analysis and cash flow statement; Calculation and interpretation of basic financial ratios. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and theories supported by real examples wherever appropriate. They will also provide further analysis of topics with particular emphasis on practical examples. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply theories to the analysis of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including individual assignments, in-class exercises, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students analytical and quantitative skills in solving accounting problems. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test and examination. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Williams, Haka, Bettner, Carcello, Lam and Lau (2010) Financial accounting: Including international financial reporting standards (IFRS), 14 th Ed., McGraw Hill. References Ferrell, Fraedrich and Ferrell (2010) Ethical decision making for business, 8 th Ed., International Edition, Cengage Learning. Hong Kong Institute of Certified Accountants (HKICPA) Hong Kong financial reporting standards and Hong Kong accounting standards. (Available at the HKICPA website: Horngren, C. T., Harrison, W. T. and Bamber, L. S. (2009) Accounting, 8 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Libby, Libby and Short (2009) Financial accounting, International Edition, 6 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Weygandt, J. J., Kieso, D. E. and Kimmel, P. D. (2010) Financial accounting, IFRS Edition, 7 th Ed., Wiley. 220

231 CCN2102 中 國 會 計 及 稅 制 實 務 Accounting and Tax Practices in China 程 度 2 學 分 3 教 學 語 言 中 文 粵 語 講 授 輔 以 英 文 教 學 模 式 28 小 時 課 堂 講 授 14 小 時 導 修 課 修 讀 條 件 CCN2101 Financial Accounting 評 估 方 法 40% 課 堂 習 作 60% 期 終 考 試 科 目 目 標 本 科 目 旨 在 讓 學 生 在 香 港 會 計 既 有 的 基 本 知 識 下, 進 一 步 瞭 解 中 國 會 計 的 處 理, 包 括 存 貨 應 收 帳 固 定 資 產 利 潤 表 資 產 負 債 表 等 ; 以 及 認 識 中 國 會 計 準 則 與 國 際 財 務 報 告 準 則 的 異 同 故 此, 學 生 可 運 用 CCN2101 Financial Accounting 所 學, 解 讀 並 分 析 國 內 公 司 的 財 務 報 表 本 科 目 也 是 學 生 對 國 內 稅 制 的 入 門 科 目, 學 生 可 瞭 解 中 國 的 稅 務 處 理, 包 括 增 值 稅 消 費 稅 所 得 稅 營 業 稅 預 提 所 得 稅 及 國 際 稅 收 協 定 等 學 習 此 科 有 助 學 生 提 升 分 析 技 巧 及 邏 輯 思 考 等 能 力 ; 而 學 生 在 掌 握 較 多 時 事 知 識 的 同 時, 也 可 進 而 培 養 終 生 學 習 的 興 趣 學 習 成 果 學 生 成 功 完 成 本 科 目, 應 能 : 瞭 解 中 國 會 計 發 展 和 現 行 之 法 律 法 規 及 會 計 準 則 ; 認 識 中 國 會 計 準 則 與 國 際 財 務 報 告 準 則 的 異 同 ; 解 讀 及 分 析 公 司 的 財 務 報 告, 以 各 項 財 務 比 率 去 評 估 其 財 務 表 現 ; 瞭 解 中 國 財 稅 體 制 的 發 展 過 程 和 原 則 ; 認 識 中 國 稅 收 和 稅 法 的 概 念 ; 認 識 中 國 的 稅 制 發 展, 從 而 理 解 外 商 企 業 在 內 地 面 對 的 各 項 稅 種, 並 運 用 適 當 的 稅 率 作 評 估 課 程 內 容 中 國 會 計 發 展 和 現 行 之 法 律 法 規 及 會 計 準 則 認 識 中 國 新 企 業 會 計 準 則 的 發 展 及 各 項 會 計 要 素, 例 如 資 產 負 債 及 所 有 者 權 益 收 入 費 用 和 利 潤 等 的 處 理 方 法 中 國 會 計 準 則 與 國 際 財 務 報 告 準 則 的 異 同 分 析 及 比 較 中 國 會 計 準 則 與 國 際 財 務 報 告 準 則 的 異 同, 包 括 對 固 定 資 產 政 府 補 助 編 制 財 務 報 表 的 要 求 等 不 同 的 處 理 方 法 中 國 財 務 報 表 分 析 對 資 產 負 債 表 利 潤 及 利 潤 分 配 表 現 金 流 量 表 進 行 財 務 分 析 中 國 稅 法 及 稅 制 的 發 展 及 介 紹 介 紹 外 商 企 業 在 中 國 面 對 的 各 項 稅 種 及 其 處 理 方 法 ; 中 國 稅 制 與 香 港 稅 制 的 比 較 221

232 教 學 方 法 本 科 目 以 中 文 授 課 及 考 核, 技 術 名 詞 將 輔 以 英 文 參 考 授 課 時, 教 師 先 將 該 課 堂 的 學 習 目 標 整 理 成 問 題, 向 學 生 提 問, 以 引 起 學 生 的 學 習 興 趣, 然 後 向 學 生 展 示 學 習 路 線 圖, 讓 學 生 掌 握 該 課 堂 的 學 習 重 點, 以 提 高 學 習 成 效 課 堂 完 結 時 再 提 問 同 樣 的 問 題, 一 方 面 可 作 溫 習 總 結, 另 一 方 面 亦 確 保 學 習 目 標 已 達 到 同 時, 亦 會 安 排 提 問 或 討 論 一 些 與 中 國 會 計 及 稅 務 的 時 事, 讓 學 生 學 習 時 更 加 投 入, 並 培 養 他 們 的 分 析 技 巧 及 邏 輯 思 考 能 力 本 科 目 的 導 修 課 著 重 實 踐, 安 排 學 生 運 用 課 堂 所 學, 解 讀 公 司 財 務 報 表 及 評 估 其 財 務 表 現, 並 替 外 商 運 用 適 當 的 稅 率 計 算 稅 額 此 外, 亦 會 安 排 與 科 目 內 容 有 關 的 個 案 進 行 討 論 及 口 頭 報 告 評 核 方 法 本 科 目 採 用 各 項 有 效 的 評 估 方 式, 例 如 個 案 研 習 口 頭 報 告 書 面 報 告 測 驗 及 考 試 等, 以 評 估 學 生 的 分 析 技 巧 及 邏 輯 思 考 等 能 力, 從 而 提 升 學 生 的 口 頭 及 書 面 的 表 達 技 巧 及 能 力 每 班 的 教 學 計 劃 (Teaching Plan) 詳 述 個 別 習 作 佔 整 體 評 核 的 實 際 比 重 學 生 收 到 習 作 或 持 續 評 核 成 績 時, 均 會 獲 告 知 習 作 所 評 核 的 是 那 些 預 期 學 習 成 果 學 生 所 需 的 努 力 除 了 42 小 時 的 課 堂 講 授 及 導 修 課 外, 學 生 在 習 作 備 課 準 備 測 驗 及 考 試, 並 與 同 學 進 行 小 組 工 作 等 方 面 所 花 的 時 間, 預 期 約 為 84 小 時 指 定 課 本 中 國 注 冊 會 計 師 協 會 編 : 會 計, 中 國 財 政 經 濟 出 版 社,2010 年 版 葉 陳 雲 主 編 : 會 計 學, 機 械 工 業 出 版 社,2010 年 版 中 國 注 冊 會 計 師 協 會 編 : 稅 法, 經 濟 科 學 出 版 社,2010 年 版 參 考 書 黃 炘 強 著 : 中 國 企 業 會 計 實 務 技 巧 ( 增 訂 版 ), 明 報 出 版 社 趙 國 忠 編 著 : 財 務 報 告 分 析 第 三 版, 北 京 大 學 出 版 社,2010 年 版 新 舊 會 計 準 則 差 異 比 較 與 實 務 應 用, 企 業 管 理 出 版 社,2010 年 版 企 業 會 計 準 則 案 例 講 解, 立 信 會 計 出 版 社,2010 年 版 李 國 淮 主 編 : 中 國 稅 制, 經 濟 科 學 出 版 社,2010 年 版 樊 勇 編 著 : 稅 收 征 收 管 理 制 度, 清 華 大 學 出 版 社,2009 年 版 苑 新 麗 編 著 : 國 際 稅 收, 首 都 經 濟 貿 易 大 學 出 版 社,2010 年 版 222

233 網 上 資 源 香 港 會 計 師 公 會 : 香 港 稅 務 局 : 中 國 內 部 審 計 協 會 : 中 華 人 民 共 和 國 審 計 署 : 國 家 財 務 部 : 中 國 証 監 會 : 國 家 稅 務 總 局 : 財 政 部 會 計 準 則 委 員 會 : 中 國 會 計 師 協 會 : 畢 馬 威 會 計 師 事 務 所 : 普 華 永 道 會 計 師 事 務 所 : 德 勤 關 黃 陳 方 會 計 師 事 務 所 : 安 永 會 計 師 事 務 所 : 223

234 CCN2103 Advertising and Promotion Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisite CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject is designed for students who have a basic knowledge of marketing. The subject introduces knowledge and concepts of integrated marketing communications (IMC) and aims to develop their planning skills in formulating marketing communication mix strategies. The subject will also help students develop their critical thinking as well as oral and written communication skills. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the concepts of the integrated marketing communications (IMC) and its importance in the marketing mix identify the nature and characteristics of different forms of marketing communications such as advertising, sales promotions and public relations formulate an integrated marketing communication (IMC) campaign evaluate the effectiveness of an integrated marketing communication (IMC) programme Indicative Contents Introduction to Marketing Communications Nature of the communications process; A basic model of communication; An introduction to integrated marketing communications (IMC) and its components; Roles of integrated marketing communications (IMC) in the marketing process. Marketing Communications Environment Developing a marketing plan; Communication marketing analysis (i.e. competition, opportunity, target customer and positioning); Setting communications objectives and budgets; Corporate image and brand management; Damage control strategies. Formulating and Implementation of Advertising and Promotional Programmes Roles of advertising and promotion in marketing; Advertising management; Advertising media selection; Advertising design; Nature of trade and consumer promotions; Trade and consumer promotional tools; Developing an IMC campaign. Managing Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing Communications Tools of IMC (advertising, trade and consumer sales promotions, E-active marketing, public relations and sponsorship); Measuring, monitoring and evaluating the effectiveness of IMC. 224

235 Ethics and Trends in Marketing Communications Morals, ethics, and social responsibility in marketing communications; Enhancing key accounts (i.e. customers) and channel relationship through IMC; Electronic commerce and its implications in marketing communications. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will primarily focus on marketing communications perspective with an aim of developing skills and concepts that allow students to develop and manage integrated marketing communication programmes. They will also have detailed coverage on IMC tools. Real-life examples will be used to demonstrate relevant concepts and theories. Tutorials will be interactive sessions which include student group presentations, case studies and in-class exercises. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools including group presentations and written reports, individual assignments, case studies, in-class exercises, tests and an examination will be designed and used to assess the expected outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Clow, K., E. and Baack, D. (2010) Integrated Advertising, Promotions, and Marketing Communication, 4 th Ed., Prentice Hall. References Arens, W. F., Weigold, M. F. and Arens, C. (2011) Contemporary Advertising, 13 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Belch, G. and Belch, M. (2009) Advertising and Promotions: An Integrated Marketing Communications Perspective, 8 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Drewniany, B. L. and Jewler, J. A. (2011) Creative Strategy in Advertising, 10 th Cengage Learning. Ed., Wadsworth Semenik, R. J., Allen, C. and O Guinn, T. (2012) Advertising and Promotions, International Edition, 6 th Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. Shimp, T. A. (2010) Integrated Marketing Communications in Advertising and Promotions, International Edition, 8 th Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. 225

236 CCN2104 Attractions Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisite Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to explore the development and management of attractions for tourists, so as to enable students to analyse and evaluate the planning, design and operation of attractions. Strategies for successful marketing and planning of attractions are explored. It also stimulates students to think about the future development of attractions management. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify and recognise different types of attractions understand the key concepts of attractions management understand the attraction development process and project management of new attractions evaluate and make recommendations regarding the planning, design and operations management of different attractions explore contemporary issues related to tourist attractions management Indicative Contents Introduction to Attractions Management Historical development of attractions; Types and classification of various attractions; Roles of attractions in tourism. Attractions Development Planning and development; Feasibility studies; Basic planning and design principles. Operational Management Skills involved in operations management; Crowd management and risk management; Human resource management and the constraints. Marketing of Attractions Partnerships and intermediaries; Strategic Marketing planning and implementation for attractions; Visitors needs and expectations about the attractions. Contemporary Issues and Future Development Trends for international attractions developments; Current issues and expected future developments of attractions in Hong Kong and China. 226

237 Teaching/Learning Approach Students will learn this subject through lectures and tutorials (aided by audio-visual materials). Group projects and class presentations will be required in order for students to consolidate and enhance their knowledge and skills. Site visits will be arranged for students to acquire real-life experiences; in-service practitioners will be invited to deliver guest lectures. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including case studies, in-class exercises, group projects and presentations, quizzes, term tests and an examination to assess students' achievement of the subject s intended learning outcome as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Swarbrook, J. (2002) The development and management of visitor attractions, 2 nd Ed., Butterworth- Heinemann. References Fyall, A. and Garrod, B. (2008) Managing visitor attractions: New directions, 1 st Ed., Butterworth- Heinemann. Bryman, A. (2004) The disneyization of society, 1 st Ed., Sage Publication Ltd. Drummond S. and Yeoman I. (2001) Quality issues in heritage visitor attractions, 1 st Ed., Butterworth- Heinemann. Runyard, S. and French, Y. (1999) The marketing and public relations handbook for museums, galleries and heritage attractions, 1 st Ed., Altamira Press. 227

238 CCN2105 Business Economics Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2002 Introduction to Economics Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject builds on students knowledge of introductory level microeconomics and develops their abilities and interests in applying economic analysis to business situations. Through more thorough understanding of economic concepts and theories, students will be able to master a set of powerful tools for understanding and predicting human behaviours abilities which will be useful for a future business executive. With a well developed theoretical framework, this subject also enables students to acquire a rigorous approach to analysing business issues in general. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: explain common behaviours of individuals and firms in business settings using economic theories identify the economic concepts and theories that are relevant to analysing business situations, some of which are unfamiliar to students present economic arguments cogently in words, simple mathematics, and graphs appraise or recommend courses of actions based on understanding of constraints in simulated cases appreciate the developmental nature and limitations of the subject Indicative Contents The Economic Way of Thinking Constrained maximisation and human behaviour; Rational decision and incentive; Marginal vs. all or nothing decisions; Presenting decisions involving the future. Demand, Supply and the Market Mechanism Demand and marginal benefit, supply and marginal cost; Gain from voluntary exchange, buyer surplus, seller surplus and attempts at their extraction; Consumer and business demand; Market as a means to direct resource allocation; Examples of market mechanisms in intra-firm management. Quantitative Demand Analysis Concept and calculation of elasticities; Various demand elasticities and their uses; General approaches to estimating real world demands and their limitations. 228

239 Cost: Concept and Behaviour Opportunity cost and rational business decision; Implicit cost, including the concept of Economic Value Added (EVA), sunk cost and strategic uses in business; Cost behaviour under different production/order conditions. Economic Efficiency and the Market Assumptions behind the demand and supply model, implications on analysis of real world markets and businesses; Functions, transaction costs and efficiency of the market; Economic inefficiency, opportunities for mutual gain and efficiency of real world phenomena. Competition and Market Power Sources of market power; Approaches to enhancing market power and their implications on price, quantity and profit; Methods to limit competition; Competition from substitutes, potential new entrants; Measurement of market power. Pricing Uniform pricing and elasticity of demand; General survey of economic underpinning of non-uniform pricing tactics, such as complete price discrimination, two-part pricing, block pricing, segment discrimination, price matching, randomised pricing and psychological pricing. Decisions in inter-dependent situations Common mutually inter-dependent situations in everyday life and business settings, basic approaches to dealing with inter-dependent situations, such as elements of game theory. Uncertainty and Behaviour Uncertainty, consumer and firm behaviour; Asymmetric information and some common phenomena that the condition engenders. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Worksheets may also be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complex economic theories. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, such as real world case studies, written answers to assignment questions, tutorial presentations, test(s), or other forms of assessments where appropriate to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. An examination will also be held for the subject primarily as a summative assessment. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. 229

240 Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Png, I. (2005) Managerial economics, Asia Pacific Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. References Baye, M. R. (2009) Managerial economics and business strategy, 6 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Brickley, James, Smiths, C. W. Jr. and Zimmerman, J. L. (2004) Managerial economics and organisational architecture, 3 rd Ed., McGraw-Hill. Froeb, L. and McCann, B. T. (2010) Managerial economics: A problem solving approach, 2 nd Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. Heyne, Paul, Boettke, P. and Prychitko, D. (2006) The economic way of thinking, 11 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 230

241 CCN2106 Business Environment in China Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English, supplemented with Chinese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims at providing students with a comprehensive view of the general business environment in respect to the political, infrastructural, legal, institutional, economic, cultural and social conditions in the Chinese mainland. As a result, students are able to analyse and understand such important variables which are essential and crucial for investors in making decisions and managing their investment and business activities in China. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the range of factors that would affect the business environment in China understand the impact of these factors jointly affects activities of different types of business organisations compare different types of business organisation and their respective structure and culture appreciate business network relationship in China and the issues relating to the corporate social responsibility in China apply the acquired knowledge to explain the success and failures of business organisations in China Indicative Contents Business Environment in China Scope and concept of business environment; Chinese culture and socialist market system. Macroenvironment in China Political environment; Economic environment; Socio-cultural environment; Technological environment; Legal environment. Firms in China Types of business organisation; Business relationship and network; Company structure and culture; Corporate responsibility. Markets in China Rural markets; Manufacturing industries; Commerce and retail; Finance and banking; Cultural and tourism. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts, basic facts and updates on latest developments of business environment in China. Activities such us video clips and speeches by guest 231

242 speakers may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some issues. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook This is a wide and dynamic topic involving mainly current issues which are volatile, so a specific textbook which can easily get outdated is not recommended. References Ambler, T., Witzel, M. and Xi, C. (2009) Doing business in China, Routledge. Palmer, A. and Hartley, B. (2008) The business environment, 6 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Wasserstrom, J. (2010) China in the 21st century: What everyone needs to know, Oxford University Press. 232

243 CCN2107 Business Information Systems Fundamentals and Development Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides students with an overview of information systems in the modern business world. It enables students to evaluate the use of information systems within and among organisations. In addition, it enriches students with real-life experiences on information system development by means of computer programming. This subject also helps students develop their critical thinking and professionalism in system development. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand and explain the major features of an information system and the environment within which it operates identify the use of information systems which provides organisations with competitive advantages design and develop some simple information systems based on well defined business requirements test and document the information systems developed in a professional manner Indicative Contents Information Systems Overview Nature of management information systems within an organisation; Information systems for collaboration; Information systems for competitive advantages. Information Systems within an Organisation Business progress management; Functional systems; Cross-functional systems; Inter-organisational systems; Business progress modeling; Types of different kinds of information systems; Information system management. Information Systems among Organisations E-commerce overview; M-commerce overview; Supply chain network concept; Technologies to support inter-organisational information systems; Evolution of world wide web and the corresponding applications. 233

244 Information System Development Computer hardware and software basics; Use of visual programming languages; Programming syntax and semantics; Overview of algorithms and pseudo-code; Control structures; Use of array or database for data handling; Exception handling; Program testing and documentation. Teaching/Learning Approach During lectures, fundamental theories and basic concepts of information systems will be introduced first, followed by some mini-case studies and group discussion. When necessary, debates will also be used to stimulate students to evaluate information system related issues critically. In tutorials and laboratory classes, students will be required to apply the principles learned in lectures to tackle business problems by designing and developing appropriate system solution. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, lab projects, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials/labs, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Hoisington, C. and Shelly, G. B. (2010) Microsoft Visual Basic 2010 for Windows, mobile, web, office, and database applications: Comprehensive, Thomson Learning. Kroenke, D. M. (2011) Using MIS, 4 th Ed., Prentice Hall. References Deitel, P. and Deitel, H. (2010) Visual Basic 2010 how to program, 5 th Ed., Prentice Hall. O'Brien, J. and Marakas, G. (2010) Management information systems, 10 th Ed., McGraw-Hill/Irwin. Rainer, R. K. and Turban, E. (2010) Introduction to information systems: Supporting and transforming business, 2 nd Ed., Wiley. Stephens, R. (2010) Visual Basic 2010 programmer's reference, 1 st Ed., Wrox. 234

245 CCN2108 Business Law Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CCN2137 Business Law and the Regulation of Financial Services Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject enables students to develop fundamental knowledge and skills in the understanding of the general legal framework and legal issues that arise from day-to-day business activities. It helps students develop an awareness of and an ability to understand both common law and statute in relation to the commercial activities within a legal context. It also helps students develop critical thinking skills in order to solve or avoid legal problems and to craft legal arguments. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise the principal features of the legal environment of Hong Kong SAR legal system appreciate the essential principles relating to contract law and evaluate the legal issues involved in the day-to-day business activities distinguish between the alternative forms and constitutions of business organisations and apply the legal principles and practice relating to companies in Hong Kong explain the law relating to employment and professional negligence Indicative Contents The Hong Kong SAR Legal System Sources of law; Legal framework of the Hong Kong civil and criminal courts; Alternative methods of dispute resolution. The Law of Contract Essentials of a valid contract; Vitiation of a contract; Discharge of contract and remedies for breach of contract. Sale of Goods Nature of goods; Transfer of property and risk; Definition and application of contracts for the sale of goods; Implied terms; Rights and remedies of sellers and buyers. 235

246 Law of Business Organisations Agency relationships; Types of business organisations; Operation of partnerships; Nature of corporate personality; Formation and constitution, share and loan capital, management and administration, insolvency, control and limitation of a company. Tort Negligence; Professional liability for negligent misstatement; Consequential damage and remedies. Employment Law Major legislation and common law principles; Contracts of service and for services; Rights and liabilities of employers and employees; Termination of employment contracts; Remedies for employees. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the explanation of key concepts and assist students in the assimilation of basic legal theories, together with its practical application to the business environment. They will also provide further analysis of the topics in the syllabus with particular emphasis on practical examples, and discussions of how the law affects business decisions. Lectures will be conducted in an interactive manner requiring prior preparation by students and class participation. Tutorials will be conducted in a problem-based approach that aims to promote students participation in the learning process, through discussion and application of law to facts. They will provide students with opportunities to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of legal principles taught in lectures. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written assignments, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the intended subject learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Stott, V. (2010) An introduction to Hong Kong business law, 4 th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. References Stott, V. (2008) Hong Kong company law, 12 th Ed., Pearson Longman. Carver, A. (2004) Hong Kong business law, 6 th Ed., Longman Asia. 236

247 Ruff, A. (2008) Nutcases: Contract law, Thomson Sweet and Maxwell Asia. Sealey, L. S. (2010) Cases and materials in company law, 9 th Ed., Oxford University Press. Companies Ordinance (Chapter 32), 5 th Ed., HKSAR Government. 237

248 CCN2109 Compensation and Performance Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject delivers fundamental knowledge required for students to define, review and implement the policies, strategies, and practices of compensation and performance management in organisations. It introduces alternative reward concepts and explains the relationship between compensation and performance management, and other elements of human resources practices. This subject also enables students to appreciate the basic factors (legislation, market and industry) that can have strong influences on compensation and performance management practices. It encourages students to reflect upon the fundamental types of beliefs and assumptions that underlie different approaches to compensation, benefits and performance management. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate the fundamental importance of understanding high employee performance in organisations understand and apply the basic pay model and pay strategy concepts identify the pay structure in relation to internal alignment and external competitiveness understand how to determine individual pay according to employee contributions evaluate the extension and management of the compensation and benefits systems review relevant legal and ethical issues in compensation, and benefits policies and practices Indicative Contents Compensation and its Relationship with the Performance of the Organisation Definitions; Forms of pay; Pay model; Pay and competitive advantages. Corporate Compensation and Benefits Structure and Level Internal alignment; Job analysis; Job evaluation; Person-based structure; Need for pay competitiveness; Pay levels and mix. Individual Pay and Team Incentives for Performance Pay for performance; Performance appraisals methods; Performance evaluation process; Factors distorting performance management; Linking pay to subjectively appraised performance; Effective performance management systems. 238

249 Employee Benefits The benefits determination process; Benefits options. Professional Practices in Compensation and Benefits Government and legal issues; Ethical issues; Career development. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of concepts. Further reading may also be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complex compensation and benefits theories. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions, exercises and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Milkovich, G. T., and Newman, J. M. (2011) Compensation, 10 th Ed., McGraw-Hill/Irwin. Shield, J. (2007) Managing employee performance and reward: Concepts, practices, strategies, Cambridge University Press. References Beam, Burton, T., McFadden, J. J. (2005) Employee benefits, 7 th Ed., Dearborn Real Estate Education. Chan, A. W., Mak, W. M., and Bannister B. J. (2002) Managing human resources in Hong Kong, 3 rd Ed., Thomson/Sweet & Maxwell Asia. Ellig, B. R. (2007) The complete guide to executive compensation, McGraw-Hill. 239

250 Martocchio, J. J. (2011) Strategic benefits: A primer for human resource professionals, 4 th Ed., McGraw- Hill Irwin. Martocchio, J. J. (2011) Strategic compensation: A human resource management approach, 6 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Perkins, S. J. (2008) Employee reward: Alternatives, consequences and contexts, 3 rd Ed., Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development. Useful Website (Hong Kong Legislation Related to Employee Rights & Benefits) 240

251 CCN2110 Consumer Behaviour Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject is designed for students to develop conceptual and theoretical understanding of consumer behaviour. It provides an overview on how the psychological, socio-cultural and environmental factors affect consumer behaviour and their implications on marketing strategies. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: explore the relationship between consumer behaviour and marketing strategies in a dynamic business environment appraise how internal and external factors influence consumer behaviour understand consumer decision making and their implications on marketing strategies apply consumer behaviour concepts and theories to practical marketing situations Indicative Contents Introduction Overview of consumer behaviour and consumer behaviour s role in marketing strategies; Framework for consumer analysis. Consumer Decision Making Problem recognition; Information search; Evaluation and selecting alternatives; Making purchase; Post-purchase evaluations. Internal Influences on Consumer Behaviour Consumer emotion, feeling and cognition; Consumer attitude and intention; Consumer learning and conditioning. External Influences on Consumer Behaviour Culture, subcultures, values, lifestyles; Cross-cultural consumer behaviour; Reference group influence. Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy Consumer behaviour and marketing mix. 241

252 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Case studies will be singled out for deeper analysis alongside relevant theories and concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Peter, J. P. and Olson, J. C. (2010) Consumer Behaviour and Marketing Strategy, 9 th Ed., McGraw-Hill International. References Blackwell, R. D., Miniard, P. W., Engel, J. F., D Souza, C. and Taghian, M. (2007) Consumer Behaviour: An Asia Pacific Approach, 1 st Ed., Cengage Learning. Neal, C., Quester, P. and Hawkins, D. (2008) Consumer Behaviour: Implications for Marketing Strategy, 5 th Ed., McGraw-Hill Australia. Schiffman, L. G. and Kanuk, L. L. (2007) Consumer Behaviour, 9 th Ed., Pearson Education Australia. Solomon, M. R. (2009) Consumer Behaviour: Buying, Having and Being, 8 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 242

253 CCN2111 Cost Accounting Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject equips students with an enhanced understanding of cost accounting concepts and techniques and an ability to generate cost information. It provides them with an understanding of the uses and limitations of cost information in planning, control and decision making. This subject also enables students to develop critical thinking, analytical skills, entrepreneurial attributes for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand and critically apply the appropriate techniques to generate cost information to help management in organisational planning and control recognise the role of relevant cost information and its contribution to management and organisational performance appraise issues from a management accounting perspective and suggest appropriate responses to aid management decision-making processes Indicative Contents Introduction to Cost Accounting Need for cost accounting information; Comparison of financial and cost accounting; Organisational mission, goals and strategies; Cost and management accounting terms; Cost Objectives; Management process and its implication. Cost Estimation and Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis Different methods in cost estimation: High-Low method and basic understanding of regression method; Understanding assumptions behind the cost-volume-profit analysis; Different methods in computing the break-even point; Relationship between CVP and cost planning. Job Costing Cost System Design; Approach to job costing; Distinction between actual costing and normal costing; Stock valuation; Pre-determined overhead recovery rate. Activity Based Costing Understanding cost drivers; Distinctive features of activity based costing; Costing of a product under a refined costing system. 243

254 Absorption and Marginal Costing Differences between absorption and marginal costing; Effect of changes in production and sales level on profit; Use of information for external reporting and internal decision making. Standard Costing and Variance Analysis Standard costs management by exception; Setting standard costs; Flexible budgets; Variance analysis and interpretation. Budgeting Master budget and its usefulness to organisations; Zero-based budgeting; Incremental budgeting; Fundamental budgetary behaviour. Relevant Costs for Decision Making Decision making process (including strategic consideration); Cost concepts for decision making (including opportunity cost concept); Applications of relevant costs in different settings including make-or-buy decisions, add-or-drop product lines or segments decisions; Special-order decisions and utilization of constrained resources. Performance Measurement Decentralization and responsibility centres; Performance measures including return on investments and residual income. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the understanding and explanation of key concepts and assist students through case studies in its practical application to the business environment. They will also provide further analysis of the topics in the syllabus with particular emphasis on practical examples, and discussions of how the knowledge affects business decisions. Tutorials will be conducted in a problem-based approach that aims to promote students participation in the learning process, through discussion and application of concepts to facts. They will also provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the practical applications taught in lectures. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written assignments, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the intended subject learning outcomes as well as generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). 244

255 Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Brewer, Garrison and Noreen (2010) Introduction to managerial accounting, 5 th Ed., McGraw Hill. References Garrison, Noreen and Brewer (2006) Managerial accounting, 11 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Horngren, Datar and Foster (2006) Cost accounting, a managerial emphasis, 12 th Ed., Pearson. Horngen, Bhimani, Datar and Foster (2005) Management and cost accounting, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. 245

256 CCN2112 Customer Relationship Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject introduces the principles and practices of customer relationship management (CRM). It provides basic knowledge on CRM strategy and processes in an organisation. It also exposes students to information technology for implementing CRM plans. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: explain the concepts of CRM and its importance to organisations in different industries apply communication channels in the implementation of standard CRM plans recognise the effectiveness of CRM strategies Indicative Contents The Nature and Context of CRM Definitions of CRM; CRM as an integral business strategy; Relationship-oriented organisation; Customer knowledge and privacy policy. Approaches to CRM Relationship data management; Basic concepts in data analyses and data mining; Segmentation and selections; Retention and cross-selling. Operational Aspects of CRM Communication and multi-channels; Call centre management; Internet and the website; Direct mail; Managing satisfaction and quality of customer contacts. Evaluation of CRM Plans Factors to consider in the evaluation of CRM plans; Ways to enhance effectiveness of CRM plans. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by real business examples. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. 246

257 Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Peelen, E. (2005) Customer relationship management, 1 st Ed., Prentice Hall. References Baran, R. J., Galka, R. J. and Strunk, D. P. (2008) Principles of customer relationship management, 1 st Ed., Mason, Ohio: Thomson. Foss, B. and Stone, M. (2001) Successful customer relationship marketing, 1 st Ed., Kogan Page. Kincaid, J. W. (2003) Customer relationship management: Getting it right, 1 st Ed., Prentice Hall PTR. Knox, S., Maklan, S., Payne, A., Peppard, J. and Ryals, L. (2003) Customer relationship management: Perspectives from the marketplace, 1 st Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann. 247

258 CCN2113 Financial Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of seminars Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject is structured around the most important financial decisions made by a firm in an integrated business environment. Students are expected to develop knowledge of how firms make capital budgeting and financial decisions, and learn time value of money and valuations of securities. The subject enables students to learn how the concepts and theories of financial management are applied in the real world and generate lasting impacts on firms. It will also enable students to execute strong analytical skills and critical thinking. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the functions of financial management and the role of the finance managers, work with financial statements, cash flow and ratio analysis appreciate the importance of the concept of time value of money perform basic valuation of stocks and bonds assess the risk and return associated with a financial asset and examine the factors affecting cost of capital and dividend policy apply investment appraisal techniques in a capital budgeting context and understand the limitations of those techniques Indicative Contents Introduction Financial management functions; Firm s goals; Agency problems and costs; Key financial ratios. Time value of money Present value; Future value; Annuity; Perpetuity. Valuation of Securities Stocks and bonds. Basic Portfolio Theory Risk and return; Portfolio; Beta; Capital Assets Pricing Model. Cost of Capital Definition and component of cost of capital; Introduction to weighted average cost of capital. 248

259 Sources of Finance Internally generated funds; Capital markets; Dividend policy. Capital Investment Techniques Payback; Accounting rate of returns; Internal rate of returns; Net present value; Comparisons of discounted cash flows techniques; Projects with different lives and investment outlay; Capital rationing; Capital budgeting; Sensitivity analysis and scenario analysis. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of theoretical materials, with specific reference to current financial issues where appropriate. Occasional group discussions will be conducted to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will give students an opportunity to apply the theories learnt in lectures so that they can deepen their understanding through an interactive approach. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including individual assignments, quizzes, in-class exercises, problem sets, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students analytical and quantitative skills and the ability of applying knowledge in making financial decisions. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Jordan, Westerfield and Ross. (2011) Corporate finance essentials, 7 th Ed., McGraw Hill. References Block, S. B. and Hirt, G. A. (2009) Foundations of financial management, 13 th Ed, McGraw Hill Irwin. Brigham and Houston. (2009) Fundamentals of financial management,12 th Ed., Harcourt. Van Horne, J. C. and Wachowicz, J. M. (2008) Fundamentals of financial management, 13 th Ed., Prentice Hall. ACCA practice & revision kit paper F9 financial management. (2010) London BPP Learning Media Ltd. 249

260 CCN2114 Financial Markets and Institutions Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours lectures 14 hours tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of the importance, structure and operation of the financial system in Hong Kong through the study of different types of financial markets and institutions. The subject also enables students to appreciate the special features of the Hong Kong financial system in the context of an international environment. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate the importance, structure and operation of the financial system identify and compare key differences in the regulatory structures and roles of the principal financial institutions and markets examine the rationale for financial regulations and their impact on the financial markets analyse the importance of various international financial orgainsations and their influence towards financial markets and institutions Indicative Contents Overview of the Financial System The nature and roles of financial markets and financial institutions; Structure and characteristics of Hong Kong financial system. Financial Markets Functions and characteristics of different types of financial markets; Development of the markets; Market participants and their activities. Financial Institutions Banks and nonbank financial institutions; Their structure and contribution to the financial sector; Their activities and limitations; Protection of the public and the impact of regulations. Regulation of the Financial System Theories and rationale underlying regulation; Government and quasi-government regulatory bodies; The purpose of their formation and their mode of formations; Their development, powers and current problems. 250

261 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of various types of financial markets and institutions, with specific reference to current economic issues wherever appropriate. Occasional group discussions may be arranged. Ttutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to make comparisons with other financial markets. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, comparative studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Madura, J. (2008) Financial institutions and markets, 9 th Ed., Thomson. References Banking supervision in Hong Kong. (2006) Hong Kong Monetary Authority. Saunders, A. and Cornett, M. C. (2010) Financial institutions and markets: An introduction to the risk management approach, 4 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Mishkin, F. S. and Eakins, S. G. (2008) Financial markets and institutions, 5 th Ed., Pearson. Banking Ordinance. (2011) HKSAR Government. 251

262 CCN2115 Food Service Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing or CCN2004 Managing Organisations Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject introduces students to different concepts and operations of food service organisations in different business settings. It explains the purpose and operation of each functional component in a food service organisation and how to make a food service business viable. It also helps students to acquire professional, business, human resources, management, social and intellectual skills and knowledge needed for food and beverage operations. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students should be able to: identify the major types of food service organisations and the needs of different market segments explain the operation of food service organisations based on the systems approach understand and apply the food service operational techniques and principles understand the needs, procedures and organisation of resources such as staff, materials, facilities, equipment and costs in managing a food and beverage operation Indicative Contents An Overview of Food Service Operations Types of food service organisations and their classifications; Food service systems; Catering cycle and its function in food service organisations. Customers and Customer satisfaction Understanding of customers; Service encounter and customer satisfaction. Products and Service Menu planning and pricing; Alcoholic and non-alcoholic beverages; Different styles of food and beverage service. Managing of Food Service Operations Human resources issues in restaurants; Purchasing, receiving, storing and issuing; Marketing for food and beverages; Restaurant hygiene and safety; Revenue and cost control. 252

263 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts, with specific reference made to current issues wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination which are designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and presentation skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Ninemeier, J. D. and Hayes, D. K. (2006) Restaurant operations management: Principles and practices, 1 st Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. References Dahmer, S. J. and Kahl, K. W. (2009) Restaurant service basics, John Wiley & Son. Mill, R. C. (2007) Restaurant management: Customers, operations, and employees, 3 rd Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. Payne-Palacio, J. and Theis, M. (2012) Foodservice management: Principles and practices, 12 th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. Walker, J. R. (2011) The restaurant: From concept to operation, 6 th Ed., John Wiley & Son. 253

264 CCN2116 Front Office Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to explore the basic concepts and operations of front office in hotels. It introduces the operating systems and standard operating procedures of front office department in current practices. Complaint handling strategies are incorporated into the service skills so that students can grasp the essence of customer service in the hospitality industry. Computer software is introduced to integrate computer technology with the procedures used in the front office. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognize different sections in the front office and their roles and responsibilities explain the reservation concepts and procedures in the front office department describe the reception procedures in checking-in and checking-out guests understand the integrated functions of the front office in the hotel industry Indicative Contents Overview of Front Office Department in the Hotel Industry Roles and responsibilities of front office in the hotel industry; Organizational structure of the front office in hotels; Cycle of service; Property management system. Basic Reservation Process and Procedures Roles and responsibilities of the reservation department; Common hotel room rates; Reservation process and procedures; Potential reservation problems; Documents and reports for reservation departments. Accommodation Reception Registering the Guest Roles and responsibilities of reception; Pre-arrival activities; Guest registration process; Documents and reports used in front desk. Processing Check-out Procedures and Maintaining Financial Transactions Check-out procedures; Types of financial accounts and their roles; Posting charges and payment; Settling guests accounts. 254

265 Providing Concierge Services Pre-arrival activities; Guest luggage handling procedures for guests arrivals and departures; Collection, storage and transportation of guests luggage; Role of security for concierge. Customer Complaint Handling Types of conflicts; Causes of conflicts; Complaint handling strategies in hotels; Turning complaints into opportunities. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will provide an introduction and explanation of the concepts and theories, which will be supported by real examples wherever appropriate. Videos will be used occasionally to facilitate teaching. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Class exercises may also be used to monitor students understanding of the concepts and applications of the theories. Tutorials will emphasise the concepts and applications of the principles and key issues taught, using an interactive approach. Activities in tutorials will normally include student discussions, case studies, problem solving exercises, student presentations. Computer laboratories installed with widely-used front office software may be used, in order to enable students to practice the standard procedures, e.g. reservation, check-in and check-out processes. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, role-demonstrations; presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook O Shannessy, V., Haby, S. and Richmond, P. (2001) Accommodation services, Pearson Education Australia. Kasavana, M. L and Brooks, R. M. (2009) Managing front office operations, 8 th Ed., American Hotel & Lodging Association, Educational Institute. 255

266 References Baker, S., Bradley, P. and Huyton, J. (2003) Principles of hotel front office operations, 2 nd Ed., Thomson Learning. Bardi, J. A. (2011) Hotel front office management, 5 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. Tewari, J. R. (2009) Hotel front office: operations and management, Oxford University Press. Vallen, G. K. and Vallen, J. J. (2009) Check-in check-out: managing hotel operations, 8 th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall. 256

267 CCN2117 Fundamentals of Logistics and Supply Chain Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with fundamental understanding of principles, concepts and application of global logistics and supply chain management in the business context. It also equips students with necessary skills and techniques for coping with logistics and supply chain challenges and problems in an ever-changing business environment. Critical thinking and analytical skills are developed through lectures, case studies and experiential learning. This subject also helps students develop their abilities and knowledge in logistics and supply chain management, thereby preparing them for further studies, employment and life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise the role and importance of logistics and supply chains in the business context integrate knowledge and skills in logistics and supply chain operations across a wide range of business domains and levels develop critical thinking and analytical skills to identify and assist the management in solving problems related to logistics and supply chains enhance their communication skills, both oral and written, through effective team work, presentations and project management Indicative Contents Role of Logistics and Supply Chain Management in the Economy and Organisation Logistics and supply chain concepts and models; Global logistics environment; Hong Kong logistics environment; Role of logistics in the economy; Supply chain relationships. Transportation Management Importance of transport in the economy; Factors affecting transport costs and pricing; Integrated transport modes (air/sea/road/rail/pipeline); Containerisation; Modal choice. Inventory and Warehousing Management Reasons for holding inventory; Inventory costs; Inventory strategies; Role and functions of warehousing; Types of warehouses: factors affecting type, size and number of warehouses. Procurement Management Role and function of procurement; Procurement strategies; E-procurement. 257

268 Demand and Order Management Elements of customer demand and services; Factors affecting level of customer service; Order fulfillment process. Materials Handling and Storage Objectives and principles of material handling; Types of material handling equipment; Role of packing. Information Technologies in Global Logistics and Supply Chain Management Importance of information in supply chains; Role of information technologies in supply chains; E- logistics; RFID and Barcode technologies. Logistics Service Providers Third-party and fourth-party logistics providers; Outsourcing. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the understanding and explanation of key concepts and theories of logistics and supply chain management operations with reference to current global issues and trends. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Occasionally, corporate visits will be arranged to facilitate students learning. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, case studies, individual and group projects and presentations, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Grant, D. B., Lambert, D. M., Stock, J. R. and Ellram, L. M. (2006) Fundamentals of logistics management, McGraw Hill. Murphy, P. R. and Wood, D. F. (2011) Contemporary logistics, 10 th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. 258

269 References Branch, A.E. (2008) Global supply chain management and international logistics, Routledge. Bowersox, D. J., Closs, D. J. and Cooper, M. B. (2010) Supply chain logistics management, McGraw Hill. Coyle, J. J., Bardi, E. J. and Langley, Jr., C. J. (2009) Supply chain management: A logistics perspective, South-Western Cengage Learning. Gourdin, K. N. (2006) Global logistics management A competitive advantage for the 21 st century, 2 nd Ed., Blackwell Publishing. Lambert, D. M. (2008) Supply chain management: Processes, partnerships, performance, 3 rd Ed., Supply Chain Management Institute. Mangan, J., Lalwani, C. and Butcher, T. (2008) Global logistics and supply chain management, Wiley. Waters, D. (2009) Supply chain management: An introduction to logistics, Palgrave. Recommend Journals Asia-Pacific International Journal of Business Logistics Containerisation International International Journal of Logistics Management International Journal of Physical Distribution and Management Journal of Business Logistics Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management Journal of Supply Chain Management 259

270 CCN2118 Global Transport and Trade Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of international trade and transport knowledge and principles. This subject focuses on the integrated mode of transportation systems and operations in the context of business and industry. It provides the conceptual framework to analyse and solve related business problems. This subject also helps students develop in-depth knowledge and professionalism in intermodal transport systems and operations. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: explain the importance of the relationship between international trade and intermodal transport recognise the issues involved in intermodal operations and system apply relevant concepts and theories to assist the management to analyse, evaluate and solve intermodal problems obtain fundamental knowledge which provides a good academic and vocational foundation for further studies and careers in related fields Indicative Contents Introduction to International Trade Theories and contemporary practices of international trade; Current economic growth and trade pattern; Relationship between intermodal transport and global economy. Introduction to Intermodalism Basic modes of transportation and its characteristics; Types of carriers; Mode and carrier selection; Intermodal concept. Terminal Operations and Management Airport and Seaport policy and operations; Cargo consolidation operations; Containerisation. International Commercial Documents Invoices; Import documents; Export documents; Transport documents. International Payment and Trade Terms INCOTERMs; Letters of credit; Bank guarantees; Currency of payment. 260

271 Information Technologies for Intermodalism Role and application of IT in intermodal transport; Global Positioning System; Electronic data interchange/web services; Digital trade and transportation network (DTTN). Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the understanding and explanation of international trade and intermodalism concepts and practices supported by hypothetical and real examples relevant to current business issues. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Occasionally, corporate visits will be arranged to facilitate students learning. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, case studies, individual and group projects and presentations, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Coyle, J. J., Novak, R.A., Gibson, B. and Bardi, E. J. (2010) Transportation: A supply chain perspective, 7 th Ed., South-Western College Publication. David, P. A. and Steward, R. D. (2006) International logistics: The management of international trade operations, 2 nd Ed., Atomic Dog. References Branch, A. E. (2008) Global supply chain management and international logistics, Routledge. Gubbins, E. J. (2003) Managing transport 0perations, 3 rd Ed., Kogan Page. Lowe, D. (2005) Intermodal freight transport, Elsevier Butterworth Heinemann. 261

272 Rodrique, J. P., Comtois, C. and Slack, B. (2009) The geography of transport systems, 2 nd Ed., Routledge. Seyoum, B. (2008) Export-import theory, practices and procedures, 2 nd Ed., Routledge. Stopford, M. (2009) Maritime economics, 3 rd Ed., Routledge. Wensveen, J. G. (2007) Air transportation: A management perspective, 6 th Ed., Ashgate. Recommend Journals Asia-Pacific International Journal of Business Logistics Containerisation International International Journal of Physical Distribution and Management Journal of Business Logistics Journal of Supply Chain Management Maritime Policy and Management Maritime Economics and Logistics Supply Chain Management: An International Journal 262

273 CCN2119 Housekeeping Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims at providing operational views and practices in every section of Housekeeping Department in a hotel. Both front of the house and back of the house cleaning practices are examined. It also introduces the concept of laundry and the role of housekeeping staff in safety and security. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the roles and responsibilities of Housekeeping Department and its sections recognise different kinds of cleaning agents and equipment as well as their applications to be used in different types of floorings comprehend the typical cleaning procedures of room attendant and public area attendant when cleaning guestrooms and public area respectively describe the inventory system and exchange system of uniform and linen and laundry services appreciate different practices of health, safety and security systems and programmes of Housekeeping Department Indicative Contents Introduction of Housekeeping Department Housekeeping roles and responsibilities; Hierarchy of Housekeeping Department; Scheduling. Cleaning Agents and Floorings Water; Detergents; Abrasives; Degreasers; Acid cleaners; Organic solvents; Other cleaning chemicals; Method of use; Hard and soft floorings; Caring of different floorings. Guestrooms and Public Area Cleaning Guestrooms cleaning; General cleaning; Turndown services; Public area cleaning; Outsourcing practice. Uniform & Linen and Laundry Uniform and linen inventory and exchange control system; Par stock calculation; Linen control; Onpremise laundry services; Off-premise laundry services. 263

274 Hotel Safety and Security Occupational Safety and Health Council; Hotel fire prevention and brigade functions; Injury and accident report procedure; Fire drill evacuation; Guest and employee theft and prevention; Lost and found procedure; Key control system. Teaching/Learning Approach Concepts will be delivered through lectures supplemented with discussions of case studies in tutorials. Visits to housekeeping department in hotel will be arranged in order to enhance students understanding and to give them an insight into actual housekeeping operations. Videos on guestrooms and public area cleaning exercises will also be used to facilitate learning. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations, case studies, group projects, test(s) and an examination designed in order to develop students understanding of housekeeping operations. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Schneider, M., Tucker G. and Scoviak, M. (1999) The professional housekeeper, 4 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. References Casado, M. A. (2000) Housekeeping management, John Wiley & Sons. Nitschke, A. A. and Frye, W. D. (2008) Managing housekeeping operations, Rev. 3 rd, American Hotel & Lodging Association. 264

275 CCN2120 Information Technology in Global Supply Chain Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with a conceptual framework of information technology applications to understand and analyse logistics and supply chain decisions. It gives students opportunities to examine the design of information technology infrastructure in logistics and supply chain. It helps to nurture students collaborative learning experiences in studying logistics and supply chain problems, developing information technology solutions, and managing information technology applications in logistics and supply chain. It also helps students develop critical and creative thinking skills for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand logistics-related information technology concepts and their practical relevance assist the management in logistics and supply chain operation mode with the use of information technology recognise the technical and business issues of information technology applications in logistics and supply chain as well as conduct analysis of logistics-related problems/opportunities so as to propose appropriate logistics operation solutions related to the application of information technology communicate and cooperate effectively and productively in team work on the identification of logistics-related problems, development of logistics-related information technology solutions and implementation of information technology systems in logistics and supply chain management Indicative Contents Introduction to Information Systems, Technology and Business IT s role in business and supply chains; Business objectives of information systems; IT cultures. Introduction to E-Commerce E-commerce; B2B e-commerce; Impact on supply chain management; E-logistics development process and strategy. Logistics Information Systems E-fulfillment and e-payment system; RFID, barcode and technologies in warehouses. Supply Chain Information Systems ERP; ERP vendors and solutions; CRM. 265

276 Databases and Emerging Data Exchange Standards XML: emerging data exchange standards; Open buying on the Internet; Information and content exchange; EDI. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the understanding and explanation of information technology on logistics and supply chain management concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples relevant to current business issues. Group discussions and activities will be used to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Occasionally, corporate visits will be arranged to facilitate students learning. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, case studies, individual and group projects and presentations, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Baltzan, P. and Philips, A. (2011) Business driven information systems, McGraw-Hill. Ross, D. F. (2011) Introduction to supply chain management technologies, CRC Press. References Bayles, D. L. (2002) E-commerce logistics and fulfillment, Prentice Hall. Beyer, S. (2010) Supply chain performance measurement & e-business supply chain management: Including a practical excursus on the Intel case, ESB Business School Reutlingen University. Bowersox, D. J., Closs, D. J. and Cooper, M. B. (2010) Supply chain logistics management, McGraw Hill. Haag, S., Baltzan, P. and Phillips, A. (2009) Business driven technology, Mc-Graw Hill. 266

277 Laudon, K. C. and Laudon, J. P. (2007) Essentials of business information systems, Prentice Hall. Schneider, G. P. (2009) Electronic commerce, Cengage Learning. Recommend Journals Asia-Pacific International Journal of Business Logistics Containerisation International International Journal of Physical Distribution and Management Journal of Business Logistics Journal of Supply Chain Management Maritime Policy and Management Maritime Economics and Logistics Supply Chain Management: An International Journal 267

278 CCN2121 Intermediate Accounting Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorial Prerequisites CCN2101 Financial Accounting Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject, a continuation of Financial Accounting (CCN2101), will reinforce students understanding of the conceptual framework of accounting and the current reporting standards. It equips students with extended knowledge on the accounting treatments for financial statement items or issues learnt from the basic course in financial accounting and develops their professional competence in the preparation of financial statements and related disclosures. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: demonstrate a sound understanding of the conceptual framework of financial reporting, concepts and techniques of accounting evaluate current accounting practice in light of the accounting principles and standards apply generally accepted accounting principles to situations solve problems and issues in relation to corporate financial accounting Indicative Contents Conceptual Framework and Process of Accounting Objectives of financial reporting; Qualitative characteristics and constraints of accounting information; Elements of financial statements; Basic accounting model and accounting processing cycle. Preparation of Financial Statements Balance sheet and financial disclosures; Income statement with separately reported items, discontinued operations and extraordinary items; Comprehensive income; Earnings quality; Changes in accounting principles, estimates, and errors; Statement of cash flows. Operating Activities of a Business Cash and receivables; Short-term liabilities; Complexities of revenue recognition; Earnings management; Cost of goods sold and inventory management. Investing Activities of a Business Investments in debt and equity securities. 268

279 Financing Activities of a Business Accounting for debt financing and equity financing. Additional Financial Reporting Issues Different contingencies; Income taxes; Earnings per share; Leases; Basic understanding of joint venture, associate and business combination. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of relevant accounting concepts and procedures on the selected topics. PowerPoint notes, complemented by worksheets, will be used to deliver the syllabus contents and seek real-time feedback from students on the accounting problems concerned. Tutorials will aim to consolidate students understanding over the relevant accounting topics. These will provide opportunities for students to discuss, resolve, and reflect on the selected tutorial questions. There will be worksheets to guide students to formulate solutions and develop their competence in applying their knowledge in financial reporting. Activities in tutorials will also include student presentations and discussions of case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, assignments, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, tests and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Spiceland, J. D., Sepe, J. F. and Nelson, M. W. (2011) Intermediate accounting, 6 th Ed., McGraw Hill. References Hui, W. F. and Ng, P. H. (2009) Accounting in Hong Kong: Regulatory framework and advanced accounting practice, 17 th Ed., SCOPE, City University of Hong Kong. Kieso, D. E., Weygandt, J. J. and Warfield, T. D. (2010) Intermediate accounting, 13 th Ed., John Wiley. Stice, J. D., Stice, E. K., and Skousen, K. F. (2010) Intermediate accounting, 17 th Ed., South-Western/ Cengage Learning. All relevant Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards and Hong Kong Accounting Standards issued by Hong Kong Institute of Certified Public Accountants (available at: 269

280 CCN2122 International Finance Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with an understanding of some fundamental aspects in international finance. Various international financial markets, their roles and importance of international financial markets to a corporation are introduced. Specific references are made to exchange rate behaviour and its risk management. Major international monetary policies are also explained. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: discuss the basic concepts of international finance explain the importance of international financial management describe various theories in explaining exchange rates behaviours discuss various ways through which exchange rate risk exposures can be managed analyse financial markets and instruments relating to the international financial environment Indicative Contents The Nature of International Financial Environment International flow of funds; Globalisation and the multinational firm; Financial institutions (e.g. International Monetary Fund, World Bank). International Financial Markets International banking and money market; International bond market; International equity market; Interest rate and currency swaps. International Monetary Policies History of the International Monetary System and balance of payments accounting system. Foreign Exchange Rate Market for Foreign Exchange; Exchange rate determination and its relationship with interest rate and inflation. Foreign Exchange Exposure and Management Transaction exposure; Translation exposure and economic exposure and their risk management to various exposures. 270

281 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and real life case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Eun, C. S. and Resnick, B. G. (2009) International financial management, 5 th Ed., McGraw Hill/Irwin. Madura, J. (2009) International corporate finance, 10 th Ed., South-Western. References Moffett, M. H., Stonehill, A. I., and Eiteman, D. K. (2009) Fundamentals of multinational finance, 3 rd Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. Crum, R. L., Brigham, E. F. and Houston, J. F. (2005) Fundamentals of international finance, 1 st Ed., Thomson/South Western. 271

282 CCN2123 Introduction to Auditing and Taxation Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2101 Financial Accounting Exclusion CCN3101 Taxation Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with a fundamental understanding of the principles of auditing in Hong Kong as well as the Hong Kong tax system. It also imparts to students basic techniques and procedures of auditing and taxation with the current law, principles and practice in Hong Kong. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the nature of audit risk and audit evidence perform the test of transactions and balances, conduct analytical review of financial statements. understand the nature and types of audit reports explain the basic operation and administration of the Hong Kong tax system apply tax principles, statutes and case law in computing simple tax liabilities (including property tax, salaries tax, profits tax and personal assessment) for individuals and corporations Indicative Contents Basic Concepts of Auditing Economic demand for auditing; Auditor independence and professional ethics; Responsibilities and legal liabilities of auditors. Audit Risk, Sample Testing and Evidence The nature of audit risk; Audit-risk model; Sample testing and evidential matters. Financial Statements Audit Audit methods and approaches; Analytical review of financial statements. Audit reports Introduction of different types of audit reports. Tax System and Administration in Hong Kong Introduction to Hong Kong tax system and administration; Tax benefits for election of personal assessment in Hong Kong. 272

283 Taxation on Property Scope of charge and computation of property tax in Hong Kong. Taxation on Employment and Office Income Scope of charge and computation of salaries tax for individuals and officers. Taxation on Profits Scope of charge and computation of profits tax for corporations in Hong Kong. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the explanation of relevant principles and practice of auditing and taxation under auditing framework and the Inland Revenue Ordinance in Hong Kong. Group discussions may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to reinforce their understanding of the principles and practices of auditing and taxation. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including participation in discussions, presentations, case studies, individual or/and group assignments, test and an examination designed to develop and assess students problem solving, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Lau, P. and Lam, N. (2009) Auditing and assurance in Hong Kong, 2 nd Ed., PPC. Ho, P. (2010) Hong Kong taxation and tax planning, 9 th Ed., PPC. References For Auditing: Arens, A., Elder, R. and Beasley, M. (2009) Auditing and assurance services: An integrated approach, 13 th Ed., Prentice Hall. All relevant Hong Kong Standards on Auditing issued by the HKICPA 273

284 For Taxation: CCH. (2010) Hong Kong master tax guide 2010/11, 19 th Ed., CCH Asia. Lee, D. and Ho, C. M. (2011) Advanced taxation in Hong Kong, 13 th Ed., Longman. Smith, D. and Macpherson, A. (2010) Hong Kong taxation: Law & Practice , The Chinese University Press. Inland Revenue Ordinance (Chapter 112) and Inland Revenue Rules, and Amendments, HKSAR Government. 274

285 CCN2124 Introduction to Databases Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject equips students with basic concepts and essential skills in developing database so as to support different types of business information systems. It provides training which enables students to learn how to design and operate a database, and to understand database systems from the analysis and design stages to the operating stage using a DBMS tool. This subject also helps students develop the analytical mind, professional attitude, and design skills needed for their future career development. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic concepts of relational model and database systems model the data found in an organisation critically design a database and implement it using a DBMS professionally understand the issues related to database administration Indicative Contents Basic Concepts and Database Models Database system and its objectives; DBMS and its components; Overview of information system development using databases. Relational Data Model Relations; Type of keys; Functional dependencies; Normalization; Structured query language (SQL); Use of SQL for data definition, relational query and data modification. Data Modeling Entity-relationship modeling; Unified modeling language (UML) entity relationship; Attribute specifications; Business rules; Data model validation. Database Design Representing entities with relational model; Relationship representation; Weak entity treatment; Referential integrity enforcement. Database Administration Security and integrity; Concurrency control; Database backup; Database recovery. 275

286 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of theories, concepts, techniques and methodologies in database systems supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Occasional group discussions and activities may be conducted to stimulate students interests or awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen and consolidate their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures. They will also help students apply theories to the analysis of real-life issues when developing database systems and enhance their knowledge and skills in operating database systems using database management system tools. Activities in tutorials may include exercises, student presentations and discussions of problems. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools may be used, such as presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Kroenke, D. and Auer, D. (2011) Database concepts, 5 th Ed., Prentice Hall. References Coronel, C., Morris, S. and Rob, P. (2011) Database systems: Design, implementation & management, 9 th Ed., Cengage Learning. Mannino, M. V. (2007) Database design, application development, & administration, 3 rd Ed., McGraw- Hill. Post, G. V. (2005) Database management systems: Designing & building business applications, 3 rd Ed., McGraw-Hill. 276

287 CCN2125 Introduction to E-commerce Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with knowledge on the fundamentals of e-commerce - its various technical and non-technical infrastructures as well as the mechanisms supporting e-commerce - that are necessary for analysing the possible benefits and limitations of applying the e-commerce approach to business. This subject also helps students develop analytical and practical skills in the applications of e-commerce in a business setting. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand how e-commerce is conducted in online business activities understand the advantages and disadvantages of using e-commerce in a business setting appraise various social issues associated with the conduct of e-commerce analyse and evaluate the possible benefits and limitations of applying the e-commerce approach Indicative Contents Fundamentals of E-commerce Fundamentals of e-commerce and some of its terminology; Business-to-business (B2B) and Business-to-customer (B2C) concepts; Success factors for e-commerce. Applications and Implementation of E-commerce Market research for e-commerce; Internet marketing in B2B; Web advertising; E-auctions; E- marketplaces; E-supply chains; M-commerce; Virtual community strategies. Electronic Payment Systems Basics of electronic payment systems; Common technologies in electronic payment systems; Advantages and disadvantages of different technologies in electronic payment systems. Technical Infrastructure for E-commerce Web hosting services; Insourcing, outsourcing, Application service providers (ASP) and the advantages and limitations of each; E-commerce software packages; Wireless communications technologies for m-commerce; Electronic fund transfer; Web-based client/server; Intranet and extranet. 277

288 The Environment of E-commerce Legal issues versus ethical issues in e-commerce; Privacy; Intellectual property rights; Taxation of e- commerce. The Security of E-commerce Security threats and attacks to e-commerce; Implementing and managing e-commerce security; Securing e-commerce communications and networks. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key e-commerce concepts, with specific reference to current issues wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities might be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some e-commerce concepts. Guest talk(s) from the industry practitioners might be arranged. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to consolidate their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, written reports, test(s) and examination designed to develop and assess students analytical and communication skills as well as practical skills in the applications of e-commerce in a business setting. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Schneider, G. P. (2011) Electronic commerce, 9 th Ed., Course Technology Cengage Learning. Turban, E., Lee, J. K., King D., Liang, T. P. and Turban, D. (2010) Electronic commerce 2010: A managerial perspective, Prentice Hall. References Laudon, K. C. and Traver, C. G. (2011) E-commerce: Business, technology, society, 7 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Reynolds, J. (2010) E-business: A management perspective, Oxford University Press. Turban, E., King, D. and Lang, J. (2011) Introduction to electronic commerce, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. 278

289 CCN2126 Introduction to International Business Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with an overview of international business concepts and to develop students ability to analyse the impact of globalisation on international business, trade and investment. The subject helps students develop a global outlook and an understanding of cultural diversity. It provides a foundation for studying related higher level subjects in international business studies. Leading-edge theories of international business and current issues in globalisation are covered in the subject to strengthen students knowledge of international business practices. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: analyse the current trends of trade and investment in the global environment evaluate the effect of political, socio-economic environments, and cultural differences on international business recognise the increasing integration of the world economy develop the ability to assess the influence of globalisation on business strategies and operations apply relevant knowledge to enhance their understanding of other subjects related to international business Indicative Contents Laying Foundations The need for international business; The international business imperative; Global link today. Global Trade and Investment Instruments of international trade and investment policy; Evolution of the world trading framework; The theory of international investment; Theoretical foundations surrounding national competitive advantage. Globalisation Drivers The elements of culture; Cultural analysis; Similarities and differences between cultures; Politics and law; Political and legal environment. Economic Integration Levels of economic integration; Arguments surrounding economic integration; Regional economic groupings and agreements in different regions. 279

290 Effects of Globalisation on International Business Strategies Strategic planning, implementation, and control; Recognising the need for international research; Global entry and expansion; Motivations to go abroad. International Business and Its Influence on Operations Investigate strategic management issues of global marketing and international HRM; Standardisation versus adaptation; Organisation structures of international business; Selection criteria for overseas assignments; Compensation. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of basic international business concepts, with specific reference to current globalisation issues wherever appropriate. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life international business issues. Activities in the tutorials will normally include group discussions and presentations of case studies, questions and problems sets. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group projects and presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Czinkota, M. R., Ronkainen, I. A. and Moffett, M. H. (2011) International business, 8 th Ed., Wiley. References Ball, D., Geringer, M., Minor, M. S. and McNett, J. M. (2010) International business: The challenge of global competition, 12 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Daniels, J., Radebaugh, L. and Sullivan, D. (2011) International business, 13 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Dlabay, L. R. and Scott, J. C. (2011) International business, 4 th Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. Griffin, R. W. and Purstay, M. (2010) International business, 6 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 280

291 Hill, C. W. L. (2011) International business, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Wild, J. J. and Wild, K. L. (2012) International business, 6 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 281

292 CCN2127 Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisite Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims The aim of this subject is to provide students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of inventory and warehousing management knowledge and principles. This subject emphasises the importance of the roles and functions of inventory and warehousing operations in logistics and supply chain management. This subject also provides students with the basic knowledge and skills regarding the design and management of warehousing operations. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognize the importance of optimum inventory and efficient warehousing management in business appreciate cargo storage and materials handling systems which provide a good academic and vocational foundation for a career in related fields understand inventory and warehousing issues in an integrated logistics flow which reflects sound business practices Indicative Contents Introduction to Inventory and Warehousing Management Importance of inventory management; Types and functions of inventories; Types and functions of warehouse. Materials Handling Materials handling systems and objectives; Types of handling equipment; Selection of the most appropriate equipment in specific situations. Inventory Management Objectives of inventory management; Inventory costs; Economic order quantity (EOQ); Fixed order quantity and fixed order cycle inventory control; Inventory models; Basic inventory management concept and practice. Warehousing Operations and Management Objectives of warehousing management; Warehouse layout and design; Physical control and security; Automation and IT systems in warehouse operations and management. 282

293 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the understanding and explanation of key concepts and theories of inventory and warehousing management. Group discussions and activities will be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Occasionally, corporate visits will be arranged to facilitate students learning. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. The activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, case studies, individual and group projects and presentations, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Arnold, J. R. T., Chapman, S. N. and Clive, L. M. (2008) Introduction to materials management, 6 th Ed., Pearson/Prentice-Hall. References Bowersox, D. J., Closs, D. J. and Cooper, M. B. (2010) Supply chain logistics management, 3 rd Ed., McGraw Hill/Irwin. Coyle, J. J., Bardi, E. J. and Langley, Jr. C. J. (2009) Supply chain management: A logistics perspective, 8 th Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. Grant, D. B., Lambert, D. M., Stock, J. R. and Ellram, L. M. (2006) Fundamentals of logistics management, European Ed., McGraw-Hill. Muller, M. (2003) Essentials of inventory management, American Management Association. Waters, D. (2009) Supply chain management: An introduction to logistics, 2 nd Ed., Palgrave Macmillan. 283

294 Recommend Journals Asia-Pacific International Journal of Business Logistics Containerisation International International Journal of Logistics Management International Journal of Physical Distribution and Management Journal of Business Logistics Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management Journal of Supply Chain Management 284

295 CCN2128 Introduction to Knowledge Management and Organisational Learning Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides students with fundamental understanding on the pertinent concepts and models of knowledge management and organisational learning. The subject focuses on demonstrating how organisations can sustain their competitive advantages through effective harness of knowledge assets and learning dynamics. This subject also helps students develop a holistic view to appreciate the balanced deployment of different drivers for effective knowledge management practices in the knowledge-based economy. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the nature of knowledge management and organisational learning recognise different knowledge management processes and organisational learning dynamics identify the drivers for promoting knowledge management and learning in organisations Indicative Contents Introduction to Knowledge Management Overview of knowledge-based economy; Definition of knowledge management; Objectives of knowledge management; Significance of knowledge management towards competitive advantages. Knowledge Management Frameworks and Processes Nature of knowledge assets; Introduction of knowledge management frameworks; Interplay of knowledge sourcing, capture, codification, sharing, dissemination and refinement. Knowledge Management Drivers Nurturing of knowledge-based workplace; Attributes of knowledge workers; Development of communities of practices; Knowledge management leadership; Dynamics of creativity; Knowledge management through information technology. Dynamics in Global Environment and Organisational Learning Dynamics in information age; Importance of organisational learning for long term success; Paradigm shifts in today s world. 285

296 Nature of Learning Relationship between learning at individual level and learning at organisational level; Bloom s Taxonomy; Cycle of Action; Learn-Unlearn-Relearn process. Teaching/Learning Approach In lectures, fundamental theories and concepts of knowledge management and organisational learning will be introduced, followed by some mini-case reading and group discussions. It is expected to enhance students understanding of those theories and concepts. In tutorials, worksheets, case studies, videos and debate might be used to strengthen students ability to apply principles in order to tackle simulative problems. Students are required to collate and present their findings to their peers in the class. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Dalkir, K. (2005) Knowledge management in theory and practice, Butterworth-Heinemann. References Awad, E. M. and Ghaziri, H. M. (2004) Knowledge management, Prentice Hall. Debowski, S. (2006) Knowledge management, John Wiley & Sons. King, W. R. (2009) Knowledge management and organizational learning, Springer. Nissen, M. E. (2006) Harnessing knowledge dynamics: principled organizational knowing & learning, IRM Press. 286

297 CCN2129 Introduction to Macroeconomics Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims The aim of this subject is to provide students with the fundamental concepts and theories to understand how an economy works as a coordinated whole. Students are expected to apply such tools to give simple analysis of macroeconomic issues. As an introduction to prepare students to more advanced topics, this subject also aims to enable students to appreciate the controversial and developmental nature of macroeconomics. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic concepts and principles of macroeconomics identify different indicators of economics and models to explain the economics phenomena appraise the issues relating to the macroeconomy and analyse the effectiveness of government economic policies apply relevant knowledge to assess how a business is affected by its macroeconomic environment Indicative Contents Scope of Macroeconomics and Basic Concepts in Economic Analysis Introduction of the differences between macroeconomics and microeconomics; The concepts of economic analysis. National Income Accounting and Determination Major macroeconomics issues; Concepts and approaches to national income accounting; Aggregation of expenditure and national income determination. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Explanation of the concepts of the aggregate demand curves and aggregate supply curve; Reasons for their shape and causes for their shifts. Money and Banking Nature of money; Commercial banking and credit creation; Money supply; Demand for money; Money market equilibrium and interest rate; The quantity theory of money; Financial instruments. Inflation and Unemployment Causes and effects of inflation (and deflation) and unemployment; The Phillips curve. 287

298 Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy Roles of government spending and taxation; Central banking and monetary policy; Theories of unemployment and inflation. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key economic concepts, with specific reference made to current economic issues wherever appropriate. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to appraise the theories to the analysis of real-life economic issues. The activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problems sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, such as presentations, case studies, group discussion, written reports, test(s), or other forms of assessments where appropriate to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. An examination will also be held for the subject primarily as a summative assessment. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the teaching plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Mankiw, N. G. (2009) Principles of Macroeconomics, 5 th Ed., South Western. References Frank, R. H., Bernanke, B. S. (2007) Principles of economics, 3 rd Ed., McGraw Hill. Parkin, M. (2009) Macroeconomics, 8 th Ed., Pearson. Robin, B. and Parkin, M. (2009) Essential foundations of economics, 4 th Ed., Addison Wesley. Roger, A. (2008) Microeconomics, 8 th Ed., Thomson Learning. 288

299 CCN2130 Marketing in China Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English, supplemented with Chinese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject develops students understanding of marketing environment in China and their ability in identifying marketing opportunities through the market segmentation of China. By examining the behavioural, operational and institutional aspects of the Chinese market, the subject develops students analytical skills in recognising the successes and failures of marketing mix practices in China. By applying modern marketing theories and frameworks, students can also develop their critical thinking essesntial for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the important trends and constraints that affect marketing in China today understand the opportunities and the distinguishing features of different markets in China understand and describe the Chinese consumer behaviour in different market segments apply modern marketing theories and frameworks to recognise the success and failures of marketing mix in China Indicative Contents The Evolving Marketing Concept in China Production-oriented; Sales-oriented; Marketing-oriented; Customer relationship-oriented. Changing Marketing Environment in China Political environment; Economic environment; Socio-cultural environment; Technological environment; Legal environment. Marketing Segmentation in China Geographic segmentation; Demographic segmentation; Psychographic segmentation. Consumer Behaviour in China Customer value and satisfaction; Rural markets; Luxury markets. Marketing Mix in China Corporate branding; Product branding; Advertising and media; Direct and internet marketing; Pricing; Marketing channel. 289

300 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the concepts, basic facts and updates on latest developments of marketing in China. Activities such us video clips and speeches by guest speakers may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some issues. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the marketing analytical tools and framework to the analysis of real-life marketing cases relating to China. Activities in tutorials will normally include discussions of case studies and student presentations of marketing plans. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook This is a wide and dynamic topic involving mainly current issues which are volatile, so a specific textbook which can easily get outdated is not recommended. References Ambler, T., Witzel, M. and Xi, C. (2009) Doing business in China, Routledge. Kolter, P.,Keller, K. and Lu, T. (2009) Marketing management in China, Prentice Hall. Wang, J. (2008) Brand new China, advertising, media, and commercial culture, Harvard University Press. 290

301 CCN2131 Marketing Research Fundamentals Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject is designed for students who have a basic knowledge of marketing. This subject provides students with an understanding of the nature and basic concepts of marketing research, and the importance of marketing information for making marketing decisions. It introduces the basic techniques and procedures of marketing research, and the important roles of marketing research in a knowledgebased economy to facilitate marketing management to make decisions. This subject also helps students develop the ability to interpret simple marketing research findings for marketing decisions. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify and analyse marketing problems related to marketing situations and decisions locate relevant information sources to resolve marketing problems describe and distinguish different marketing research techniques to achieve research objectives conduct simple research investigation and present research findings Indicative Contents Role of Marketing Research in a Knowledge-based Economy An overview of market research industry and ethics in marketing research; Role of marketing research in a knowledge-based economy. Marketing Information and Customer Database Role of marketing information system for supporting management decision; Database marketing and marketing research; Marketing decision support systems. Research Process and Research Design Research process; Problem definition, research objectives, and an overview of research designs; Briefing on qualitative and quantitative marketing research; Briefing on validity, reliability and practicality issues; Development of research proposals. Secondary Research and Primary Research Secondary data sources; an overview of sampling theories and related issues; Scale measurement and common marketing constructs; Simple questionnaire designs and related issues. 291

302 Data Collection Methods, Analysis and Communicating the Research Results Data collection methods and preparing data for analysis; Research analysis; Preparing marketing research reports and presentations. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will cover the introduction and explanation of marketing research concepts and techniques, with specific reference to current issues, wherever appropriate, as illustrations. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories and skills to the analysis of real-life business situations. Learning activities for this subject will normally include projects, in-class activities/e-forum discussions, and group presentation activities. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes and critical thinking, problem-solving, creativity, teamwork, and presentation skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Churchill, Gilbert A., Brown, Tom J. and Suter, T. A. (2010) Basic Marketing Research, 7 th Cengage Learning. Ed., References Churchill, G. A., Brown, T. J., and Suter, T. A. (2010) Basic marketing research, 7 th Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. Malhotra, N. K. (2011) Basic Marketing Research, 4 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Zikmund, W. G. and Babin, B. J. (2010) Essentials of marketing research, 4 th Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. Burns, A. C. B. and Ronald, F. B. (2010) Marketing research, 6 th Ed./Global Ed., Pearson Education, Inc. 292

303 CCN2132 Principles of Investments Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2113 Financial Management Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of different types of financial securities, the analysis and evaluation of these investment products, and the assessment of the relationship between risk and return. It provides the conceptual framework to analyse investment decisions and to understand how derivatives can be used to hedge risks. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: distinguish different types of investment products, and explain their risk and return profiles apply the investment techniques and analysis in light of risk-return trade-off understand the role of personal risk management and appraise the effectiveness of using investment tools to control a client s exposure to financial risk understand the basics of derivatives Indicative Contents Investment Environment and Instruments Overview on financial markets and market structure; Financial instruments; Stock market indexes; Hong Kong stock market. Investment Diversification Concepts Measures of returns and risks; Benefits of diversifications; Markowitz portfolio theory; Capital Asset Pricing Model; Efficient Market Hypothesis. Equity Investments Margin trading; Dividend-growth model; Earnings model. Mutual Funds Overview on mutual funds and its fee structure; Net asset value (NAV). Derivative Securities Features of equity forward contract, futures and options. 293

304 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Worksheets may also be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complicated theories. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in the tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Bodie, K. and Marcus (2010) Essential of investments, 8 th Ed., McGraw Hill. References Gitman, J. and Smart (2010) Fundamentals of investing, 11 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Mayo (2010) Investments: An introduction, 10 th Ed., Thomson/Course Technology. 294

305 CCN2133 Staffing and Selection Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject delivers fundamental knowledge required for students to understand, review and implement the strategies, policies, and practices of staffing and selection in organisations. It introduces alternative staffing and selection concepts and explains the relationship between staffing and other elements of Human Resource practices. This subject also ensures that students can appreciate how different contextual factors influence staffing and selection practices. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the importance of staffing and explain the various challenges to human resource practitioners in the field of staffing and selection explain the strengths and weaknesses of different techniques and methods used in staffing and selection discuss the feasibility of different staffing and selection systems according to the business and human resource strategies of an organisation identify the legal and ethical issues in various staffing and selection situations Indicative Contents Nature of Staffing Definitions; Staffing methods; Staffing strategies. Staffing and other Human Resource practices Human resource planning; Job analysis; Other supporting activities. Recruitment External recruitment; Internal recruitment; Recruitment strategy; Human Resource searching; Other sources of talents. Selection External selection; Internal selection; Common assessment methods; Decision making; Final match. Contextual issues Legal issues; Ethical issues; Organisational issues. 295

306 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key staffing and selection concepts, with specific reference to current local issues wherever appropriate. Discussions on real life examples will be used to reinforce student learning. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to synthesise the concepts taught in lectures, and to apply theories to solve staffing and selection problems. Activities in tutorials will include student presentations, group discussions and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Heneman, H. and Judge, T. (2009) Staffing organizations, 6 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. References Chan, A., Mak, W., and Bannister, B. (2002) Managing human resources in Hong Kong, 3 rd Thomson/Sweet & Maxwell Asia. Ed., Cook, M. (2009) Personnel selection: adding value through people, 5 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. Farr, J. and Tippins, N. (2010) Handbook of employee selection, Routledge. Pitchard, C. (2007) 101 strategies for recruiting success: where, when, and how to find the right people every time, American Management Association. 296

307 CCN2134 Tourism and Transport Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to introduce the concepts used to understand the relationship between transport and tourism and the characteristics of different forms of passenger transport. By addressing the role, function and operation characteristic of various modes of passenger transport, the subject enables students to recognise the scope of the transport sector in tourist destinations. Current and future challenges facing in the transportation business are also be explored. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing the subject, students will be able to: recognise the development of passenger transport and how it facilitates tourism development identify the principal forms of passenger transport and their key operational characteristics understand different types of transport services and how they interact with the entire tourism system analyse the contemporary issues and challenges facing in the transportation business that relates to the tourism industry Indicative Contents Overview of the Transport Sector Conceptualising tourism and transport; Elements of passenger transport; Role of transport in the tourism industry. Air Transport Airline deregulation; Structure of air transport; Categorisation of airline operation; Economies of airline operation; Globalisation and alliances; Role and operation of airport in the airline business. Water Transport Cruise vacation and experience; Major cruising areas and ports of call worldwide; Cruise itinerary planning and tourist destination development; Coastal and inland waterways transport. Land Transport Rail travel and products; Types of train; Car rental and motorcoach business in tourism. Contemporary Issue for Tourist Transport Future challenges of passenger travel; Environmental impact of tourist transport; Future travel methods and experiences. 297

308 Teaching/Learning Approach The focus of lectures will be on introducing and explaining key concepts in the field. Emphasis will be placed on clarifying the practical implication of the theories in a real life situation. Tutorials will provide room for students to reflect and discuss the matters and issues covered in lectures. Students will be responsible for working on group projects and give presentations to show how well they understand the theories and concepts taught in class. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations, discussions of contemporary issues and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including oral presentations, written reports, test(s) and examination(s) designed to develop students critical thinking as well as their analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Page, S. J. (2009) Transport and tourism: Global perspectives, 3 rd Ed., Pearson Education. References Bazargan, M. (2010) Airline operations and scheduling, 2 nd Ed., Ashgate. Dowling, R. K. (2006) Cruise ship tourism, CABI Pub. Duval, D. T. (2007) Tourism and transport: Modes, networks and flows, Chanel View Publications. Gibson, P. (2006) Cruise operations management, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann. Ward, D. (2007) Berlitz complete guide to cruising and cruise ships, 16 th Ed., Berlitz Pub. Wensveen, J. G. (2007) Air transportation: A management perspective, 6 th Ed., Ashgate. 298

309 CCN2135 Training and Development Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides students with skills and knowledge to identify the needs for training and development of employees, organise and implement training and development programmes, explore the issues involved, and demonstrate the contribution of training and development to the success of the employees and the organisation. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: articulate the functions of training and development in fostering self-development, career development, organisation learning and performance list the needs and related challenges for training and development in an organisation discuss basic learning and development theories and concepts describe common techniques and approaches of training and development discuss the effectiveness of training and development programmes Indicative Contents Training and Development in Organisations Importance of training and development; Forces influencing working and learning; Training and strategies. Learning Theories and Programme Design Common learning theories; Learning process; Considerations in designing effective training programmes. Training and Development Functions Practical and systematic approaches to training and development; Managing the training and development functions; Delivering training and development; Effectiveness of training and development programmes. Roles of Technology in Training and Development Impact of technology on training and development; Computer-based learning. Professional Practices in Training and Development Ethical issues; Legal issues; Current issues faced by staff trainers and developers. 299

310 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key training and development concepts, with specific reference to current issues. Video shows and case studies will enhance students learning interest. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of concepts and to apply theories to the analysis of real-life training and development issues. They will also encourage students to integrate what they have learnt through activities, including student presentations, group discussions and case studies into real-life scenarios. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, training exercises, tests and an examination which are designed to develop and assess students achievement of subject intended learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Blanchard, P. and Thacker, J. (2010) Effective training: systems, strategies and practices, 4 th Ed., Prentice Hall. References Chan, J. (2010) Designing and developing training programs, Pfeiffer. Harrison, R. (2009) Learning and development, Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development. Noe, R. (2010) Employee training and development, 5 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Swanson, R. and Holton E. (2009) Foundations of human resources development, Berrett-Kohler. Werner, J. and DeSimore, R. (2009) Human Resource Development, 5 th Ed., South-Western. 300

311 CCN2136 Travel Agency Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisite Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject examines the basic daily operations of travel agents. It offers an overview of different travel products and services. It helps students develop the knowledge, basic skills and attitudes required to work in an inbound or outbound travel agency. This subject also helps students clarify their career goals in the tourism industry. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify the roles and responsibilities of travel agents in tourism development understand the different types of tour operations and travel agents understand the procedures and apply the techniques and right attitude when dealing with clients in a travel agency apply industrial practices with respect to the local environment apply the concepts to effective itinerary planning Indicative Contents The Roles and Functions of Travel Agents Different types of products and services offered by a travel agency; Different types of tours; Common travel terminology. Types of Tour Operations Types of travel operations, Travel sales distribution system; Wholesale and retail agents; Inbound and outbound tour operators and travel agents. Skills in dealing with clients in a Travel Agency Attitude of a travel agent; Telephone technique; Skills in presenting products to clients; Technique in dealing with difficult clients. Package Tour Development Destination research; Different types of contracts with tourism suppliers; Itinerary planning; Cost calculation; Marketing a tour; Job nature of a tour guide and a tour escort. 301

312 Important Travel Requirements: Different types of travel documents; Travel insurance and compensation; the Travel industry compensation fund. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures and seminars will use an interactive approach to strengthen the concepts, and applications of principles and key issues. The learning process will employ a student-centred learning approach which will integrate lectures and tutorials and provide in-class practices for students to apply the concepts learned to projects such as itinerary planning and field trips. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, roleplay, test(s) and an examination. They are designed to assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Steinberg, W. A. (2001) Travel agency operations, 1 st Ed., International Institute of Travel, Prentice Hall. References Horner, P. (1996) Travel agency practice,1 st Ed., Longman. Mancini, M. (2001) Conducting tours, 3 rd Ed., Delmar Thomson Learning. Syratt, G. (2003) Manual of travel agency practice, 3 rd Ed., Elsevier. Systems in travel [videorecording]: Two travel agency case studies. (2004) TV Choice Productions. 302

313 CCN2137 Business Law and the Regulation of Financial Services Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Exclusions CCN2108 Business Law Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject enables students to develop fundamental knowledge and understanding of the general legal framework and principles of Hong Kong Business Law, particularly those in the financial services industry, including laws and regulations, licensing requirements, as well as regulatory requirements and trading practices. The subject also helps students to appreciate the special features of the Hong Kong regulatory framework in the context of an international environment. It also helps students develop critical thinking skills for life-long learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate the importance and structure of the regulatory framework in Hong Kong explain the law relating to contract, agency and professional negligence appreciate the key concepts in the regulation and operation of the financial services industry aware the recent trend and development of the regulatory framework Indicative Contents Hong Kong Legal System and Regulatory Bodies Legal system in Hong Kong; The nature and roles of different regulatory bodies in the financial services industry; Recent trends and development of the regulatory environment. The Law of Contract Essential elements of a valid contract; Terms of contract; Discharge of contract and remedies. Agency and Professional Negligence Agency relationships; Duty of care; Negligence; Professional liability for negligent misstatement. Hong Kong Laws to Financial Services Industry Companies Ordinance; Securities and Futures Ordinance; Insurance Companies Ordinance and Major Subsidiary Legislation and Codes and Guidelines. 303

314 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the explanation of key concepts and assist students in the assimilation of basic legal theory, together with its practical application to the financial services environment. They will also provide further analysis of the topics in the syllabus, with particular emphasis on practical examples, and discussions of how the law affects business decisions. Tutorials will be conducted in a problem-based approach aiming to promote student participation in the learning process, through discussion and application of law to facts. Tutorials will emphasis the practical application of legal theories. They will also reinforce the topics dealt with generally in lectures. A teaching and learning approach that allows students to integrate their legal knowledge with that of other disciplines in the business field will be used. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Stott, V. (2010) An introduction to Hong Kong business law, 4 th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. Fong-Chong Hsu, et al. (2006) Financial markets in Hong Kong: Law and practice, 1 st Ed., Oxford University Press. References Study manual for Paper 1 Fundamentals of securities and futures regulation. (2010) Hong Kong Securities Institute. Carver, A. (2004) Hong Kong business law, 6 th Ed., Longman. Kwan, Y. K. (2003) A guide to the Securities and Futures Ordinance, Hong Kong Stock Brokers Association. Stott, V. (2008) Hong Kong company law, 12 th Ed., Longman. 304

315 CCN2138 The Events Industry Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to provide a macro overview to the events industry. Based on the fundamentals of historical, economic and social aspects of the events industry, various types of events and basic essentials in delivering events are covered. The industry professionalism and career prospects of events practitioners are highlighted, so as to enhance students general understanding of the subject from both the theoretical and practical perspectives. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing the subject, students will be able to: describe the event industry and its implications to the economic and social environments identify and define different types of events understand the profession and the structural network of suppliers contributing to the industry become cognizant of the essentials in the events management process demonstrate problem-solving skills in dealing with common issues encountered by an entry-level associate Indicative Contents Historical, Economic and Social Aspects of the Event Industry Historical root of the event industry; Concept of the event experience; Economic, political and social implications of the event industry; Events as an international business. Event Categorisation Political and organisational events; Social and fundraising events; Convention and exhibition events; Sports and recreational events; Festival and cultural events; Special events. Structural Aspects of the Event Industry and Stakeholders The agency roles of events organisers; Contractor-based network of suppliers; Other stakeholders such as the host organisation and community; Sponsors; Media; Participants; Spectators and governments. Events Operations in Essence Related activities in event planning, delivery, staging; Evaluation of outcomes. 305

316 Professionalism and Career Paths Attributes and profiles of events practitioners; Career opportunities; Certification of professional standing and professional bodies. Teaching/Learning Approach An interactive approach will be adopted in lectures to introduce key concepts of the subject with specific reference to current issues of the subject. Tutorials will be used to facilitate students, both individually and in group, to deepen their understanding of the concepts and application of theories to case scenarios, through forming and presenting their opinions in class. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including oral presentations, written reports, tests and an examination which are designed to develop and assess students analytical abilities and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks McCartney, G. (2010) Event management An Asian perspective, McGraw Hill Higher Education Asia. Shone, A. and Parry, B. (2010) Successful event management: A practical handbook, 3 rd Ed., Cengage Learning. References Fenich, George G. (2008) Meetings, expositions, events, and conventions: An introduction to the industry, 2 nd Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall. Getz, D. (2005) Event management & event tourism, Cognizant Communication Corporation. Ladkin, A. & Spiller, J. (2000) The meetings, incentives, conferences and exhibitions industry, Travel & Tourism Intelligence. Van Der Wagen, L. (2007) Event management: For tourism, cultural, business and sporting events, 3 rd Ed., Pearson Education. 306

317 CCN2139 Convention Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2138 The Events Industry Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides students with an understanding of the convention and meeting industry, and of the techniques in planning, organising and coordinating conventions and meetings at different venues. By understanding the logistics in planning and hosting a successful meeting, students are able to provide quality services to convention delegates. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify different types of conventions and meetings and their characteristics formulate effective strategies for operating different types of meeting explain the management concepts and theories in the context of the convention industry develop specialist skills and procedures required in planning, organising and coordinating conventions and meetings Indicative Contents Introduction to the MICE industry The business environment of conventions; Types of conventions and meetings; Meeting planners and managing the planning of conventions. Meeting Facilities and Technology Meeting facilities; Managing sites and venue selection; Audio-visual equipment; On-line booking systems. Accommodation and Transportation Arrangements Air transportation and ground transportation for delegates; Accommodation at venue and hotels; Invitation of keynote speakers and VIPs; Local tour arrangements for delegates. Contract and Negotiation Managing suppliers to conventions; Selection and appointments of contractors and suppliers; Coordination with facilities providers. Convention Logistics and Program Design Planning tools; Shipping and receiving project materials; Delegates registration; On-site logistics and operations; Sequence of conference programmes; Speakers arrangements. 307

318 Floor Plan Design Consideration Conference room configuration; VIP guestrooms and ready rooms for speakers; Seating format and arrangements. Managing and Organising Convention Operations Quality management; Pre-event forecast; Budgetary and legal considerations; Marketing and promotion; Human resources and temporary staff; Food and beverage services; Post-convention evaluation. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of convention management concepts, with specific reference to current issues in the convention industry wherever appropriate. Group discussions may be conducted occasionally. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and apply the theories to the analysis of real-life convention operational issues. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Field trips may be included to allow students to have an appreciation of MICE businesses and relate them to relevant theories studied in the classroom. Guest speakers may be invited to deliver lectures on current issues related to convention and meeting management in order to enhance students understanding and provide them with opportunities to learn how to apply the theories and concepts to real business contexts. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 hours of class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook McCabe, V., Poole, B., Weeks, P. and Leiper, N. (2000) The business and management of conventions, John Wily & Sons. References Astroff, M. and Abbey, J. (2006) Convention sales and services, 7 th Ed., Waterbury Press. 308

319 Bowdin, G., Allen, J., O toole, W., Harris, R. and Mcdonnell, I. (2007) Events management, 2 nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons. Fenich, G. G. (2008) Meetings, expositions, events, and conventions: An introduction to industry, 2 nd Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall. Raj, R., Walters, P. and Rashid, T. (2009) Events management an integrated and practical approach, Sage Publications. Rogers, T. (2008) Conferences and conventions A global industry, 2 nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann. Tum, J., Norton, P. and Wright, J. N. (2006) Management of event operations, Elsevier Butterworth- Heinemann. Van der Wagen, L. (2007) Event management: For tourism, cultural, business, and sporting events, 3 rd Ed., Pearson Education. 309

320 CCN2140 Event Sales and Marketing Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Assessment CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject develops students understanding and skills in applying the conceptual framework, tools and techniques, and step-by-step approach of sales and marketing to the event industry. It introduces the principles and considerations of sales and marketing in the event industry. It also examines the relative roles of sales and marketing and the practical tools and follow-through skills ranging from developing objectives, through formulating action plans and budgets, to monitoring sales and marketing efforts. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing the subject, students will be able to: understand the essential concepts of sales and marketing in the context of the event industry describe the various sales and marketing activities and considerations relevant to the event industry formulate sales and marketing plans for various kinds of events monitor event sales and marketing efforts Indicative Contents Inter-relationship between Event Stakeholders and Customers Needs Analysis of marketing environment; Understanding stakeholders; Understanding competitors. Marketing Objectives and Targeting Marketing objectives; Determining target audiences; Consumers and organisational buyers in buying decision-making process. Sales and Marketing Communication Toolkit Event communication methods and media choices; Public relations, E-marketing communications; Advertising; Sales promotion; Personal selling; Direct and relationship marketing. Funding and Sponsorship Developing budget; Funding resources; Recruiting sponsors; Sponsorship programme structures; Sponsorship rights; Corporate sponsorship. Implementing Marketing Plan and Monitoring Marketing Efforts Budget allocation; Coordination and follow up of marketing plan; Methods for measuring and monitoring marketing efforts. 310

321 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts, with specific reference to current issues wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions on problems and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination which are designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and presentation skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Masterman, G. and Wood, E. (2006) Innovative marketing communications: Strategies for the events industry, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann. References Getz, D. (2005) Event management & event tourism, Cognizant Communication Corporation. Hoyle, L. (2002) Event marketing: How to successfully promote events, festivals, conventions, and expositions, John Wiley & Sons. Morrison, A. M. (2010) Hospitality and travel industry marketing, 4 th Ed., Delmar Cengage Learning. Saget, A. (2006) The event marketing handbook: Beyond logistics and planning, Dearborn Trade Publishing. Stevens, R. P. (2005) Trade Show and Event Marketing: plan, promote & profit, Thomson Learning. 311

322 CCN2141 Exhibition Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2138 The Events Industry Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with the concepts of planning, organising and promoting exhibitions. It provides practical tools, techniques and follow-through skills used by professional organisers. Furthermore, it introduces to students a step-by-step approach to grasping the essential solutions to exhibition operations. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing the subject, students will be able to: identify different types of exhibitions and their characteristics formulate strategies for operating different type of exhibitions explain the essential concepts of exhibition planning and operation monitor and follow through the exhibition projects by the required skills and tools Indicative Contents History and Development The exhibition industry; Global trends; Fairs and expositions; Exhibitions and trade shows; Varieties and perspectives. Exhibition Planning Situation analysis; Market research; Objectives and strategies; Legal considerations; Risk management; Venue selection; Budgeting and financial planning. Exhibition Operations Venue selection; Floor plan development; Educational programming; Food functions and special events; Exhibitor and visitor recruitment; Marketing and promotion. Contractors and Suppliers Appointment of official service contractors; Specialty service contractors and suppliers management, Accommodation management; Air and ground transportation. On-site Operations Opening ceremony and crowd control; Registration and data management; Staffing and communications; Crisis management and security; Post show evaluations. 312

323 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key exhibition operation concepts, with specific reference to current issues in the exhibition industry wherever appropriate. Public guided tours to trade fairs may be arranged. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life issues. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problems and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination which are designed to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and presentation skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Kent, P. (2006) The Art of the show: An introduction to the study of exhibition management, 3 rd Ed., IAEM Services, Inc. Kirchgeorg, M., Dornscheidt, W. M., Giese, W. and Stoeck, N. (2005) Trade Show Management, 1 st Ed., Wiesbaden. References Bowdin, G., Allen, J., O toole, W., Harris, R. and Mcdonnell, I. (2007) Events management, 2 nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons. Jurisevic, S. I. (2002) Exhibitions and trade show, Prentice Hall. Raj, R., Walters, P. and Rashid, T. (2009) Events management An integrated and practical approach, Sage Publications. Robbe, D. (2000) Expositions and trade show, John Wiley & Sons. Stevens, R. P. (2005) Trade show and event marketing, Thomson. 313

324 CCN2142 Insurance Planning and Mandatory Provident Fund Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with the knowledge of the principles and practices of insurance and mandatory provident funds. It is designed to help students understand the functions of insurance and mandatory provident fund as part of financial planning. After successful completion of this course, students should be able to use insurance as a tool to advice clients from a financial planning perspective and understand the operation and implication of mandatory provident fund in financial planning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the major areas of insurance industry that are regulated assess and select appropriate types of insurance policies and provisions with respect to clients needs understand mandatory provident fund operation compare and contrast the characteristics of ORSO scheme and MPF system Indicative Contents Insurance Industry and Regulation Regulation of the Insurance Industry; Financial Aspects of Insurer Operations; Legal Framework. Long Term Insurance Personal risks; Actuarial Basics of Life Insurance; Provisions in Life Insurance Contract; Special Life Insurance; Annuities and Retirement Plans. General Insurance Negligence and Legal Liability; Liability Insurance; Pecuniary Insurance; Health Insurances. Framework of Mandatory Provident Fund (MPF) Regulatory Framework; Interface Arrangement for ORSO Schemes and MPF System. Mandatory Provident Fund Key Features of MPF; MPF Trustee; MPF Scheme and Investment; MPF Intermediaries. 314

325 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the explanation and application of key insurance concepts and mandatory provident fund features, with specific reference to current issues wherever appropriate. Group discussions may be arranged at intervals. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply theories and knowledge to the analysis of real-life cases. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problems sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Institute of Financial Planners of Hong Kong (2009) Fundamentals of risk and insurance, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd. Rejda, G. (2011) Principles of risk management and insurance, 11 th Ed., Addison Wesley. References Institute of Financial Planners of Hong Kong (2006) Practice guide for financial planner, IFPHK. Insurance intermediaries quality assurance examination scheme study notes: Principles and practice of insurance. (2004) Office of Insurance Commissioner. Hong Kong. Insurance intermediaries quality assurance examination scheme study notes: Long-term insurance. (2007) Office of Insurance Commissioner. Hong Kong. Insurance intermediaries quality assurance examination scheme study notes: General insurance. (2008) Office of Insurance Commissioner. Hong Kong. Insurance intermediaries quality assurance examination scheme study notes: Mandatory provident fund scheme. (2009) Office of Insurance Commissioner. Hong Kong. 315

326 CCN2143 Introduction to Service Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject introduces to students the basic principles and concepts of service management. It aims to equip students with the knowledge of design, delivery, and management of services. This subject also helps students develop analytical and problem-solving skills relating to service management. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: appreciate the nature of service and service process understand the basic concepts and theories of service management articulate the broad basic elements of managing service design, delivery, and performance apply the knowledge of service management to analyse the daily operations of common service organisations Indicative Contents Introduction to Service Nature of service; Service strategy; Service encounter; Competitive environment of service industries; Local and international trends of service. Managing Service Delivery Overview of managing capacity and demand; Basic principles of managing waiting lines; Managing supply relationships; Technology in services. Design and Development of Service Principles of facility design and layout; Key factors in deciding facility location; New service development. Overview of Service Quality and Service Innovation Dimensions of service quality; Basic principles of service quality management; Culture and service quality; Principles of new product/service development. 316

327 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts and theories of service management. Current issues and real-life examples will be used to enhance students knowledge and understanding of the entire spectrum of service operations and management. Occasional group discussions will be conducted. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real-life situations relating to service management. Activities in tutorials will include student presentations, small group discussions and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess the expected learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Fitzsimmons, J. A. and Fitzsimmons, M. J. (2011) Service management: Operations, strategy, information technology, 7 th Ed., McGraw Hill. References Andersen, B. (2007) Business process improvement toolbox, American Society for Quality Press. Gronroos, C. (2007) Service management and marketing: Customer management in service competition, 3 rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons. Heizer, J. and Render, B. (2011) Principles of operations management, 8 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Johnston, R. and Clark, G. (2008) Service operations management: Improving service delivery, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. Looy, B. V., Gemmel, P. and Dierdonck, R. V. (2003) Services management: An integrated approach, 2 nd Ed., Prentice Hall. Metters R., Metters, K., Pullman, M, and Walton, S. (2006) Successful service operations management, 2 nd Ed., South-Western. Ramaswamy, R. (1996) Design and management of service processes: Keeping customers for life, 1 st Ed., Addison-Wesley. 317

328 CCN2144 Principles of Financial Planning Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with the skills and knowledge essential to practise in the personal financial planning industry. It explains the financial planning principles and techniques while practising the financial planning process. It equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for developing financial plans, and strategies to achieve personal goals at different stages in life. It also provides the importance of ethical practices in financial planning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the principles and steps of financial planning identify the personal financial planning needs of individuals relating to life cycle stages, economics, investment and social environment appreciate the involvement and importance of insurance planning, investment planning, retirement planning, estate planning and tax planning in financial planning understand the importance of ethical practices in financial planning develop all-round skills by integrating interpersonal skills, communication skills, analytical skills and subject knowledge Indicative Contents Principles of Financial Planning General principles of financial planning; Six steps in personal financial planning; Financial planning considerations. Components in Financial Planning Insurance planning and risk management; Investment planning; Basic tax planning considerations and strategies; Retirement planning; Estate planning. Professionalism in Financial Planning Ethics; Professional responsibility; Ethical conduct; The financial planning profession. 318

329 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the explanation and application of financial planning processes and techniques supported by hypothetical examples and their own examples wherever appropriate. They will also cover different factors such as life cycle stages, economics, investment and social environment in designing a financial plan. Tutorials will, through case studies and problem based learning, encourage critical analysis of the course materials and the application of the theories to the real-life situations. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to enhance students interpersonal and communication skills. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Cheng, L., Leung, T. Y. and Wong, Y. H. (2009) Financial planning & wealth management: An international perspective, 1 st Ed., McGraw Hill. Gitman and Joenk. (2011) Personal financial planning, 12 th Ed., Thomson South-Western. References Ernst & Young. (2004) Personal financial planning guide, 5 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. Kapoor, D. and Hughes. (2009) Personal finance, 9 th Ed., Mcgraw-Hill/Irwin. 319

330 CCN2145 Principles of Insurance Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with the knowledge of general principles and practices of insurance. It is designed to help students understand the theories, regulatory framework of insurance, types of insurance, and the major types of insurance products. After successful completion of this course, students should be able to use insurance as a tool to manage personal and/or group assets. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify what insurance is, why insurance works and how to determine insurance needs explain insurance operation, including functions of insurance, insurance markets, insurance regulations and the use of insurance as a tool to avoid losses and reduce risk familiarise with major insurance products, such as life insurance, health insurance, property and liability insurance understand various kinds of insurance plans as well as the contract selection criteria from a costbenefit point of view Indicative Contents Risk assessment and Insurance Introduction to risk and insurance; Risk management techniques; Legal principles of insurance; Analysis of insurance contracts. Personal Property and Liability Risks Homeowners insurance; Automobile insurance. Commercial Property and Liability Risks Commercial property and commercial liability insurance. Life and Health Insurance Premature death; Types of life insurance; Cost of life insurance; Individual health insurance; Long Term Care Insurance; Disability Income Insurance. Insurance Industry Functions and organisation of insurers; Pricing of insurers. 320

331 Framework of Insurance Regulations Government regulation; Industry self-regulation; Other related issues. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key insurance concepts and theories, with reference to current issues wherever appropriate. Group discussions will be conducted at intervals. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories and knowledge to the analysis of real-life insurance cases. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problems sets. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess students analytical skills in applying the insurance theories to solve practical situations. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Rejda, G. (2011) Principles of risk management and insurance, 11 th Ed., Addison Wesley. References Harrington, S. and Niehaus, G. (2004) Risk management and insurance, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill. Williams, C., Arthur Jr., M. L., Smith and Young, P. C. (2008) Risk management and insurance, 8th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Insurance intermediaries quality assurance examination scheme study notes 1: Principles and practice of insurance. (2011) Office of Insurance Commissioner. Hong Kong. Insurance intermediaries quality assurance examination scheme study notes 2: Long-term insurance. (2011) Office of Insurance Commissioner. Hong Kong. Insurance intermediaries quality assurance examination scheme study notes 3: General insurance. (2011) Office of Insurance Commissioner. Hong Kong. 321

332 CCN2146 Quality Management of Service Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject provides students with the knowledge and skills required for quality management in service operations. It helps students develop a broad understanding of the concepts and theories of service quality management, and of the different frameworks for managing and improving service quality. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the concepts and dimensions of quality analyse common quality issues in the context of service management suggest quality management methods for running a service operation Indicative Contents Quality Concepts and Dimensions Definitions of quality; Perspectives of quality; Approaches to quality management; Theoretical framework for quality management. Designing and Assuring Quality Strategic quality planning; Voice of customer and market; Designing quality services; Managing supplier quality. Implementing Quality Overview of lean production; Total quality control; Total quality management; Gaps and Service Quality model; ISO standards and process; Tools for service quality management and performance measurement; Balanced Scorecard; Management of quality teams. Improving the Quality System Managing learning for quality improvement; Understanding quality audits; Implementing and validating the quality system. 322

333 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will primarily focus on the delivery of a theoretical framework on quality management of service operations. Occasionally group discussions and in-class exercises may be arranged. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunities to explore further the concepts, theories, principles and enquires arising from lectures and to apply the concepts and theories to real-life issues. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations, discussions of problems, case studies and video shows. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess the expected learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Foster, T. S. (2010) Managing quality: Integrating the supply chain, 4 th Ed., Prentice Hall. References Besterfield, D. H., Besterfield-Michna, C. and Besterfield-Sacre, M. (2003) Total quality management, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. Evans, J. R. and Lindsay, W. M. (2011) The management and control of quality, 6 th Ed., South-Western. Johnston, R. and Clark, G. (2005) Service operations management: Improving service delivery, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. Summers, D. C. S. (2009) Quality management: Creating and sustaining organizational effectiveness, 2 nd Ed., Prentice Hall. Zeithami, V. A., Parasuraman, A. and Berry, L. L. (2009) Delivering quality service: Balancing customer perceptions and expectations, Free Press. 323

334 CCN2147 Retail and Sales Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with the concept and knowledge of dealing with fundamental management issues which are of prime importance to the success of retail and sales management. This subject also prepares students to apply their knowledge learned in the workplace. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify and explain the functions and activities that retailers and sales forces perform they make in service industries understand the trends as well as issues that impact the retail and sales management in service industries articulate the concepts and theories for managing retail and sales performance apply the theories and knowledge learned to the issues of retail and sales management Indicative Contents Introduction to Retail Management and Its Roles Retail management functions and decisions; Types of service retailing and their characteristics; Legal and ethical issues in retailing. Retailing Strategies and Plans Retail planning and management process; Customer service strategies in retailing; Market and location strategies for retail outlets; Types of retail strategies. Trends and Issues on Retailing Market and environmental trends in retailing; Best practices in retailing; Retailing technologies; Retailing in Hong Kong. Introduction to Sales Management and its Roles Responsibilities and duties of sales managers; Performance quality of sales managers; Creating customer loyalty and value; Legal and ethical issues in selling. Sales Management Strategies and Plans Sales forces planning and organising; Sales force motivation and compensation; Sales force leadership; Sales force training; Sales force performance. 324

335 Trends and issues on Sales Management Trends in relationship selling; Communication for relationship building; Internet and IT applications in sales management. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts, theories and strategies, with specific reference to current retail and sales management issues wherever appropriate. The teaching approach will help students develop retail and sales management knowledge and skills, in connection with local and global examples from various service industries. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts, theories and strategies taught in lectures and to apply them to the analysis of real-life issues. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations, discussions of problems and case studies. Industry personnel will be invited as guest speakers, whose talks will strengthen the applicability and students understanding of retail and sales concepts and theories in a competitive business environment. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess the expected learning outcomes. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and the examination. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Hair, J. F., Anderson, R. E., Mehta, R. and Babin, B. J. (2010) Sales management: Building customer relationships and partnerships, South-Western. Ogden, J. R. and Ogden, D. T. (2005) Retailing: Integrated retail management, Houghton Mifflin. References Berman, B. and Evan, J. R. (2010) Retail management: A strategic approach, 11 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Dunne, P., Lusch, R. and Carver, J. (2011) Retailing, 7 th Ed., South-Western. Futrell, C. M. (2011) ABC s of relationship selling through service, 11 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Ingram, T., LaForge, R., Avila, R., Schwepker Jr., C. and Williams, M. (2006) Sales management: Analysis and decision making, 6 th Ed., Thomson/South-Western. 325

336 Jobber, D. and Lancaster, G. (2009) Selling and sales management, 8 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Levy, M. and Weitz, B. A. (2009) Retailing management, 7 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Manning, G., Reece, B. and Ahearne, M. (2010) Selling today: Creating customer value, 11 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 326

337 CCN2148 Service Marketing Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject is designed to equip students with knowledge about the unique challenges inherent in the marketing of services and the strategies needed to address such challenges. It aims to help students obtain necessary basic knowledge and skills of defining, measuring, managing and delivering quality services in various service industries. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the importance of service marketing in a changing business environment identify and address the marketing-relevant differences between services and goods analyse how to manage service encounter, complaint and service recovery apply service marketing concepts to solve problems or achieve marketing objectives Indicative Contents Understanding Marketing of Services The nature, definition, and classification of services; A framework for viewing and analysing current issues of service marketing and trends in Hong Kong. Service Productivity and Quality The measurement and dimension of service productivity and service quality; The techniques for identifying the root cause of specific service quality problems. Customer Satisfaction The relationship between service marketing and relationship marketing by understanding customer behaviour in service environments, customer loyalty, customer complaint handling and service recovery. Overview of Service Marketing Mix The nature of service marketing mix: product and supplementary elements, physical and electronic channels, promoting services and educating customers, and price. 327

338 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on introducing concepts, theories, processes and related issues to students for building a sound foundation in the field of service marketing and developing innovative services strategies. Both local and global examples from various service industries will be discussed. Tutorials will cover case study analysis, discussing marketing management issues in real-life situations. In-class/eForum discussions and other student-centred activities will be adopted during the seminars to strengthen students understanding and applicability of services marketing theories or models in the competitive business environment. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes and critical thinking, problem-solving, creativity, teamwork, and presentation skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Lovelock, C. H. and Wirtz, J. and Chew, P. (2009) Essentials of Services Marketing, 1 st Ed., Pearson. References Hoffman, K. D. and Bateson, J. E. G. (2011) Services marketing: Concepts, strategies, & cases, 4 th Ed., Cengage Learning. Lovelock, C. and Wirtz, J. (2011) Services marketing: People, technology, strategy, 7 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Zeithaml, V. A., Bitner, M. J., and Gremler, D. (2009) Services marketing, 5 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. 328

339 CCN2149 Special Events Planning Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2138 The Events Industry Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with the concept of planning and coordinating various types of special events. It introduces practical tools, techniques and follow-through skills used by professional organisers. Both profit and non-profiting making events are put into consideration for a complete understanding of event planning and implementation. Furthermore, it introduces a step-by-step approach for students to grasp the essential solutions to event planning and organisation. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successful completion of the subject, students will be able to: identify different types of special events and their characteristics of operations and logistics understand the planning and management process of various special events assess various impacts of special events on destination and local community formulate the logistic and operational plan for various kinds of events coordinate and follow through the event projects with useful techniques and tools Indicative Contents Perspectives and Definition Definition and framework; Categorisation and typology of special events; Market demand and major suppliers for special events. Impacts of special events Social, economic, political, physical and environmental implications of running events; Crowd control operation. Developing and implementing event plan Research and analysis; Objective and theme development; Event planning process; Controlling mechanisms and timeline setting. Event Venue and Site Selection Event destination and site selection; Facilities planning, design and consideration. Human Resources Planning Needs assessment; Event staff recruitment policies and procedures; Volunteer training and motivation. 329

340 Risk Management and Legal issues Legal issues; Contracts; Insurances; Regulations, licensing and permits; Security requirement; Contingency handling. Evaluation and Reporting Evaluation plan and techniques; Visitors assessment; Final reports on the planning of a future event. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Worksheets may also be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complex economic theories. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Allen, J., O Toole, W., Harris, R. and McDonnell, I. (2010) Festival and special event management, 5 th Ed., Wiley. LoCicero, J. (2008) Streetwise meeting and event planning, 1 st Ed., Adams Media. References McCartney, G. (2010) Event management An Asian perspective, 1 st Ed., McGraw Hill. Silvers, R. J. (2004) Professional event coordination, 1 st Ed., Wiley. Shone, A. and Parry, B. (2010) Successful event management, 3 rd Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. Van Der Lynn, W. (2007) Event management: For tourism, cultural, business and sporting events, 3 rd Ed., Pearson. 330

341 CCN2150 Venue Operations Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Assessment Nil 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to equip students with the concepts of operating convention and exhibition centres. It introduces practical tools, techniques and follow-through skills used by professional venue operators. From site selection to daily operations, careful and detailed planning is required to maintain the services to be provided for organisers, exhibitors/delegates and visitors. Strategic positioning and routine operations are emphasised to enable students to acquire the full picture of venue operations. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successful completion of the subject, students will be able to: identify differences and similarities among different convention and exhibition venues understand the history, current status, and trends of convention and exhibition venues development identify the relationship between a venue and its stakeholders understand the knowledge and skills of a successful venue manager Indicative Contents History and Development Conference venues; Convention and exhibition venues; Hotels; Site selection; Modes of management. Facility Management Facility design and planning; Building operations; Housekeeping. Food and Beverage Restaurants; Lounges; Catering. General Administration Finance and accounts; Human resources; Purchasing and supplies; Management information system. Safety and Security Safety and emergency preparedness; Security; Risk management; Crowd management. Business Development Communications; Event planning and co-ordination; Marketing and sales. 331

342 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Silvers, J. R. (2004) Professional event coordination, 1 st Ed., Wiley. Davidson, R. and Rogers, T. (2006) Marketing destinations and venue, 1 st Ed., Butterworth Heinemann. References Lucas, R. W. (2009) Customer service Skills for success, 4 th Ed., McGraw Hill. Petersen, D. C. (2001) Developing sports, convention, and performing arts centers, 1 st Institute. Ed., Urban 332

343 CCN2151 Business Marketing Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims at facilitating students understanding of the fundamental concepts and theories of business marketing. It enables students to realise the nature of business buying behaviour and the roles of marketing in the context of inter-organisation relationships. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: distinguish the major differences between business to business marketing (B2B) and business to consumer marketing (B2C) understand the basic concepts and theories of professional business selling apply the buying center concepts and relevant theories to the analyses of business buying behaviour formulate appropriate business marketing strategies for different marketing situations Indicative Contents Introduction to Business Marketing Nature of business buying behaviour; Business demand characteristics; Differences between business and consumer markets; Ethical considerations in business marketing. Organisational Buying Process Roles and objectives of the business buyers; Business buying process; Business buying situations; Influence of environmental forces on buying decisions. Professional Business Selling Characteristics of professional business selling; Functions of sales management; Professional selling process; Recent trends and development in business selling. Business Marketing Segmentation and Positioning Segmentation in business markets; Market segmentation methods; Overview of positioning strategy in business markets. Business Marketing Strategies Developing and implementing the product, pricing and promotional mix strategy in business marketing; Nature of channel decisions; Channel cooperation and managing channel conflicts. 333

344 Teaching/Learning Approach Fundamental principles of business to business marketing with real-life examples will be introduced during lectures. Students will be encouraged to actively participate in student-centred in-class activities, such as case studies and discussions of real-life cases in both lectures and seminars. When appropriate, guest speeches will be arranged to further reinforce students learning of the subject. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in the tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Vitale, R. and Giglierano, J. J. (2011) Business to business marketing: Analysis and practice in a dynamic environment, 1 st Ed., South-Western College Publishing. References Bingham, F. G., Gomes, R. and Knowles, P. (2005) Business marketing, 3 rd Ed., McGraw-Hill. Dwyer, F. R. and Tanner, J. F. Jr. (2009) Business marketing: Connecting strategy, relationship, and learning, 4 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Lau, G. T. (2007) Business marketing: An Asia perspective, 1 st Ed., McGraw-Hill. Morris, M. H., Pitt, L. F. and Honeycutt, E. D. Jr. (2001) Business-to-business marketing: A strategic approach, 3 rd Ed., Sage Publications Inc. Wright, R. (2004) Business-to-business marketing: A step-by-step guide,1 st Ed., Financial Times Press. 334

345 CCN2152 China s Economy Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English, supplemented with Chinese Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims at providing students with concepts for understanding the economy of China since 1949, with emphasis on its post 1978 reform period. Students are expected to explain why China was successful in maintaining a high economic growth in the past two decades. Moreover, they will be able to analyse the role of China is playing in the world today and to identify challenges China will be facing in the future. This subject also helps students develop their analytical skills and critical thinking for lifelong learning. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the historical background of China s economic development understand China s achievements and setbacks in economic performance since its economic reforms identify the range of factors that determine economic performance in China and analyse how various factors affect China s overall economic performance understand the economic developments in important sectors in China compare economic developments in major economic regions in China Indicative Contents History of the Development of China s Economy Lessons from history; Experiments in economic policies and political upheavals; Economic Reforms since Deng s open door policy; Future reforms: problems and prospects. China s Macro Economy Growth; Economic fluctuations; Economic policies; Institutional and political factors affecting the macro economy. Topics in China s Economic Developments China and the world economy; Investment: domestic and foreign; Consumption; Demographics and human capital; Institutional developments. Individual Sectors Resources; Automobile industry; Retail and consumer product industry; Telecommunication industry; Banking and financial system. Regional Differences in Economic Development 335

346 Teaching/Learning Approach Well-designed questions covering the learning outcomes will be asked to raise students interest and a road map will be used to get students prepared for a lecture. The same set of questions will be asked at the end of a lecture to ensure that the learning outcomes have been achieved. Occasional problem-based learning activities related to current economic issues happening in China may be used to encourage students participation and critical thinking. Students will be required to do news reading and they need to explain and comment on their news cutting during the tutorials. This will not only reinforce their understanding by applying the knowledge they have learnt, but also strengthen their communication skills. Activities such as group discussions, debates and presentations will also be arranged to motivate students to analyse the current issues in China s economy. Assessment Approach Effective assessment tools will be used, including debates, job interviews, case studies, presentations, written reports, tests and an examination, so as to develop and assess students critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. Students will be required to actively participate in the learning process through reading articles, doing projects and conducting self-study. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook There is no prescribed textbook. This is a dynamic topic mainly involving current issues. Lecture summaries and supplementary notes will be distributed from time to time. References Cai, F. and Lin, Y. (2003) Chinese Economy, McGraw Hill. Chow, G. C. (1987) China s Economic Transformation, Blackwell Publishers. Robert F. A. and Kueh,Y. Y. (1996) The Chinese Economy Under Deng Xiaoping, Oxford University Press. Wu, J. (2005) Understanding and Interpreting Chinese Economic Reform, Thomson. Wu, J. (2005) China Economic Reform, McGraw Hill. 336

347 Useful Websites ( 中 國 資 訊 行 ) (Ministry of Commerce of the People s PRC) (Trade Development Council) (World Trade Organisation) (China Economic Information) (National Bureau of Statistics) (China Daily) (People s Daily) (Institute of World Economics and Politics) Journals, Periodicals China Business Review China Economic Review The China Quarterly China and World Economy 337

348 CCN2153 Commercial Banking in Hong Kong Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims at providing students with an understanding of the basic structure and practices of banking services and products of the commercial banks in Hong Kong. It equips students with analytical skills that are necessary for the understanding of the complexity of domestic and international banking and the techniques of credit assessment in loan management, with a focus on personal and business customers. It also provides students the foundation of professional skills and knowledge in the financial service market. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the roles and functions of commercial banks in the financial industry understand the daily banking operations of commercial banks conduct business analysis of key banking products and their recent development understand key aspects relating to the techniques of credit assessment Indicative Contents Banking System of Hong Kong Legal definition of bank; Structure of a commercial bank; Regulatory framework for commercial banks in Hong Kong. Account Operations Banker-customer relationship and its contractual terms; Hong Kong cheque clearing and settlement system; Methods of domestic and cross-border money transferpayment by cheques and other instruments. Banking Services for Personal Sector and Business sector Deposit accounts; loans and advances; Foreign exchanges services; Bonds/guarantee; Electronic banking; Private Banking and other financial services. International Settlement Foreign exchange practice and risk control; Methods of settlement; Trade finance; Export credits insurance. 338

349 Bank Lending Principles of bank lending and advance control Securities for lending; Financial statement analysis. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction of theoretical legal aspects of banking practices and the explanation of key concepts in banking operations, with specific reference to recent development of banking products wherever appropriate. Tutorials will, through case studies and problem based learning, encourage critical analysis of the course materials and the application of theories to the real-life banking operations. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Hong Kong banking system and practice. (1998) The Hong Kong Institute of Bankers. References Banking supervision in Hong Kong. (2003) Hong Kong Monetary Authority. Chan, B. C. S. (2000) Hong Kong banking law and practice, Vol. 1 & 2, HKIB. Abrahams, C. and Zhang, M. (2009) Credit risk assessment : The new lending system for borrowers, lenders, and investors, J. Wiley & Sons. Ko, S. H. (1998) Law and practice of banking services in Hong Kong, City University of Hong Kong Press. Luk, K. W. (2011) International trade finance: A practical guide, City University of Hong Kong Press. Tokley, I. (2009) Hong Kong banking and practice, Butterworths. Banking Ordinance, HKSAR Government. 339

350 CCN2154 Ecotourism and Heritage Tourism in Hong Kong Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to explore the influence and relations of ecotourism and heritage tourism for the development of sustainable tourism in Hong Kong. Students are introduced the basic concepts and perspectives of ecotourism and heritage tourism with local examples. The impacts of modern tourism and the evolution of ecotourism are discussed. The subject highlights the urgency of sustainable tourism in Hong Kong and arouses the awareness of tourism practitioners on the importance of environmental and heritage protection. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the basic concepts and definition of ecotourism and heritage tourism appreciate the role and importance of sustainability in developing ecotourism and heritage tourism in Hong Kong enunciate the work involved in planning and designing ecotourism and heritage tourism products apply relevant concepts in assessing the sustainability of ecotourism and heritage tourism products Indicative Contents Concept and Definition of Ecotourism and Heritage tourism Emerging trends of ecotourism and heritage tourism; Scope of ecotourism and heritage tourism; Linking heritage and ecological system with tourism management; Impacts of tourism; Responsible tourism; Sustainable tourism development. Ecotourists: Consumers of Nature and the Environment Characteristic of the ecological, geographical and climatic systems in Hong Kong; Consumer behaviour of eco-tourists in Hong Kong. Planning and Developing Ecotourism Principles of ecotourism development; Eco-tourist management and tourism; Designing routes for visits in Hong Kong. Tourism and Cultural Heritage Management Principles of heritage tourism development; Types of heritage assets; Authenticity and Commercialization. 340

351 Creating Cultural Tourism Market Visitor accessibility to heritage assets; Promoting the cultural tourism market; Potential heritage tourism products in Hong Kong. Current Issues for Ecotourism and Cultural Tourism in Hong Kong Implications for ecotourism and cultural tourism; Balance between stakeholders; Challenges in developing ecotourism and heritage tourism in Hong Kong. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities such as field studies may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Weaver, D. (2008) Ecotourism, 2 nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons Australia Ltd. References Harris, R., Williams, P. and Griffin, T. (2002) Sustainable Tourism: A Global Perspective, 2 nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann. Leask, A. and Fyall, A. (2006) Managing World Heritage Sites, 1 st Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann. Mckercher, B. (1998) The Business of Nature-based Tourism, 1 st Ed., Hospitality Press. Mckercher, B. and Cross, H. (2002) Cultural Tourism the Partnership between Tourism and Cultural Heritage Management, 1 st Ed., The Haworth Hospitally Press. 341

352 Richardson, J. (1993) Ecotourism and Nature-Based Holidays, 1 st Ed., Simon and Schuster Australia. 香 港 野 外 生 態 協 會 編 : 香 港 生 態 旅 遊 香 港 萬 圖 書 公 司,2004 版 342

353 CCN2155 Workplace Practicum Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English and/or Chinese Teaching Pattern 300 working hours (or above) subject to the arrangement between the College and the industry partner or equivalent combination* (such as 150 working hours and 21 hours of workshops or training provided by the industry staff or the staff designated by the College) *However, the combination must consist of at least 150 working hours. Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CCN2164 Extensive Workplace Practicum Assessment 100% continuous assessment (Pass/Fail grades): (I) Assessment by industry partner 50% (II) Assessment by subject lecturer on: Student s learning and self-reflective journal/log 25% Student s progress report 25% Students are required to pass in both components (I & II) to get an overall pass in the subject. Aims This subject provides students opportunities to develop independent learning, working skills and attributes such as good sense of responsibility and commitment, through practicum in a real world setting. This subject also helps students to apply and reflect on the theories and concepts learnt from other subjects. The subject also helps students develop their interpersonal skills and critical thinking for lifelong learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand organisational settings and develop general business knowledge and essential practical skills required in workplaces apply the theories and concepts learnt in real-world settings prepare for the realities of workplaces develop attributes for all-roundedness in workplaces, such as independent thinking, good attitudes, commitment and interpersonal communication skills identify their strengths and weaknesses in a workplace environment Structure of the Practicum Students may consider one of the following periods for their practicum: Semester 1: the required internship hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester 1. Semester 2: the required internship hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester

354 Summer Term: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of the academic year. Depending on the nature of the particular internship position, the internship period may deviate from the above. In such cases, the expected period of the internship will be communicated to the students concerned. However, students are not expected to complete their internship in more than two academic terms unless otherwise stated. Work Nature Student must provide internship to ONE internship partner unless otherwise stated. The nature of the work must be the same or similar in scope to that of the study discipline. A subject lecturer has the right to determine students of which discipline(s) are eligible to apply. Students must obtain from the subject lecturer approval on the work nature before the commencement of an internship. Teaching/Learning Approach Workshops, sharing and consultation sessions will be provided to students concerned, at the discretion of the designated staff. Students will be guided to write learning and self-reflective journal(s)/log(s) and progress report(s) throughout the period of the practicum. Review meetings with concerned parties will be conducted by the subject lecturer if necessary. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assessment report(s) by the industry partner, learning and self-reflective journal(s)/log(s) and assessment report(s) to be written by students and assessed by the subject lecturer. The format and content of assessment forms can either be based on those specified by the Work- Integrated-Education (WIE) committee or designed by the subject lecturer. Study Effort Required Besides the specified internship hours, students are expected to spend additional hours on their own to develop skills required for their internship duties. Indicative Readings Baird, B. N. (2005) The internship, practicum, and field placement handbook, 4 th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. Designated staff may assign or recommend relevant readings or materials to students if necessary. 344

355 CCN2156 Front Office and Housekeeping Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2116 Front Office Operations and CCN2119 Housekeeping Operations Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with an overall concept of rooms division in the hotel industry. As both the front office and housekeeping department play important roles in rooms division, the management techniques for both departments are highlighted. Besides, this subject explains and illustrates the yield management at the front office and the strategic management of the housekeeping department. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: define the role and responsibility of the front office manager and executive housekeeper in the rooms division integrate sales forecast at reservation into the manpower planning of front office and housekeeping department assess the functions of both the front office and the housekeeping in the hotel, including their relation to guests safety and hotel security apply the integrated computer technology to the operations of the front office and the housekeeping. Indicative Contents Front Office Management Roles and responsibilities of the front office manager; Human resources planning; Managing service quality; Determining of room rates; Employee recruitment in front office. Control of Reservation and Full House Management Central reservation system concepts and applications; Yield management at reservation; Coordination between reservation and front office; Hotel property management systems. Housekeeping Management Roles and responsibilities of executive housekeeper; Human resources planning; Housekeeping supplies planning; Planning and implementation for guest room maintenance and cleaning. Housekeeping Control System Purchase planning and inventory control of Housekeeping supplies; Outsourcing practice and management; Uniform control procedures; Quality control for services. 345

356 Safety and Security Management Perspectives of guests safety and security; Work procedures safeguarding the property and the guest; Roles and responsibilities of the front office and the housekeeping personnel in maintaining the safety and security of the property and the guest. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will provide general concepts of the subject and to stimulate students to have further reading on the current practices. Videos will be used to facilitate teaching. Hotel visits may be arranged for students. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Kasavana, M. L. and Brooks, R. M. (2009) Managing front office operations, 8 th Ed., American Hotel & Lodging Association. Nitschke, A. A. and Frye, W. D. (2008) Managing housekeeping operations, Rev. 3 rd Ed., American Hotel & Lodging Association. References Bardi, J. A. (2011) Hotel front office management, 5 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. Casado, M. A. (2000) Housekeeping management, John Wiley & Sons. Ismail, A. (2002) Front office operations and management, Thomson Delmar Learning. Rutherford, D. G. (2011) Hotel management and operations, 5 th Ed.,Wiley. 346

357 Schneider, M., Tucker, G. and Scoviak, M. (1999) The professional housekeeper, 4 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. 347

358 CCN2157 Hospitality and Tourism Marketing Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2003 Introduction to Marketing Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides an introduction to the marketing concepts and techniques inherent in the hospitality and tourism industries. By evaluating the marketing environments affecting the hospitality and tourism businesses, students are able to understand how to define and select target markets, establish marketing plans and programmes, implement control and evaluation plans. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: recognise the roles of service marketing in the hospitality and tourism industry examine the consumer and organisational buyer s behaviour and their influences to market the hospitality and tourism products understand the marketing environment and establish marketing plan for the hospitality and tourism businesses identify the roles of various channels of distribution channels in the hospitality and tourism industry Indicative Contents An Overview of Hospitality and Tourism Marketing Definition of marketing; Service characteristics of hospitality and tourism industry; Consumer buying behaviours; Buyer decision process of individual travellers, group business markets and meeting planners. Hospitality and Tourism Marketing Environment (Micro and Macro Environment) Hospitality and travel marketing system; Internal and external environment affecting the hospitality and tourism industry. Hospitality and Tourism Marketing Mix and Marketing Plan 8 Ps of hospitality and tourism marketing (Product, Partnership, People, Packaging, Programming, Place, Promotion, Pricing) and their roles; Strategic and tactical marketing planning; Contents and steps of a marketing plan in hospitality and tourism industries. Destination Marketing Importance of destination marketing; Destination marketing organisations; Role of Hong Kong Tourism Board; Benefit of tourism; Determinates of tourism demand; Visitor segments; Tourism strategies for creating and investing in tourism attractions. 348

359 Distribution Mix and the Travel Trade Nature and importance of distribution systems; Types of distribution channels; The travel trade; Online travel services; Consortia; Global distribution channel; Roles of different travel intermediaries; Marketing to travel trade. Personal Selling and Professional Sales Process Roles of personal selling; Categories of personal selling; Sales process in the hospitality and tourism industry. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will provide an introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by practical examples in the hospitality and tourism industries wherever appropriate. Videos will be used occasionally to facilitate teaching as well. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will emphasise the concepts and applications of the principles and key issues taught, using an interactive approach. Activities in tutorials may include student discussions, role demonstration, case studies and students presentations. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, role-demonstrations, presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Morrison, A. M. (2010) Hospitality and travel marketing, 4 th Ed., Delmar Cengage Learning. References Abbey, J. R. (2003) Hospitality sales and marketing, 4 th Ed., Educational Institute of the American Hotel & Lodging Association. Bowie, D. and Buttle, F. (2004) Hospitality marketing: An introduction, Elsevier Butterworth- Heinemann. Hudson, S. (2008) Tourism and hospitality marketing: A global perspective. 349

360 Kotler, P., Bowen, J. T., and Makens, J. C. (2010) Marketing for hospitality and tourism, 5 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Reid, R. D. and Bojanic, D. C. (2010) Hospitality marketing management, 5 th Ed., John Wiley & Sons. 350

361 CCN2158 Introduction to Management Science Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 40% coursework 60% examination Aims This subject aims at introducing to students the methodology of management science as a scientific approach to managerial decision-making and planning. It raises students awareness of the range of managerial problems that can be solved using optimisation methods. It also imparts to students the concepts, theories and techniques of a range of optimisation techniques. The subject also helps students develop their competence and confidence in formulating and solving optimisation problems. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: identify situations in which management science can be used effectively to aid managerial decisionmaking and planning formulate and build basic model of optimisation problems select and apply appropriate techniques to solve particular optimisation problems interpret and evaluate the results from optimisation models in the context of a problem scenario develop analytical skills in applying a scientific approach to structure and solve managerial problems develop quantitative skills in using a range of optimisation techniques Indicative Contents Linear Programming (LP) Model formulation; Graphical solution for two-variable problems (isoline and corner point methods); Special cases in LP (infeasibility, unboundedness, redundancy and alternative optima); The simplex method; Sensitivity analysis. Integer Programming (IP) Model formulation; Cutting plane method; Branch and Bound method; Three types of IP problems (Pure, Mixed and Zero-one IP problems). Network Models Minimal-spanning tree technique; Maximal-flow technique; Shortest-route technique. Project Management PERT network; Activity-on-node technique; Activity completion time and variance estimation; Beta probability distribution; Critical path; Probability of project completion; CPM; Project crashing. 351

362 Queuing Models Characteristics of a queuing system; Total expected cost and service level; Kendall notation; Three queuing models (M/M/1; M/M/m; M/M/1 with finite source). Decision Analysis Decision-making under certainty; Decision-making under risk; Decision-making under uncertainty; Decision tables; Decision tress (Expected value of sample information; Sensitivity analysis). Inventory control models Inventory decisions; Total inventory cost and order quantity; Economic order quantity (EOQ); EOQ without the instantaneous receipt assumption; Quantity discount models. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of key optimisation concepts and techniques, with reference to real-life business contexts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts and techniques taught in lectures and to apply these concepts and techniques to analyse and solve in-class exercise. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including individual assignments, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students analytical and quantitative skills in applying a range of optimisation techniques. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Taylor, B. W. (2010) Introduction to management science, 10 th Ed., Prentice Hall. References Curwin, J. (2008) Quantitative methods for business decisions, 6 th Ed., Thomson. Taha, H. A. (2011) Operations research: An introduction, 9 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Winston, W. L. (2004) Operations research: Applications and algorithms, 4 th Ed., Thomson/Brooks/Cole. 352

363 CCN2159 Introduction to Procurement Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject aims at introducing students to a process-based approach to procurement. It raises students awareness of the importance and complexity of business supply management and purchasing activities in organisations. It also imparts to students the concepts, theories and tools of procurement at both business and tactical levels. This subject also helps students develop their competence and confidence in formulating appropriate procurement mix in different business situations. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the key processes of procurement management in order to assess their roles in a business system apply the knowledge of procurement to make appropriate procurement decisions in different business situations recommend sourcing strategies and develop supplier evaluation systems for the acquisition of different products and services appraise the impact of electronic procurement and recommend electronic solutions for different buying situations Indicative Contents Nature and Role of Procurement Objectives, processes and tasks of procurement; Role of procurement in the value chain and business strategies; Contribution of procurement to business. Industrial Buying and Market Structures Characteristics of industrial market; Typologies of buying situations; Perfect competition; Monopoly; Monopolistic competition; Oligopoly. Sourcing Strategies and Procurement Decisions Sourcing and Procurement processes; Quality and supplier evaluation; Cost analysis and price analysis; Contract administration; Total cost of ownership. Procurement Innovation and Market Research Electronic procurement; Procurement market research; Procurement ethics. 353

364 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the understanding and explanation of key concepts and theories of procurement. Group discussions and activities will be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Occasionally, corporate visits will be arranged to facilitate students learning. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including in-class exercises, case studies, individual and group projects and presentations, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Benton, W. C. (2010) Purchasing and supply chain management, McGraw-Hill. References Bowersox, D. J., Closs, D. J. and Cooper, M. B. (2010) Supply chain logistics management, 3 rd Ed., McGraw Hill/Irwin. Coyle, J. J., Bardi, E. J. and Langley, Jr. C. J. (2009) Supply chain management: A logistics perspective, 8 th Ed., South-Western Cengage Learning. Monczka, R. M., Trent R. and Handfield, R. (2009) Purchasing and supply chain management, 4 th Ed., South-Western. Murphy, P. R. and Wood, D. F. (2011) Contemporary logistics, 10 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Waters, D. (2009) Supply chain management: An introduction to logistics, 2 nd Ed., Palgrave Macmillan. Recommend Journals Asia-Pacific International Journal of Business Logistics 354

365 International Journal of Logistics Management International Journal of Physical Distribution and Management Journal of Business Logistics Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management Journal of Supply Chain Management 355

366 CCN2160 Negotiation Skills Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with analytical skills, interpersonal skills and bargaining skills that are necessary for maximising the value of settlement in negotiation. It provides the conceptual framework for students to analyse the negotiation situation, and to understand how to apply the negotiation theories and tactics to achieve the best negotiation outcomes. The dual emphasis on theories of bargaining and participation in the bargaining exercise is designed to enable students to become more effective negotiators and managers. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the nature and process of negotiation prepare effectively for negotiation apply the techniques, strategies, and theories involved in improving negotiation effectiveness manage concession to maximise gains overcome negotiation barriers through effective communication Indicative Contents Negotiation Preparation Definition of limits and alternatives; Concepts of BATNA; Setting of target point and resistance point; Assessment of self, opponents, and the situation. Negotiation Theory Negotiation phases; Distributive negotiation; Integrative negotiation; Major business negotiation tactics and strategies. Communication Skills in Negotiations Verbal and non-verbal behaviour; Questioning techniques; Telephone negotiation and other communication channels used for negotiations. Power in Negotiations Nature of power, Source of power, Persuasion techniques for enhancing negotiation power. 356

367 Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Worksheets may also be used to guide students through the reasoning behind more complex negotiation theories. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess negotiation as well as analytical and communication skills. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Carrell, M.R. and Meavrin, C. (2008) Negotiating Essentials: Theory, Skills, and Practices, Pearson Education. References Lewicki, R., Saunders, D. M. and Minton, J. W. (2011) Essentials of Negotiation, 5 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. Thompson, L. (2009) The Mind and Heart of the Negotiator, 4 th Ed., Prentice-Hall. Fisher, R. and Ury, W. N. (1991) Getting to Yes: Negotiating Agreement without Giving In, Houghton Mifflin. Hodgson, J. (2000) Think on Your Feet in Negotiations New Approaches to Creative Thinking and Problem Solving, Prentice Hall. Jeremy G. T. (2001) How to Negotiate Better Deals, Management Books. Manning, G. L. and Reece, B. L. (2010) Selling Today: Creating Customer Value, 11 th Ed., Prentice Hall. 357

368 CCN2161 Retirement and Estate Planning Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject equips students with knowledge and skills that are necessary for developing retirement and estate plans. It provides an introduction to the general strategies used in understanding different retirement schemes as well as estate planning. This subject also helps students to compare the advantages and disadvantages of different retirement and estate plans and understand the key issues involved in the planning, administration, and legal aspects of the relevant schemes. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: describe the characteristics of different retirement plans of clients identify the information required for the financial plan addressing needs for retirement and estate planning make recommendations to the selection of the most appropriate types of retirement plans appreciate the estate administration process in Hong Kong understand of the features of wills, trusts, and other tools used in asset protection Indicative Contents Retirement Planning Roles of retirement planning; Types of retirement programs; Annuities concept. Distribution Planning Post-retirement saving and investing strategies; Different types of distribution options; Tax consideration. Basic Retirement Needs Analysis Planning for the client s needs; Tools for fact-finding and needs analysis; Development of a qualified plan. Estate Planning Principles of estate planning; Estate planning documents; Methods of property transfer at death; Estate duty liability. Wills and Trusts Requirements of a valid will; Feature of trusts; Wills Ordinance; Intestates Estates Ordinance. 358

369 Estate Administration Process Hong Kong Probate Process; Probate and Administration Ordinance. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the principles and conceptual framework of retirement and estate planning. They will also cover different financial planning strategies leading to the selection of the most appropriate types of retirement schemes and/or estate planning. Tutorials will, through case studies and problem based learning, encourage critical analysis of the course materials and the application of theories to real-life situations. They will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the application of theories taught. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used including: presentations, case studies, written reports, tests and an examination designed to develop and assess critical thinking as well as analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Institute of Financial Planners of Hong Kong (2007) Employee benefits and estate planning, 1 st Ed., John Wiley & Sons (Asia). William, J. A. (2001) Ernst & Young s retirement planning guide, 2 nd Ed., Wiley. References Lochray and Lochray (1992) Financial planner s guide to estate planning, 3 rd Ed., Prentice Hall. Probate and Administration Ordinance. (cap. 10). Rejda, G. E. (1999) Social insurance and economic security, 6 th Ed., Prentice Hall. Yolles, R. and Yolles, M. (2001) Getting started in retirement planning, 1 st Ed., Wiley. Sherrin, C. H. (2007) Butterworths Hong Kong probate, administration and trustee handbook, 2 nd Ed., LexisNexis. Willoughby and Halkyard (1999) A guide to Hong Kong estate duty, 3 rd Ed., Butterworths. 359

370 CCN2162 Service Management in Hospitality and Tourism Industry Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites Nil Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject provides students with knowledge and skills on service management in the hospitality and tourism industry. It covers the roles and nature of service in the hospitality and tourism industry, and explores its future challenges. Students are introduced to various customer service strategies and professional service skills. The concepts of organisational culture and environment, staffing and training for service management, and hospitality service systems are also highlighted. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the roles and importance of service management in hospitality and tourism industry articulate the concepts of customer service strategy in the context of management and operation of hospitality and tourism organisations apply professional service skills in hospitality and tourism industry understand current issues of quality service management in the rapidly changing hospitality and tourism industry Indicative Contents Service Concept, Culture and Quality Role and nature of service; Introduction to service industries; Service products; Service encounter; Customer behaviour; Customer loyalty. Customer Service Strategy Guest experience; Meeting guest expectation; Setting the scene for guest experience; Developing the hospitality culture. Managing Service Staff Staffing for service; Training for service; Motivation and empowerment; Involving guest coproduction; Service leadership. Professional service skills Verbal and non-verbal communication skills; Handling complaints; Teamwork development; Customer loyalty and employee retention; Cultural awareness. 360

371 Understanding Service Applications Application of service quality management in various sectors; Global strategies for hospitality and tourism services; Technology in services; Current issues in service industries. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Student Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Kandampully, J. (2007) Service management: The new paradigm in hospitality, Australia Pearson. Lucas, R. W. (2009) Customer service: Building successful skills for the twenty-first century, McGraw- Hill. References Davidoff, D. M. (1993) Contact: Customer service in the hospitality and tourism industry, Pearson Prentice Hall. Ford, R. and Heaton, C. (1999) Managing the guest experience in hospitality, Thomson Delmar Learning. Harris, E. K. (2009) Customer service: A practical approach, 5 th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. King, J. H. and Cichy, R. F. (2005) Managing for quality in the hospitality industry, Pearson Prentice Hall. 361

372 Noe, F. P., Uysal, M. and Magnin, V. P. (2010) Tourist customer service satisfaction: An encounter approach, Routledge. Williams, C. and Buswell, J. (2003) Service quality in leisure and tourism, CABI Publishing. 362

373 CCN2163 Tourist Behaviour Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN1103 Introduction to Tourism Assessment 60% coursework 40% examination Aims This subject aims to provide students with an overview of the role of consumer behaviour in travel and tourism. It incorporates the theoretical frameworks and concepts derived primarily from mainstream marketing, consumer behaviour and the tourism discipline to form a comprehensive understanding of tourist behaviour. This subject helps students to not only develop an understanding of tourist behaviour, but also apply theory into practice. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: understand the core concepts underlying tourist consumer behaviour, both as the purchaser and the user, in tourism marketing enunciate the applicability of consumer behaviour models generated by the marketing discipline in the tourism context assess and analyse tourists decision process within the dynamic and complex travel and tourism phenomenon understand the current global trends in tourist behaviour and its relevance to international tourism marketing Indicative Contents Introduction to Tourist Behaviour The role of consumer behaviour in tourism marketing; Overview of tourist behaviour in relation to the products, services and markets of the hospitality industry; Reasons for buying particular products or services. The Tourist Consumer Decision Process Purchase decision making process; Main concepts and models of tourist behaviour; Travel motivation and determinants. Social and Cultural Influences on Tourist Behaviour Components of cultural impacts on tourist consumption; Environmental influences which fall into two broad categories: cultural influences and reference group influences affecting tourists. 363

374 Current Issues in Tourist Behaviour and its Implications to International Tourism Marketing Nature of demand in different segments and market sectors of tourism; Tourist behaviour and the marketing concept; Global tourism demand and national differences. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of concepts and theories supported by hypothetical and real examples wherever appropriate. Group discussions and activities may be arranged to stimulate students interests or their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding and to explore further the applications of theories taught. Activities in tutorials will normally include student presentations and discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Swarbrooke, J. and Horner, S. (2007) Consumer behaviour in tourism, 2 nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann. Williams, A. (2002) Understanding the hospitality consumer, 1 st Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann. References Chon, Kaye, Pizam, Abraham and Yoel. (2000) Consumer behaviour in travel and tourism, Routledge. FitzGerald, H. (2002) Cross-cultural communication for the tourism and hospitality industry, Rev. Ed., Hospitality Press. Schiffman, L. G. and Kanuk, L. L. (2006) Consumer behaviour, 9 th Ed., Pearson Education Inc.. Yvette, R. and Turner, L. W. (2003) Cross cultural behaviour in tourism: concept and analysis, 1 st Ed., Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann. 364

375 CCN2164 Extensive Workplace Practicum Level 2 Credits 6 Medium of Instruction English and/or Chinese Teaching Pattern 600 working hours (or above) subject to the arrangement between the College and the industry partner or equivalent combination* (such as 300 working hours and 42 hours of workshops or training provided by the industry staff or the staff designated by the College) *However, the combination must consist of at least 300 working hours. Prerequisites Nil Exclusions CCN2155 Workplace Practicum Assessment 100% continuous assessment (Pass/Fail grades): (I) Assessment by industry partner 50% (II) Assessment by subject lecturer on: Student s learning and self-reflective journal/log 25% Student s progress report 25% Students are required to pass both components (I & II) to get an overall pass in the subject. Aims This subject provides students opportunities to develop independent learning, working skills and attributes such as good sense of responsibility and commitment, through practicum in a real world setting. This subject also helps students apply and reflect on the theories and concepts learnt from other subjects. This subject will also help students develop their interpersonal skills and critical thinking skills for lifelong learning. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: Appreciate organisational settings and develop general business knowledge and essential practical skills required in workplaces apply the theories and concepts learnt into real-world settings work for the realities of workplaces develop attributes for all-roundedness in the workplace, such as independent thinking, good attitudes, commitment and interpersonal communication skills identify their strengths and weaknesses in a workplace environment Structure of the Practicum Students may consider one of the following periods for their practicum: Semester 1: the required internship hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester 1. Semester 2: the required internship hours should normally be completed by the end of Semester

376 Summer Term: the required working hours should normally be completed by the end of the academic year. Depending on the nature of the particular internship position, the internship period may deviate from the above and in such cases, the expected period of the internship will be communicated to the students concerned. However, students are not expected to complete their internship in more than two academic terms unless otherwise stated. Work Nature Student must provide internship to ONE internship partner unless otherwise stated. The nature of the work must be the same or similar in scope to that of the study discipline. The subject lecturer has the right to determine students of which discipline(s) are eligible to apply. Students must obtain from the subject lecturer approval on the work nature before the commencement of an internship. Teaching/Learning Approach Workshops, sharing and consultation sessions will be provided to students concerned at the discretion of the designated staff. Students will be guided to write learning and self-reflective journal(s)/log(s) and progress report(s) throughout the period of the practicum. Review meetings with concerned parties will be conducted by the subject lecturer if necessary. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including assessment report(s) by the industry partner, learning and self-reflective journal(s)/log(s) and assessment report(s) to be written by students and assessed by the subject lecturer. The format and content of assessment forms can either be based on those specified by the Work- Integrated-Education (WIE) committee or designed by the subject lecturer. Study Effort Required Besides the specified internship hours, students are expected to spend additional hours on their own to develop skills required for their internship duties. Indicative Readings Baird, N. (2005) The internship, practicum, and field placement handbook, 4 th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall. Sweitzer, H. F. and King, M. (2009) The successful internship, 3 rd Ed., Cengage Learning. The subject lecturer may assign or recommend relevant readings or materials to students if necessary. 366

377 CCN2283 Fundamentals of Operations Management Level 2 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Prerequisites Nil Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims The aim of this subject is to provide students with a basic understanding of principles, concepts and applications of operations management in both manufacturing and service organisations. This subject emphasises how operations management function interacts with the other functional areas within an organisation and contributes to the overall betterment of society. It also imparts to students the principles, theories and tools of operations management at both strategic and tactical levels. This subject also helps students develop their critical thinking and analytical skills through lectures, latest case studies and experiential learning on operations management in real business settings, thereby preparing them for further studies and employment The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: articulate the roles of operations management discuss the social, political, economic and technological aspects of operations management explain the principles of manufacturing and service operations integrate and apply the key concepts and techniques in operations management and other business activities analyse the various approaches and models in integrated operations management which reflect sound business practices Indicative Contents Role of Operations Management in the Economy and Organisation Role of operations management in the economy; Global business environment in operations management; Operations strategies; Relationships between operations processes and other functional areas within an organisation. Process Management and Analysis Process Management; Project Management. Quality Management Total quality management; Statistical quality control process; Quality assurance; Quality costs; Outsourcing; Risk and control management. Capacity Management Service operations and management; Capacity planning; Aggregate planning; Capacity requirement planning; Master production schedule; Production planning; Economies and diseconomies of scale. 367

378 Facility Planning Facility management; Facility decisions: location, capacity and layouts; Transportation and delivery management; Network design decision. Demand Management Demand forecasting for customers and operations; various forecasting methods. Inventory Management Vendor managed inventory; Inventory control; Materials requirement planning; Inventory models; Inventory systems for independent and dependent demand; Bullwhip effect; Purchasing process; Sourcing strategies. Operations Management Innovation Just-in-time concept; Global supply chain management, strategies and control; Lean production system; Kanban system; Operations management ethics; Information technology and systems. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures focus on the introduction and explanation of key concepts in operations management. Group discussions and activities will be arranged to stimulate students interests or increase their awareness of practical implications of some concepts. Occasionally, corporate visits will be arranged to facilitate students learning. Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real business situation. The activities in tutorials normally include student presentations, discussions of problem sets and case studies. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including group projects and presentations, case studies, written reports and tests designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as generic skills including critical thinking, analytical and problem-solving skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Students are expected to spend approximately a total of 130 hours on activities such as attending lectures and tutorials, doing assignments, reading and revision. Indicative Readings Recommended Textbooks Heizer, J., 2014, Principles of Operations Management: Sustainability and Supply Chain Management, 9 th edition, Boston: Pearson Jacobs, F. R., 2014, Operations and Supply Chain Management, 14th edition, McGraw- Hill 368

379 References Heizer, J. and Render, B., 2013, Operations Management, 11th edition, Boston: Pearson Jacobs, F.R., and Chase, R.B., 2013, Operations and Supply Chain Management, 14 th edition, McGraw- Hill/Irwin Jacobs, F.R., Berry, W.L., Whybark, D.C. and Vollmann, T.E., 2011, Manufacturing Planning Control for Supply Chain Management, 6 th edition, McGraw Hill/Irwin Krajewski, L. J., Ritzman, L. P. and Malhotra, M. K., 2013, Operations Management: Processes and Supply Chains, 10th edition, Pearson/Prentice Hall Lai, K.H. and Cheng, T.C.E., 2009, Just-in-Time Logistics, Gower Publishing, Surrey, England Peter, J., 2012, Operations Management, Oxford University Press, Oxford Schroeder, R. G., Goldstein, S. M. and Rungtusanatham, M. J., 2013, Operations Management in the Supply Chain: Decisions and Cases, 6 th edition, McGraw-Hill. Terry, H. 2012, Operations Management, Palgrave Macmillan, 3 rd edition, New York Recommended Journals International Journal of Production Economics International Journal of Logistics International Journal of Logistics Systems and Management International Journal of Operations and Production Management Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management Journal of Operations Management Journal of Engineering and Technology Management Omega 369

380 CCN3102 Introduction to Portfolio Management Level 3 Credits 3 Medium of Instruction English Teaching Pattern 28 hours of lectures 14 hours of tutorials Prerequisites CCN2113 Financial Management Assessment 50% coursework 50% examination Aims This subject introduces students to the analytical skills that are necessary in investment planning. It provides the general concepts behind the strategies used in formulating portfolios according to the risk profiles of clients. This subject also helps students understand the various tools to be used in managing portfolios, including how derivatives can be used to reduce risk exposure and how performance can be measured. The Subject Team is required to refer to the relevant Programme Curriculum Map(s) for the role of this subject in helping students achieve Programme-level Intended Learning Outcomes when preparing for the delivery and assessment of the subject. Learning Outcomes On successfully completing this subject, students will be able to: conduct risk profiling technique in association with portfolio construction understand the concepts and approaches in the process of formulating and managing a portfolio of securities appreciate the relevance of different investment products, including derivatives, in a portfolio assess performance evaluation of portfolio management Indicative Contents Personal Profiling and Risk Profiling Elements of personal profiling; Risk profiling and Life cycle analysis. Portfolio Theory Benefits of diversification; Markowitz portfolio theory; Capital asset pricing model; Equity portfolio and Bond portfolio. Derivative Option markets; Option valuation; Future markets and risk management. Performance Evaluation Passive investment; Active investment and various measure of performance. Teaching/Learning Approach Lectures will focus on the introduction and explanation of valuation in investment, with specific reference to current issues wherever appropriate. Virtual investment activities may be arranged. 370

381 Tutorials will provide students with the opportunity to deepen their understanding of the concepts taught in lectures and to apply the theories to the analysis of real financial assets. To maximise benefits, students will be required to form groups to provide their own portfolios. Presentations are expected. Assessment Approach A variety of assessment tools will be used, including fundamental analysis, presentations, case studies, written reports, test(s) and an examination designed to develop and assess students achievement of the subject intended learning outcomes as well as their generic skills, including critical thinking, analytical skills and communication skills. The actual weighting of individual coursework assessment components will be specified in the Teaching Plan for each class. The subject intended learning outcome(s) assessed in each coursework component will be communicated to students when the coursework assignment is given out. Study Effort Required Besides the 42 class contact hours for lectures and tutorials, students are expected to spend approximately 84 additional hours on their own or with fellow students for activities such as doing assignments, group work, and self-study in preparation for lectures, tutorials, test(s) and examination(s). Indicative Readings Recommended Textbook Bodie, Kane and Marcus. (2010) Essential of investments, 8 th Ed., McGraw-Hill. References Gitman and Joehnk. (2008) Fundamentals of investing, 10 th Ed., Pearson Addison Wesley. Reilly, F. K. and Norton, E. A. (2006) Investments, 7 th Ed., South-Western. 371

382 Hong Kong Community College Hotline : (852) [email protected] Website : PolyU Hong Kong Community College (Hung Hom Bay Campus) 8 Hung Lok Road, Hung Hom, Kowloon Fax : (852) PolyU Hong Kong Community College (West Kowloon Campus) 9 Hoi Ting Road, Yau Ma Tei, Kowloon Fax : (852) Hong Kong Community College, an affiliate of PolyU, is a non-profit-making company limited by guarantee.